This is a modern-English version of The Draughtsman's Handbook of Plan and Map Drawing: Including instructions for the preparation of engineering, architectural, and mechanical drawings., originally written by André, George G. (George Guillaume). It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.


Please see the Transcriber’s Notes at the end of this text.

Please see the Transcriber’s Notes at the end of this text.


Cover image

THE
DRAUGHTSMAN’S HANDBOOK
OF
Planning and Map Creation.


PLATE 1.

PLATE 1.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

Plan shewing Principal Characters of work used in Mapping.

Plan displaying the main characters from the work used in Mapping.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (500 KB)


THE

THE

DRAUGHTSMAN’S HANDBOOK

DRAFTER’S HANDBOOK

OF

OF

PLAN AND MAP DRAWING,

Planning and Mapping,

INCLUDING INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREPARATION OF

INCLUDING INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREPARATION OF

ENGINEERING, ARCHITECTURAL, AND MECHANICAL DRAWINGS.

Engineering, architectural, and mechanical drawings.

With Numerous Illustrations and Coloured Examples.

With many illustrations and colored examples.

BY
GEORGE G. ANDRÉ, C.E., M.S.E.

BY
GEORGE G. ANDRÉ, C.E., M.S.E.

Spon

LONDON:
E. & F. N. SPON, 48, CHARING CROSS.
NEW YORK:
446, BROOME STREET.

1874.

LONDON:
E. & F. N. SPON, 48, Charing Cross.
NEW YORK: 446 Broome St.
1874.


[v]

[v]

PREFACE.

fancy line

The main purpose of the present work is to be a handy book of reference for draughtsmen engaged chiefly in Topographical Drawings. But to have limited its use to one class of draughtsmen, and especially to the skilled members of that class, would have necessitated the discovery of more cogent reasons for its publication than its author has yet been able to adduce. Works of such a character exist already, and though their imperfections are numerous, they fulfil their purpose in a fairly satisfactory manner. But had the field been clear in this direction, it is so restricted in extent that to have entered upon it would have been to undertake a labour that promised little fruit, for such a work could be only of small utility even to those for whom it was specially intended. It was, therefore, determined to make the present handbook generally useful by giving it a much wider scope. And hence, if the intention has been efficiently carried out, it may claim a place in every drawing office, be it that of the Topographer, the Hydrographer, the Surveyor, the Military, Civil, or Mechanical Engineer, or the Architect. Whether or not this degree of success has been achieved, is not for the author to judge. But should he have failed to reach the high mark at which he has aimed, he hopes, with some degree of confidence, that he has at least succeeded in producing a book which the experienced draughtsman will find valuable as a book of reference, and which the pupil may constantly consult with profit. A want has long been felt by draughtsmen for some work of this kind to which they might refer their pupils in the office, and it may not be presumptive to suppose that the present work has supplied that want. To render it convenient for this twofold purpose, it has[vi] been divided into two parts. In the first part the principles and practices of the art have been clearly but briefly explained and illustrated; while in the second part, the application of the principles previously learned has been treated of, and such information given as relates directly to the duties of the practitioner.

The main purpose of this work is to serve as a handy reference book for draftsmen primarily involved in Topographical Drawings. However, limiting its use to just one type of draftsman, especially to the experienced members of that group, would have required stronger reasons for its publication than the author has been able to provide. Similar works already exist, and while they have many flaws, they do fulfill their purpose fairly well. But if the market had been clear in this area, it's so narrowly defined that to pursue it would have been a task with little reward, as such a work would be of limited use even to its intended audience. Therefore, it was decided to make this handbook generally useful by broadening its scope. As a result, if this intention has been effectively executed, it should have a place in every drawing office, whether that of the Topographer, Hydrographer, Surveyor, Military, Civil, or Mechanical Engineer, or Architect. Whether this level of success has been achieved is not for the author to decide. However, if he has not reached the high standard he aimed for, he hopes with some confidence that he has at least created a book that experienced draftsmen will find valuable as a reference, and that students can consult profitably. There has long been a need among draftsmen for a work of this kind to which they could refer their students in the office, and it may not be too bold to suggest that this work fulfills that need. To make it convenient for this dual purpose, it has been divided into two parts. The first part clearly but briefly explains and illustrates the principles and practices of the art, while the second part discusses the application of the principles previously learned and provides information directly related to the duties of the practitioner.[vi]

Of course, in a work of the present character, originality in the matter is neither to be expected nor desired; enough if the manner shows some novelty, and is such as to add value to the matter.

Of course, in a work like this, originality in the content is neither expected nor necessary; it’s sufficient if the style shows some uniqueness and enhances the substance.

Although the preparation of maps and plans has received the chief share of attention, engineering, architectural, and mechanical drawings have been largely treated of. Projection, orthographic, isometric and perspective, has been altogether omitted as beyond the scope of the work; but Colouring and Shading have been fully considered and profusely illustrated.

Although making maps and plans has been the main focus, engineering, architectural, and mechanical drawings have also been extensively discussed. Projection, orthographic, isometric, and perspective have been left out as they are beyond the scope of this work; however, coloring and shading have been thoroughly addressed and richly illustrated.

The Plates appended as examples for reference are numerous and varied in character; they have been specially prepared by B. Alexander, to whom the author offers his warmest thanks for the truly admirable manner in which he has executed the work entrusted to him.

The Plates provided as examples for reference are many and diverse; they have been specially prepared by B. Alexander, to whom the author extends his deepest gratitude for the outstanding way he has completed the task assigned to him.

16, Craven Street, Charing Cross,
September 7th, 1874.

16 Craven St, Charing Cross,
September 7, 1874.


[vii]

[vii]

CONTENTS.

fancy line
PART I.—THE ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS.
Section I.—The Design Studio and its Furniture.
PAGE
  The Drawing Office 1
Instruments 2
Materials 5
Precautions and Remarks 9
Section II.—Geometry Problems. 15
Section III.—Lines, Dots, and Their Combinations.
  Straight and Curved Lines 27
Lines of uneven thickness 30
The Broken Line 30
The Dotted Line 31
Combinations of Straight, Broken, and Dotted Lines 31
The Wavy Line 33
Grass-land 34
Swamps and Marshy Ground 35
Sand and Gravel 35
Woodland 36
Uncultivated Land 37
Contour Lines 37
Section IV.—Colors.
  Flat-tints 40
Conventional Colours 44
Water 45
Grass-land 45
Marsh 45
Sand and Gravel 46
Mud[viii] 46
Woodland 46
Cultivated Land 47
Uncultivated Land 47
Buildings 47
Roads and Streets 47
Fences 47
Section V.—Shading.
  Application of Shade Lines 48
Cylindrical Surfaces 50
Shading Lines 50
Shading Lines on Cylindrical Surfaces 51
Shading Lines in Topographical Drawings 52
The Vertical System of Shading 57
Shading in Colours 63
Hill Slopes 63
Cylindrical Surfaces in Mechanical Drawings 64
PART II.—APPLICATIONS.
Section I.—Text, Borders, and North Indicators.
  Lettering 66
Borders 69
North Points 69
Section II.—Scales.
  Scales of Distances 70
Scales of Construction 74
Section III.—Plotting.
  Reference Lines and Points 78
Plotted Points 78
To Plot Reference Lines and Points 78
To Plot Traverse Reference Lines 84
To Plot Detail[ix] 89
To Plot Contours 90
To Plot Sounded Points in Submerged Districts 90
Errors and Error-sheets 91
To Plot Vertical Sections 92
To lay down Gradients 95
To Plot a Section from a Contour Map 96
Section IV.—Plans of Civil Engineers and Surveyors.
  Standing Orders of Parliament   98
Documents required 99
Plans 100
Book of Reference 101
Sections 101
Working Sections 103
Regulations of Local Government Board:—
  Boundary Maps 104
Maps for Division into Wards 104
Plans of Proposed Works 105
General Plan 105
Detailed Plan 106
Mining Plans 106
Estate and Town Plans 107
Section V.—Mapping.
  Single Stroke Streams 109
Double Line Streams and Rivers 110
Colouring Streams or Rivers 110
Islands and Sand-banks, Sandy and Pebbly Beds of Rivers 110
Roads and Pathways 111
Mountain Passes 111
Fords and Ferries, Toll-gates 111
Telegraph Lines and Stations 112
Railways, Stations, and Termini 112
Size of Cities, Towns, and Villages 112
Sketching, Shading, and Copying Hills 113
Field Sketching 114
Examination of Maps in the Field 118
Section VI.—Mechanical and Architectural Drawings.[x] 121
Section VII.—Copy and Reduce.
  Drawing from Copy 127
Copying by Tracing 128
Copying by Transfer 129
Reducing and Enlarging 130
The Pantograph 131
The Eidograph 136
Drawings for Lithographers and Engravers 141
Trigonometric Formulas 142
Inclined Measurement 143
Curvature and Refraction 143
Index 144

[xi]

[xi]

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.

fancy line
  Page. Plate.
Letters, examples of .. 4, 5, 6
Angle, to bisect 16 ..
Angles, to construct 16, 17 ..
Arch, equilateral 23 ..
——, horse-shoe 24 ..
——, lancet 24 ..
——, obtuse 24 ..
——, ogee 25 ..
——, semi-elliptical 23 ..
——, Tudor 24 ..
Architectural drawings, colouring of. .. 24
Borders .. 1, 3, 8, 9, 13
Boundaries, parish, &c. .. 3, 15
Canal gates .. 1, 11
Chart, example of .. 18
Cinquefoil, Gothic 26 ..
Circle, to describe through given points. 17 ..
——, to find the centre of 18 ..
Cliffs .. 1, 11, 14
Colouring architectural drawings. .. 24
—— maps and plans .. 1, 3, 13, 17, 28, 33
—— mechanical drawings .. 22, 23, 27
Copse .. 1, 10
Corners .. 1, 3, 8, 9, 13
Cylinders shaded 51, 52 ..
Cyma recta 25 ..
—— reversa 25 ..
Quays .. 1, 11
Drawings, architectural, colouring of. .. 24
——, isometrical .. 27
——, mechanical, colouring of. .. 22, 23, 27
Eidograph .. 26
Ellipse, to draw 22 ..
Equilateral triangle, to construct. 16 ..
Embellishments .. 25
Fortifications, plans .. 32
——, sections .. 31
Geology maps .. 28
—— sections, coloured .. 20, 21
Grass 34 1, 17
Gravel 35 1
Ports .. 11
Hexagon, to describe 21 ..
Hill shading 53, 55, 56, 58, 61, 62, 63 ..
Hills .. 1, 12, 14, 17
—— in colour .. 12, 14
Isometric drawings .. 27
Lakes .. 1, 3, 11,
Land, cultivated 32 1, 13
——, uncultivated 37 ..
Lettering, examples of .. 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 25
Line, to divide into equal parts. 15 ..
Lines, broken 30 ..
——, contour 37 ..
——, dotted 31 ..
——, section 29 ..
——, shade 49 ..
——, to bisect 15 ..
Maps, geological[xii] .. 28
——, Ordnance, example of. .. 18
—— and plans, colouring of. .. 1, 3, 13, 17, 28
Marsh 35 1, 10, 11
Mechanical drawings, colouring of. .. 22, 23, 27
Mining plans .. 33
North directions .. 9
Elliptical, to construct 18 ..
Pantograph .. 26
Parabola, to draw 21 ..
Pentagon, to describe 20 ..
Perpendicular, to erect 15 ..
Plans, estate .. 3, 17
——, fortifications .. 32
——, mining .. 33
——, office .. 2
——, parliamentary .. 13, 19
——, reducing or enlarging .. 26
——, town improvements .. 13
—— and maps, colouring of. .. 1, 3, 13, 17, 28, 33
Plotting, examples of 82, 85, 86, 88, 93 ..
Quarry sites .. 1
Quatrefoil, Gothic 26 ..
Circle radii, to draw 18 ..
Railways .. 1, 3
Rectangles, similar, to construct 20 ..
Rivers .. 1, 11, 12, 17
——, outlines of 30 ..
Roads .. 1, 3, 12, 17
Rocks .. 1, 11
Roofs 30 ..
Sand 35 1
—— banks .. 1, 11
Scales 71, 75, 76 2, 3, 8, 9, 13
Section plotting, example of 93 ..
Sections, fortifications .. 31
——, parliamentary .. 19, 21
—— of strata, examples of colouring. .. 20, 21
Shade, scales of, for hills 53, 58 ..
Signs, various, used in Indian and Colonial maps. .. 29, 30
——, ——, used in maps, plans, &c. .. 15, 16
——, ——, used in military maps and fortifications. .. 31, 32
Soundings .. 11, 18
Square, to construct 19 ..
——, multiple of, to construct. 19 ..
Squares, proportional, to construct. 19, 20 ..
Swamps and marshy ground. 35 1, 10
Tangent, to draw 18 ..
Titles, examples of .. 3, 7, 8
Towns .. 1, 3, 11, 13
Traverse plotting, example of. 85,86,88 ..
Trees 36 1, 3, 10, 13, 17
Trefoil, Gothic 25 ..
Triangles, to construct 16, 17 ..
Towns .. 1
Water, flowing 33 11
——, standing 29 1, 11
—— in section 30 ..
Wood-graining 32 ..
Wood in section 32 ..
Woods 36 1, 3, 10, 17

[1]

[1]

PLAN AND MAP DRAWING.

Planning and Map Creation.


PART I.—THE ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS.

fancy line

Section I.—The Design Office and its Equipment.

There are few occupations so dependent for their correct performance upon minute matters of detail as that of the draughtsman. Things apparently the most trivial are sufficient to render inaccurate or to mar the appearance of the otherwise most carefully and skilfully executed design, and as the value of a drawing depends wholly upon its accuracy and its appearance, it is obvious that such matters of detail, however trivial they may be in themselves, demand careful attention. We have, therefore, deemed it desirable to preface our remarks on Plan and Map Drawing with a brief description of the instruments and materials required, and of the mode of using them which experience has shown to be the best.

There are few jobs that rely so much on small details as that of a draughtsman. Even seemingly minor things can make a drawing inaccurate or ruin the look of an otherwise carefully crafted design. Since the value of a drawing is entirely based on its accuracy and appearance, it’s clear that these details, no matter how trivial they might seem, require close attention. Therefore, we thought it would be helpful to start our discussion on Plan and Map Drawing with a brief overview of the tools and materials needed and the best ways to use them based on experience.

The Drawing Office.

—The first essentials of a room for drawing in are—that it shall be quite free from damp and be well lighted. The position of the windows is a matter of some importance, and though persons have largely to accommodate themselves to circumstances in this respect, it is desirable to know what are the most suitable conditions, in order that they may be complied with as far as circumstances permit. Skylights are unsuitable, because the light entering from above is liable to be intercepted by the body, and especially by the hands of the draughtsman; besides which, the light from a skylight is seldom sufficient. For the same reasons, a window[2] placed very high in the room is objectionable. When possible, a western aspect is to be preferred, as the light from this direction is less variable and lasts later in the day than from other directions. Blinds of some kind are necessary to modify the light when the sun shines directly upon the window. Gaslights should be situate about 3 feet above the drawing table, and there should be two burners, placed not less than 2 feet apart, as otherwise the hands and the instruments will cast shadows which will prevent fine lines and points from being seen.

—The essentials for a drawing room are that it should be completely free of damp and well-lit. The placement of the windows is quite important, and while people often have to adapt to their circumstances, it’s helpful to know what the best conditions are so they can follow them as much as possible. Skylights are not ideal because the light coming from above can be blocked by the artist’s body, especially their hands; also, light from a skylight is rarely enough. For the same reasons, a window that is placed very high in the room is not recommended. If possible, a west-facing window is preferred, as the light from this direction is less changeable and lasts longer in the evening than light from other directions. Some kind of blinds are necessary to adjust the light when the sun shines directly on the window. Gaslights should be installed about 3 feet above the drawing table, with two burners positioned at least 2 feet apart, as otherwise, the hands and tools will cast shadows that obstruct the clarity of fine lines and details.

The drawing table should be placed under the window; it should have a breadth of about 2 feet 6 inches, and its height should be 3 feet 8 inches at the back and 3 feet 6 inches at the front. The front edge should be rounded over.

The drawing table should be positioned under the window; it should be about 2 feet 6 inches wide, and its height should be 3 feet 8 inches at the back and 3 feet 6 inches at the front. The front edge should be rounded.

Dusters and means for washing the hands must also be provided, as it is requisite to frequently dust the paper and the instruments, and to keep the hands perfectly clean.

Dusters and handwashing supplies must also be provided, as it's necessary to regularly dust the paper and tools, and to keep the hands completely clean.

Instruments.

—All drawing instruments should be of the best workmanship, for it is impossible to obtain accuracy with imperfect tools, and they must be kept in order by careful handling. For all kinds of drawing, compasses of three sizes are required, the ordinary compass, the bows, and the spring bows. The best compasses are those which are sector-jointed. The points should be kept sufficiently sharp not to slip on the paper, but not so sharp as to readily penetrate it. It is also important that the points be thin and round, as otherwise, when several arcs have to be struck from the same centre, the compass leg is apt to make a large hole, which is utterly destructive of accuracy. The pencil leg should be kept exactly equal in length to the steel leg, for true circles cannot be drawn when one leg is shorter than the other. In removing the movable leg, care should be taken to draw it straight out, as nothing spoils the instrument so soon as wrenching the leg from side to side. In using the compasses, the instrument should be held lightly between the thumb and the forefinger only. It should not be pressed upon the paper; but it should rest equally upon both points. If the weight of the[3] hand be thrown upon the instrument the points will penetrate the paper. Care should also be taken to bend the joints so as to keep both legs perpendicular to the paper. If attention be not given to this matter, the steel leg will make a large hole in the paper, and the ink leg will make a ragged line, because only one of the nibs will touch.

—All drawing tools should be of the highest quality because you can’t achieve accuracy with subpar equipment, and they need to be well-maintained through careful handling. For all types of drawing, you need compasses in three sizes: the standard compass, the bows, and the spring bows. The best compasses are those with sector joints. The points should be sharp enough to grip the paper without slipping, but not so sharp that they easily pierce it. It’s also important for the points to be thin and round; otherwise, when drawing multiple arcs from the same center, the compass leg can create a large hole that ruins accuracy. The pencil leg should be the same length as the steel leg because you can’t draw perfect circles if one leg is shorter than the other. When removing the movable leg, it’s crucial to pull it straight out; twisting it side to side can quickly damage the tool. When using the compasses, hold the instrument lightly between your thumb and forefinger. Don’t press down on the paper; both points should rest evenly. If you put too much weight from your hand on the tool, the points will dig into the paper. You should also make sure to bend the joints so that both legs remain perpendicular to the paper. If you don’t pay attention to this, the steel leg will create a large hole in the paper, and the ink leg will make a jagged line since only one nib will make contact.

Next in importance to the compass, and of more frequent use, is the drawing pen. The draughtsman should possess at least two of these instruments, one for fine, and another for medium lines. When the proper opening of the nibs for fine lines has once been obtained, it is desirable not to change it; the pen can always be cleaned by passing a piece of drawing paper between the nibs. The cleaning of the pen should be carefully attended to; it should never be put away without having every particle of dried ink removed from it; and frequently, while in use, it should be wiped out to remove the dust, which is constantly settling in it, as well as the particles of lead that are taken up from the paper. The ink is supplied by breathing between the nibs and dipping them in the liquid, or by means of a camel’s hair brush. When the latter method is adopted, care should be taken to protect the brush from the dust floating in the atmosphere of the room.

Next in importance to the compass, and used more often, is the drawing pen. The drafter should have at least two of these tools, one for fine lines and another for medium lines. Once the right opening of the nibs for fine lines is achieved, it's best not to alter it; the pen can be cleaned by sliding a piece of drawing paper between the nibs. Cleaning the pen should be done carefully; it should never be stored without removing all dried ink; and often, while in use, it should be wiped out to eliminate the dust that constantly settles in it, as well as the bits of lead picked up from the paper. Ink can be applied by breathing between the nibs and dipping them in the liquid, or by using a camel’s hair brush. If using the brush method, make sure to keep the brush protected from the dust in the room.

After considerable wear, the drawing pen will require setting. The operation of setting requires some judgment and considerable practice, and is one of those mechanical niceties which it is difficult to describe. Generally it will be found advantageous to have the pen set by an instrument maker. As, however, this resource is not always at hand, it is desirable that the draughtsman should be able to set his own pen. The following description of the operation given by W. Binns, in his admirable work on Projection, is the best we have seen. “The nibs must be precisely of the same length, rounded in two directions, and as sharp as it is possible to make them without producing to the touch a sensation of cutting, and without scratching the surface of the paper when drawing a line, which is generally the case when one nib is longer than the other. This irregularity may be[4] detected by placing alternately the sides of the pen at an acute angle with the forefinger, and slipping the edge of the nail over the point, when the difference in length will be at once perceived; and it may be reduced by drawing a few lines, as it were, on a turkey stone, with the pen applied to the edge of a set square in the same manner as if drawing lines upon paper, but with this difference, that during the longitudinal motion of the pen the handle must be turned over in a circular manner, so as to give a rounded form to the point of the pen. If the pen be now held with the point directed towards the eye, and gently moved about so as to catch the angle of reflexion, a bright speck on one or both nibs will be observed, which must be reduced by rubbing the pen to and fro upon the stone, giving at the same time a slight rotary motion to the handle, which must be held at an angle of about 20° with the face of the stone: the point of the pen being examined from time to time, and the process of reducing the bright specks continued until the point is as fine as can be used without cutting or scratching the paper. If at this stage the two nibs are of the same length, a perfectly solid and fine line can be drawn. The beginner, however, must not be disappointed if sixty minutes are thus expended before he can produce a satisfactory result; whereas two minutes in the hands of a practitioner would suffice.”

After a lot of use, the drawing pen will need adjustment. Adjusting it takes some skill and a fair amount of practice, and it’s one of those mechanical details that’s tough to explain. Usually, it’s better to have an instrument maker do this. However, since that option isn’t always available, it’s important for the draughtsman to learn how to adjust the pen himself. The following description of the process by W. Binns in his excellent book on Projection is the best we've come across. “The nibs must be exactly the same length, rounded in two directions, and as sharp as possible without feeling like they’re cutting or scratching the paper when drawing a line, which is usually the case when one nib is longer than the other. You can detect this unevenness by placing the sides of the pen at an angle with your forefinger and sliding your nail over the tip; you’ll immediately notice the difference in length. You can reduce this by drawing a few lines on a turkey stone, applying the pen to the edge of a set square as if drawing on paper, but with the difference that as you move the pen longitudinally, you need to turn the handle in a circular motion to give the tip a rounded shape. If you hold the pen point towards your eye and gently move it around to catch the reflection, you’ll see a bright spot on one or both nibs, which you’ll need to eliminate by rubbing the pen back and forth on the stone while giving the handle a slight rotary motion, holding it at about a 20° angle to the stone’s surface. Check the tip periodically, and continue reducing the bright spots until it’s as fine as it can be without cutting or scratching the paper. If both nibs are the same length at this point, you’ll be able to draw a perfectly solid and fine line. However, beginners shouldn’t get discouraged if they spend sixty minutes on this before getting a good result, as an experienced practitioner could do it in just two minutes.”

The instrument most frequently in the hands of the draughtsman is the lead pencil. These are required of various degrees of hardness, but for lines that are to be ruled an H H is the best. The most suitable qualities of lead are those which are the most easily rubbed out; these qualities are sometimes gritty, but this defect is more than compensated by the facility with which a line may be removed from the paper. There is some art in cutting a pencil properly. If the point is intended for sketching, it should be cut equally from all sides, so as to produce a perfectly acute cone. But for line-drawing a flat or chisel point should always be used. This point is much stronger, and will last much longer than the cone point. To produce the chisel point, first cut the pencil from two sides only with a long slope, and afterwards cut the other sides away only just sufficiently to round the[5] first edge a little. This side wood is needed both to afford a support to the lead, and to show in what direction the point stands. To avoid breaking the lead, the knife should be held at an acute angle with it. A point cut in this manner may be kept in order for some time by rubbing it upon a fine file or upon a piece of glass-paper or fine sandstone.

The tool most commonly used by artists is the pencil. They come in different degrees of hardness, but for lines that need to be straight, an H H pencil is ideal. The best types of lead are those that can be easily erased; these types may feel a bit gritty, but that’s more than made up for by how easily you can wipe a line off the paper. There's a skill to sharpening a pencil correctly. If the point is for sketching, it should be sharpened equally on all sides to create a perfectly sharp cone. However, for drawing lines, a flat or chisel point is always better. This type of point is stronger and lasts much longer than a cone point. To create a chisel point, first shave the pencil down from two sides only at a gradual angle, then shave the other sides just enough to slightly round the first edge. This leftover wood provides support for the lead and indicates the direction of the point. To avoid breaking the lead, the knife should be held at a sharp angle to it. A point sharpened this way can be maintained for a while by rubbing it against a fine file or a piece of sandpaper or fine sandstone.

Of the other instruments used in drawing, nothing need be said in this work, as their use presents no difficulties. It may, however, be well to remark that no straight-edge employed for ruling lines should be less than a fourteenth of an inch thick, for if the edge be very thin, it will be impossible to prevent the ink from escaping from the pen on to it.

Of the other tools used in drawing, there's nothing more to say in this work since they are easy to use. However, it's worth mentioning that any straightedge used for drawing lines should be at least a fourteenth of an inch thick; if the edge is too thin, it will be impossible to stop the ink from running off the pen onto it.

Materials.

—The drawing papers known as Whatman’s are the best prepared of any obtainable, and they are almost universally employed. Of these there are two kinds, the smooth and the rough; the former is technically called not paper, and is the more suitable for mechanical and architectural drawings; the rough is more effective for perspectives and Gothic elevations. A third kind is known as the hot-pressed, but as it does not take colour so well as the not and the rough, it is not often used. The various sizes are indicated by their names, which are the following:—

—The drawing papers called Whatman’s are the best quality available and are widely used. There are two types: smooth and rough. The smooth type is technically called not paper and is better for mechanical and architectural drawings; the rough type works well for perspectives and Gothic elevations. There's also a third type known as hot-pressed, but since it doesn't hold color as well as the not and rough papers, it's not used as often. The different sizes are specified by their names, which are the following:—

Antiquarian 53   × 31   inches.
Atlas 34   × 26  
Columbier 34 12 × 23 12
Demy 20   × 15  
Double Elephant 40   × 26 34
Elephant 28   × 23  
Emperor 68   × 48  
Imperial 30   × 22  
Medium 22 34 × 17  
Royal 24   × 19 14
Super Royal 27 12 × 19 14

The sizes considered best, and almost universally used for engineering and architectural drawings, are the elephant, the double elephant, and the imperial. If smaller sizes are required, the half or quarter sheet is used. Antiquarian has generally a good surface to draw upon, and it is preferred by some architects. The atlas is also a[6] very good paper. Besides the foregoing, there is the machine-made or cartridge paper, which is very commonly employed for detail drawings. It has not so good a surface as the other kinds, nor is it so white; its chief advantage is found in its dimensions, it being made uniformly 53 inches wide and continuous. Hence the exact length required may be obtained. For large plans and competition drawings, either cartridge or emperor paper is used.

The preferred sizes for engineering and architectural drawings are elephant, double elephant, and imperial. If smaller sizes are needed, half or quarter sheets are used. Antiquarian paper typically has a good surface for drawing, which some architects prefer. Atlas paper is also a[6] solid option. Additionally, there’s machine-made or cartridge paper, which is commonly used for detail drawings. It doesn't have as good a surface or as bright a color as the other types, but its main advantage is its size; it’s consistently 53 inches wide and continuous, allowing for precise lengths. For large plans and competition drawings, either cartridge or emperor paper is utilized.

Paper that is to receive an elaborate drawing must be stretched and glued to the board. This operation is one requiring a little skill and some practice to perform successfully. The following is the best manner of proceeding. The sheet to be strained is laid face upward upon the board, and a wet sponge is passed rapidly along the margins, and then across the face, including the margins, until the whole surface is sufficiently and uniformly wetted. The object of wetting the margins first is to prevent cockling by allowing them a longer time to expand in than the middle of the paper. The sheet must now be left for about ten minutes, or until the wet gloss has entirely disappeared. The process of glueing to the board is as follows. A straight-edge is laid along one end of the sheet, and about 38 of an inch of the margin is turned up against it, and glued by means of a brush. The margin is then turned down and rubbed quickly with a knife-handle or, still better, a paper-knife. The opposite end of the sheet is next pulled outwards and glued in the same way, and the same method is afterwards applied to the top and bottom margins. Some draughtsmen prefer to glue down the adjoining edges, but generally it will be found that laying down successively opposite edges will give more satisfactory results. The contraction of the paper in drying should leave the face quite flat and solid. During the process of drying, it is important to keep the board in a perfectly horizontal position, as otherwise the water will gravitate towards the lower side and soften the glue, and as the sheet will dry unequally, the lower edge will break away.

Paper that will have a detailed drawing on it needs to be stretched and glued to a board. This process requires some skill and practice to do correctly. Here’s the best way to do it. Place the sheet face up on the board, and quickly use a wet sponge along the edges, then across the entire surface, including the edges, until everything is evenly moistened. Wetting the edges first helps prevent warping by giving them more time to expand than the center of the paper. Leave the sheet for about ten minutes, or until the wet shine completely disappears. To glue the paper to the board, follow these steps. Place a straight-edge along one end of the sheet and fold up about 38 of an inch of the margin against it, then apply glue with a brush. Next, fold the margin down and quickly rub it with a knife handle or, better yet, a paper knife. Pull the opposite end of the sheet outward and glue it down in the same manner, then repeat this with the top and bottom margins. Some artists prefer to glue down the adjoining edges, but it’s usually more effective to glue opposite edges in succession. The paper should contract as it dries, leaving the surface flat and smooth. While it dries, keep the board perfectly horizontal; otherwise, the water will flow toward one side, soften the glue, and cause the lower edge to come loose as the sheet dries unevenly.

The thinner the glue used the better, and for this reason the best quality should be obtained, and care should be taken to keep the[7] water supplied that is lost by evaporation. When it becomes necessary to replenish the glue-pot, the cake should be soaked in cold water for at least eight hours.

The thinner the glue, the better. For this reason, you should get the best quality possible and make sure to keep the[7] water level topped up to replace what evaporates. When you need to refill the glue pot, let the cake soak in cold water for at least eight hours.

The removal of a drawing from the board presents no difficulty. A pencil line is drawn along the margin at a sufficient distance from the edge to be clear of the glue, and a pen-knife is guided along this line by a straight-edge not used for drawing.

The removal of a drawing from the board is easy. A pencil line is drawn along the edge at a distance far enough from the glue to avoid it, and a pen knife is guided along this line using a ruler that isn’t meant for drawing.

As duplicates of drawings, especially if they be working drawings, are usually tracings, tracing paper is an important material in every drawing office. It is too well known to need a description. It is sold in various sizes, and of various prices, but the most usual sizes are 30 × 20 inches, and 40 × 30 inches, the price of the former being 3d. and that of the latter 6d. a sheet. It may also be purchased in continuous lengths of 24 yards, 42 inches wide, for about 8s., or if extra stout, 16s. A much less expensive mode of obtaining tracing paper is to make it one’s self. Common silk or tissue paper may be purchased in quantities at less than a halfpenny a sheet of the ordinary size. This may be prepared by placing a single sheet at a time flat upon a board or other smooth horizontal surface, and applying a mixture of boiled linseed oil and turpentine. This mixture should be composed of one part of oil to five of turpentine, and it should be applied with a small sponge. One coating is sufficient, and it should not be put on too thickly. Each sheet as prepared should be hung over a string stretched across the room to dry, and when all the clear oily marks have entirely disappeared, it will be ready for use. Five gills of turpentine and one of oil is enough for two quires of double-crown tissue paper. That tracing paper is best which is toughest, most transparent, and most free from greasiness. The continuous papers are more economical than those in sheets, because just the quantity required can always be taken from the roll. For durability, tracing cloth is to be recommended; it is sold in continuous lengths of 24 yards, and it may be had from 18 inches to 41 inches in width. That known as “Sager’s vellum cloth” is of excellent quality, both for transparency and strength.

As duplicates of drawings, especially working drawings, are usually tracings, tracing paper is essential in every drawing office. It’s too well known to need a description. It’s sold in various sizes and prices, but the most common sizes are 30 × 20 inches and 40 × 30 inches, with the former costing 3d. and the latter 6d. per sheet. You can also buy it in continuous lengths of 24 yards, 42 inches wide, for about 8s., or if it’s extra sturdy, 16s. A more economical way to get tracing paper is to make it yourself. Regular silk or tissue paper can be purchased in bulk for less than half a penny per sheet of the standard size. You can prepare it by laying a single sheet flat on a board or smooth surface and applying a mixture of boiled linseed oil and turpentine. This mixture should consist of one part oil to five parts turpentine and should be applied with a small sponge. One coat is enough, and it shouldn’t be too thick. Each prepared sheet should then be hung over a string stretched across the room to dry, and when all the clear oily marks have completely disappeared, it will be ready to use. Five gills of turpentine and one of oil is sufficient for two quires of double-crown tissue paper. The best tracing paper is tough, transparent, and not oily. Continuous papers are more cost-effective than those in sheets because you can take exactly the amount you need from the roll. For durability, tracing cloth is recommended; it’s sold in continuous lengths of 24 yards and can be found in widths from 18 inches to 41 inches. The type called “Sager’s vellum cloth” is of excellent quality, both transparent and strong.

[8]

[8]

Some kinds of drawings, such as specifications for Letters Patent, plans upon deeds, &c., have frequently to be made upon parchment. Special kinds of parchment can be obtained for these purposes. There is a kind made which is quite transparent, and which can be purchased cut to the Patent Office regulation size. As parchment has always a more or less greasy surface, before commencing to ink or to colour, it should be pounced over with pouncet of finely-powdered French chalk. Besides this precaution, it will be necessary to add a little ox-gall to the ink or colour.

Some types of drawings, like specifications for Letters Patent, plans for deeds, etc., often need to be made on parchment. Special types of parchment are available for these purposes. There's a version that's quite transparent, and you can buy it cut to the Patent Office's regulation size. Since parchment always has a somewhat greasy surface, before you start inking or coloring, it should be pounced with a pounce of finely powdered French chalk. In addition to this, you'll need to mix a little ox-gall into the ink or color.

Blacklead and carbonic paper are used to transfer a drawing. The former is prepared by rubbing thin paper over with a soft block of Cumberland lead; the latter by painting one side of the paper with lamp-black ground to perfect fineness in slow drying oil. Carbonic paper is used for coarser work than blacklead paper. Both may be purchased, properly prepared, at a trifling cost. The drawing to be copied is laid over the sheet of paper which is to receive the copy, with a sheet of the blacklead or carbonic paper interposed, and a tracer is passed with a light pressure over the lines. This method is mostly used to reproduce a drawing from a tracing, to obtain a finished copy from a rough draught that has become soiled and marked in designing, or to avoid errors or small alterations in the first drawing.

Black lead and carbon paper are used to transfer a drawing. Black lead is made by rubbing thin paper with a soft block of Cumberland lead; carbon paper is created by painting one side of the paper with lampblack ground to a very fine texture in slow-drying oil. Carbon paper is used for rougher work than black lead paper. Both can be bought, properly prepared, at a low cost. The drawing to be copied is placed over the paper that will receive the copy, with a sheet of black lead or carbon paper in between, and a tracer is gently moved over the lines. This method is mainly used to reproduce a drawing from a tracing, to get a clean copy from a rough draft that has become dirty and marked during design, or to avoid mistakes or minor changes in the original drawing.

A very convenient kind of paper for small working drawings, or for sketching to scale, is that known as sectional paper. This is paper ruled into small squares to a given scale with pale ink. The spaces in ordinary use are 110, 18, 16, 15, and 14 inch. Thicker lines are drawn either to mark off the inches or to count the spaces in tens. With this paper, the scale may be dispensed with, as the eye is capable of subdividing the spaces with sufficient accuracy for practical purposes. Sectional paper is much used for sections of railway cuttings and embankments, as it affords a ready means of calculating the contents. It is also made up into sketching books and architects’ pocket-books, for which purposes it is peculiarly convenient.

A very handy type of paper for small working drawings or for sketching to scale is called sectional paper. This paper is printed with small squares at a specific scale using light ink. The commonly used scales are 110, 18, 16, 15, and 14 inch. Darker lines are used either to mark inches or to count the squares in tens. With this paper, you can skip the scale since the eye can break down the spaces accurately enough for practical use. Sectional paper is widely used for sketches of railway cuttings and embankments because it makes it easy to calculate volumes. It is also available in sketchbooks and architects' pocket notebooks, making it especially convenient for those purposes.

Indian ink is used for all kinds of geometrical drawings. Being[9] free from acid, it does not corrode the steel points of the instruments, and it preserves its colour unchanged. It is difficult to get the genuine ink, but even that, as it is imported from China, varies considerably in quality. For line-drawing, that is the best quality which will wash up least when other colours are passed over it. This quality is ascertained in the trade, though not with absolute certainty, by breaking off a small portion. If it be of the right quality, it will show a very bright and almost prismatic-coloured fracture.

Indian ink is used for all kinds of geometric drawings. Being[9] free from acid, it doesn’t corrode the steel tips of the instruments, and it keeps its color unchanged. It's tough to find the genuine ink, but even then, since it’s imported from China, it varies quite a bit in quality. For line-drawing, the best quality is the one that washes away the least when other colors are applied over it. This quality is checked in the trade, though not with complete certainty, by breaking off a small piece. If it’s of the right quality, it will have a very bright and almost prismatic-colored break.

The ink is prepared for use by rubbing it with water on a slab or in a saucer. The saucer should be quite smooth inside, so as not to abrade the ink. When mixed to the requisite thickness, which may be ascertained by drawing a line with a common pen, it should be covered to protect it from the particles of dust floating about the room. Ink should be rubbed up perfectly black, for pale ink makes the boldest drawing look weak. But after it has become black, any further mixing will only injure it by rendering it viscid. It is best to use it immediately after it is mixed, for if re-dissolved, it becomes cloudy and irregular in tone. The addition of a little ox-gall will make it flow more freely from the pen.

The ink is prepared for use by mixing it with water on a smooth slab or in a saucer. The inside of the saucer should be very smooth to avoid damaging the ink. When it's mixed to the right thickness, which you can check by drawing a line with a regular pen, it should be covered to keep it safe from dust floating in the room. Ink should be ground to a deep black, because light ink makes even the boldest drawings look weak. However, once it’s turned black, further mixing will only ruin it by making it sticky. It’s best to use it right after mixing, because if it's dissolved again, it will become cloudy and uneven in tone. Adding a little ox-gall will help it flow more easily from the pen.

For erasing Cumberland lead-pencil marks, native or bottle indiarubber is sufficient; but for other kinds of pencils, fine vulcanized indiarubber is better. This, besides being a more powerful eraser, possesses the important quality of keeping clean, as it frets away with the friction of rubbing, and thus presents a continually renewed surface. Vulcanized rubber is also very useful for cleaning off drawings.

To erase Cumberland pencil marks, regular or bottled rubber works just fine; however, for other types of pencils, fine vulcanized rubber is preferable. This not only acts as a more effective eraser but also has the key benefit of staying clean, as it wears down with use and always has a fresh surface. Vulcanized rubber is also great for cleaning up drawings.

Precautions and Remarks.

—It is essential to the good appearance of a drawing that the paper be preserved perfectly clean. The hands especially should be kept as much as possible from resting on it, as the perspiration makes it greasy, and when once it has acquired this defect, clear, sharp lines become impossible. A sheet of clean paper should be constantly interposed between the draughtsman’s hands and the drawing upon which he is working. Brown or printed paper is unfit for this purpose, as the former is either greasy or tarry, and the latter is apt to soil from the printed matter. White paper can be[10] had of large size, or, if necessary, several sheets may be pasted together.

—It’s crucial for a drawing to look good that the paper stays perfectly clean. Hands, in particular, should be kept away from resting on it as sweat makes it greasy, and once that happens, it’s impossible to have clear, sharp lines. A clean sheet of paper should always be placed between the drafter’s hands and the drawing they’re working on. Brown or printed paper isn’t suitable for this because brown paper is either greasy or sticky, and printed paper can get dirty from the ink. White paper is available in large sizes, or if needed, several sheets can be pasted together.

To prevent risk of smearing the lines when inking in, it is well to begin at the top of the drawing and to work downwards, also from the right to the left for vertical lines. The ink slab or saucer should be kept on one side and never in front of the drawing. Should a drawing get a grease spot, it may be removed by the application of a hot smoothing iron to a piece of clean blotting-paper laid over the spot, but not sufficiently to be coloured over.

To avoid smudging the lines while inking, it's best to start at the top of the drawing and work downwards, and for vertical lines, move from right to left. Keep the ink slab or saucer placed to one side rather than directly in front of the drawing. If a grease spot appears on the drawing, it can be removed by applying a hot smoothing iron to a piece of clean blotting paper placed over the spot, but be careful not to apply it long enough to change the color.

Great care should be taken to correctly place the centre lines of a drawing; these lines should be drawn very fine and distinct. In working drawings the centre lines are of great importance, as the dimensions are always measured from them; in such cases it is customary to draw them in red or blue colour. In all cases where a plane figure is symmetrical with respect to a given line, whether the line exists in the figure or may be considered as existing in it, that line should be drawn first, and such a line is known as a centre line.

Great care should be taken to properly place the center lines of a drawing; these lines should be drawn very fine and clear. In working drawings, the center lines are very important, as dimensions are always measured from them; in such cases, it's common to draw them in red or blue. Whenever a flat shape is symmetrical with respect to a certain line, whether that line is actually in the figure or just imagined, that line should be drawn first, and it's called a center line.

The centres of all arcs should be marked for the ink compasses at the time the arc is struck by the pencil, by placing a small hand-drawn circle around it. It is also necessary to mark distinctly by short intersecting straight lines the exact points at which the arc begins and ends. When a number of concentric circles have to be struck, the smaller ones should be struck first, as it is more difficult when the hole in the paper becomes enlarged to draw a small circle than a large one.

The centers of all arcs should be marked for the ink compasses when the arc is drawn with the pencil, by placing a small hand-drawn circle around it. It's also important to clearly mark the exact points where the arc starts and ends with short intersecting straight lines. When multiple concentric circles need to be drawn, the smaller ones should be done first, as it becomes more challenging to draw a small circle than a large one once the hole in the paper gets bigger.

Whenever it is practicable, lines should be drawn from a given point rather than to it; and if there are several points in one of which two or more lines meet, the lines should be drawn from that one to the others; thus, for example, radii should be drawn from the centre to the points in the circumference of a circle. When a point has to be determined by the intersection of circular arcs or straight lines, these should not meet at an angle less than 30°. In dividing a line into a number of parts, instead of setting off the part repeatedly[11] along the line, it is better to set off a convenient multiple of the given part, and subdivide it; that is, to work from the whole to the parts, rather than from the parts to the whole. This is an important principle in surveying as well as in plan drawing, and in the construction of scales it ought always to be observed.

Whenever possible, lines should be drawn from a given point instead of to it; and if there are multiple points where two or more lines meet, the lines should extend from that point to the others. For instance, radii should be drawn from the center to the points along the circumference of a circle. When determining a point by the intersection of circular arcs or straight lines, they shouldn't intersect at an angle less than 30°. When dividing a line into several parts, instead of marking off the part repeatedly[11] along the line, it's better to mark off a convenient multiple of the given part, then subdivide it. In other words, work from the whole to the parts, rather than from the parts to the whole. This is a crucial principle in surveying as well as in drawing plans, and it should always be followed in the construction of scales.

Ink lines should never be erased with a knife, nor should an ink-eraser be used, especially if the drawing is to be coloured. A needle point will take out a short line in a way that leaves little trace of the error. A very good means of taking out a line is furnished by a piece of Oakey’s No. 1 glass-paper folded several times until it presents a round edge; the application of this leaves the surface of the paper in a much better condition for drawing upon than it is left in by the knife. When the drawing is to be coloured, it is best to wash out a wrong line with a small hard brush, and to slightly sponge over the place through a hole of the requisite size cut in a scrap of drawing paper, to save the other parts of the drawing. When a line has been drawn a little beyond the point at which it should terminate, it will generally be found better to avoid erasure by laying a little Chinese white over the line with a fine sable-brush. Sometimes, when erasures are unavoidable upon a drawing that is to be coloured, it will be found expedient to take the surface off the whole of the paper with glass-paper, the colour will then flow equally.

Ink lines should never be erased with a knife, nor should you use an ink eraser, especially if the drawing is going to be colored. A needle point can remove a short line in a way that leaves very little trace of the mistake. A really good way to erase a line is by using a piece of Oakey's No. 1 sandpaper folded several times until it has a rounded edge; this method leaves the surface of the paper in much better condition for drawing than a knife would. When the drawing is to be colored, it's best to wash out a wrong line with a small, stiff brush, and to lightly sponge over the area using a hole of the right size cut in a scrap of drawing paper, which helps protect the other parts of the drawing. If a line has been drawn a bit too far, it’s usually better to avoid erasing it by applying a little Chinese white over the line with a fine sable brush. Sometimes, when erasures are necessary on a drawing that will be colored, it's useful to sand down the entire surface of the paper; this way, the color will spread evenly.

In copying from a tracing, it is well to put a sheet of drawing paper underneath the tracing, for it not only shows up the lines more distinctly, but it prevents the dividers from tearing the drawing while taking off measurements.

In tracing, it's helpful to place a sheet of drawing paper under the tracing. This way, the lines are more visible, and it stops the dividers from tearing the drawing when you take measurements.

Before commencing a drawing, a cutting-off line should be drawn all round the sheet clear of the glued portion. The portions outside of this line are useful to try the drawing pen upon before drawing a line, or for trying a tint when colouring. Care should be taken not to leave too narrow a margin, for nothing detracts more from the appearance of a good drawing. For a drawing occupying a space of 1 foot or 15 inches square over all, there should be a margin of at least 5 inches all round, with the border line from 112 to[12] 2 inches from the cut-off line. Other sizes should be in proportion. This rule is given by Maxton in his ‘Engineering Drawing,’ who also has the following remarks on cutting off and preserving drawings. “The opposite side should never be cut first, for if so cut, upon nearly completing the cutting of the third side the paper undergoes contraction, and the fourth side pulling against it, is apt to snap off the remaining inch or so, and generally in towards the sheet, seldom in the margin on the outside of the cutting-off line. The sheet should be cut off all round, taking care, by applying the knife-blade under the edge of the sheet, that it is free from the board before proceeding to cut off the side or end adjoining. When the sheet has been removed, the strips of drawing paper left on the board should be simply sponged over two or three times, and they will peel off easily.

Before starting a drawing, you should draw a cutting-off line all the way around the sheet, making sure it's clear of the glued area. The parts outside this line can be used to test the drawing pen before making a line or for trying out colors when shading. Be careful not to leave too narrow a margin, as it can really affect the look of a nice drawing. For a drawing that covers an area of 1 foot or 15 inches square overall, there should be at least a 5-inch margin all around, with the border line set between 112 to 2 inches from the cutting-off line. Other sizes should follow a similar proportion. This guideline comes from Maxton in his ‘Engineering Drawing,’ who also notes the following about cutting off and preserving drawings. “The opposite side should never be cut first because if you do, while almost finishing the third side, the paper can contract, and the fourth side pulling against it might snap off the last inch or so, usually tearing in toward the sheet rather than in the margin outside the cutting-off line. The sheet should be cut off all the way around, ensuring that the knife blade is applied under the edge of the sheet so it is free from the board before cutting off the adjacent side or end. Once the sheet has been removed, the strips of drawing paper left on the board can simply be sponged a couple of times, and they will peel off easily.

“For preserving a rolled drawing, a common substitute for string, and one less likely to crease the drawing, is made as follows:—Take a strip of drawing paper from 112 to 2 inches wide and an inch longer than the circumference of the rolled drawing. About half an inch from each end make incisions, at one end in the middle and one-third of the breadth across, and at the other end at the sides, each one-third of the breadth across. Fold in these sides, so that they may pass through the incision in the opposite end of the strip; on being opened again after they have passed through, the whole will form a hoop, which, when slipped over the drawing, will keep it secure.”

“To keep a rolled drawing safe without using string, which might crease it, you can make a simple holder like this: Take a strip of drawing paper that's 1½ to 2 inches wide and an inch longer than the circumference of the rolled drawing. About half an inch from each end, make cuts—at one end cut in the middle and one-third of the way across, and at the other end cut at the sides, one-third of the way across each side. Fold in these sides so they can pass through the cuts on the opposite end of the strip. When you open it back up after passing through, it will create a hoop that can be slipped over the drawing to keep it secure.”

As cartridge paper is not always suitable, it sometimes becomes necessary to join the smaller sizes end to end. To do this neatly the edges should be cut straight, and a straight-edge laid upon the paper, allowing 38 inch to project beneath it. This portion of the paper should then be rubbed down with sand or glass-paper until the outer edge is quite thin. The edges of both sheets to be joined must be treated in this way, and covered with a thin coating of gum. Having placed these edges in contact, a strip of paper 112 or 2 inches wide should be laid upon the joint, and well rubbed with the handle of a paper-knife. If the paper thus joined has afterwards to be stretched[13] on a board, it should be done while the joint is damp. In sponging the paper, care must be taken not to go over the joint.

As cartridge paper isn’t always the best choice, it sometimes becomes necessary to join smaller sizes end to end. To do this neatly, the edges should be cut straight, and a straight edge placed on the paper, allowing 38 inch to hang off. This part of the paper should then be sanded down with sandpaper or glass paper until the outer edge is thin. The edges of both sheets to be joined must be treated this way and coated with a thin layer of glue. Once these edges are touching, a strip of paper 112 or 2 inches wide should be placed over the joint and rubbed down with the handle of a paper knife. If the joined paper needs to be stretched[13] on a board later, this should be done while the joint is still damp. When sponging the paper, take care not to wet the joint.

In joining sheets of tracing paper, the joint should never be made more than 14 inch broad. The gum used for this purpose should be very thin, and a strip of drawing paper should be placed upon each side of the joint until it is quite dry. It is a good plan to roll the joined sheet upon a roller with the joint in a line with the roller and the strips infolded over the joint. When left to dry in this position, the joint will be perfectly smooth.

In joining sheets of tracing paper, the joint should never be wider than 14 inch. The glue used for this should be very thin, and a strip of drawing paper should be placed on each side of the joint until it dries completely. A good idea is to roll the joined sheet on a roller, keeping the joint aligned with the roller and the strips folded over the joint. If left to dry this way, the joint will be perfectly smooth.

Drawings have frequently to be mounted on stretchers, and the operation of mounting is one requiring some care and practice. Generally it will be found more convenient to purchase the stretcher ready made complete; but when this is not done, care must be taken to have the frame made of sufficient strength to resist the tension of the paper when dry. The sides and the ends of a stretcher, 8 or 9 feet long, should be 4 inches broad and not less than 78 inch thick, and for any length above 18 inches there should be one or more bars across. A frame 6 feet long should have two cross-bars dividing the length into three equal parts, and they should be of such a thickness as not to come up flush with the sides and ends by about 18 inch. The inner edges on the face of the latter should be rounded down to the level of the cross-bars, and the same degree of rounding should be given to the edges of the cross-bars themselves. This is necessary to prevent the edges from showing a soiled mark on the paper. When the frame has been thus prepared, the linen or calico should be spread out on some flat surface and the frame laid upon it face downwards. The ends of the linen should then be pulled over and nailed to the back; next, the middle of the sides should be pulled over and fixed in the same way. The intermediate spaces are afterwards tacked down by placing a tack alternately on opposite sides, care being taken to pull the linen tight and smooth before inserting the tack. It is a good plan to fold the edge, as the double thickness will hold the tacking better than if single.

Drawings often need to be mounted on stretchers, and the mounting process requires some care and practice. Usually, it's easier to buy a pre-made stretcher; however, if you make your own, ensure the frame is strong enough to handle the tension of the paper when it dries. The sides and ends of a stretcher that is 8 or 9 feet long should be 4 inches wide and at least 78 inch thick, and for any length over 18 inches, it should have one or more cross-bars. A 6-foot frame should have two cross-bars dividing the length into three equal sections, and these bars should be thick enough so they don't sit flush with the sides and ends by about 18 inch. The inner edges of the sides and ends should be rounded down to the level of the cross-bars, and the same rounding should be applied to the edges of the cross-bars themselves. This helps prevent the edges from leaving a dirty mark on the paper. Once the frame is prepared, spread the linen or calico on a flat surface and place the frame face down on it. Pull the ends of the linen over and nail them to the back; then pull the middle of the sides over and secure them the same way. Tackle the spaces in between by alternately placing a tack on opposite sides, making sure to pull the linen tight and smooth before inserting the tack. It's a good idea to fold the edge, as a double thickness will hold the tacking better than a single layer.

To mount the paper on the stretcher, it should be laid face downwards[14] upon a clean flat surface, which will be all the better if covered with a clean cloth, and sponged with clean water. When the water has soaked in, apply with a flat brush some cold flour paste, and, if necessary, remove all knots or particles of gritty matter, as these would prevent the paper from lying close to the linen. The addition of a little alum to the paste improves its adhesive property, and also tends to make the drawing less stiff when dry. When a good coating of paste has been well distributed over the paper, place the stretcher upon the paper and rub the back of the linen well; then turn the stretcher over and rub down the edges of the paper. Air-bubbles between the linen and the paper may be got rid of by puncturing the spot with a fine needle and rubbing it down. Paper thus mounted may be drawn upon nearly as well as when stretched on a board. To give an edge for the T-square, a strip of wood with parallel edges may be temporarily nailed on.

To attach the paper to the stretcher, lay it face down on a clean, flat surface, which is even better if it's covered with a clean cloth and dampened with clean water. Once the water has absorbed, use a flat brush to apply some cold flour paste, and, if needed, remove any knots or gritty particles, as these will stop the paper from lying flat against the linen. Adding a little alum to the paste enhances its stickiness and helps keep the drawing flexible when dry. After spreading a good layer of paste evenly over the paper, place the stretcher on the paper and rub the back of the linen well; then flip the stretcher over and smooth down the edges of the paper. To eliminate air bubbles between the linen and the paper, poke the area with a fine needle and rub it down. Paper mounted this way can be drawn on almost as well as when it's stretched on a board. To create an edge for the T-square, you can temporarily nail a strip of wood with parallel edges onto it.

Some drawings, such as large plans of estates, have frequently to be varnished. This operation requires some skill, and can be satisfactorily accomplished only by a practised hand. The process generally adopted is to stretch the drawing upon a frame, and to give it three or four coats of isinglass size with a flat broad brush, taking care to well cover it each time, and to allow it time to dry between each coat. The best varnish is Canada balsam, diluted in oil of turpentine. This requires to be put on evenly in a flowing coat with a fine flat brush, and to be left in a warm room free from dust until it is thoroughly dry. The drawing must be in a perfectly horizontal position while the size and the varnish are being applied. In drawings to be varnished, thick lines, such as shade lines, and chalky colours should never be put on before sizing, as they are apt to blot during the process.

Some drawings, like large estate plans, often need to be varnished. This task requires skill and can only be done well by someone with experience. The usual method is to stretch the drawing on a frame and apply three or four coats of isinglass size using a flat broad brush, making sure to cover it thoroughly each time and letting it dry between coats. The best varnish is Canada balsam, mixed with turpentine. This should be applied evenly in a flowing coat with a fine flat brush, and then left in a warm, dust-free room until it's completely dry. The drawing must remain perfectly horizontal while applying the size and varnish. For drawings that will be varnished, thick lines, like shading lines, and chalky colors should never be applied before sizing, as they can smear during the process.

Should a fir drawing-board get accidentally dented, an application of water to the part will, within certain limits, bring it up to its proper level.

If a fir drawing board gets accidentally dented, applying water to the affected area will, to some extent, raise it back to its original level.

[15]

[15]


Section II.—Geometry Problems.

To bisect a given Straight Line.

—Let A B (Fig. 1) be the given line. From A and B, with any radius greater than 12 A B, draw arcs cutting each other in C and D; then the line joining C D will bisect the line A B as at E.

—Let A B (Fig. 1) be the given line. From A and B, using any radius greater than 12 A B, draw arcs that intersect at C and D; then the line connecting C D will bisect the line A B at E.

Fig. 1.

Fig. 1.

Fig. 2.

Fig. 2.

Fig. 1.

Fig. 1.

Fig. 2.

Fig. 2.

To erect a Perpendicular to a given Straight Line.

—Let it be required to erect a line perpendicular to the point B (Fig. 2) in the line A B. From any point C above the line, with radius B C, describe an arc as A B D; join A C and produce the line until it cuts the arc in D, and join D B; then will D B be perpendicular to A B.

—Let’s draw a line straight up from point B (Fig. 2) on the line A B. From any point C above the line, use the distance B C to draw an arc like A B D; connect points A and C and extend the line until it meets the arc at D, and then connect D and B; this way, D B will be perpendicular to A B.

Fig. 3.

Fig. 3.

To divide a Line into any number of equal parts.

—Let it be required to divide the line A B (Fig. 3) into five equal parts. From B, at any angle, draw B C, and on the line B C lay off five equal parts, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5; then take a set square E, and make one of the sides containing the right angle coincide with the points A and 5, and to the other side apply a straight-edge D; then by passing the set square along the edge of the straight-edge and drawing lines from the points 4, 3, 2, 1, through the line A B, we shall have the line A B divided into five equal parts through the points 1′, 2′, 3′, 4′.

—Let’s divide the line A B (Fig. 3) into five equal sections. From point B, draw a line B C at any angle, and mark off five equal segments along B C, labeled 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. Next, take a set square E, align one of the right-angle sides with points A and 5, and use a straight-edge D along the other side. Then, slide the set square along the edge of the straight-edge and draw lines from points 4, 3, 2, 1 through line A B. This will divide line A B into five equal parts at points 1′, 2′, 3′, 4′.

To draw a Line making, with another line, a given Angle.

—Let it be required to draw a line making with the line A B (Fig. 4) an[16] angle of 35°. From a scale of chords, which will be found on most scales supplied with a set of instruments, take off 60°; from the point A, with this distance for radius, describe an arc C D; lay off on this arc the distance of 35° taken from the same scale of chords; from A draw a line through this point. Then will the line A E make with the line A B an angle of 35°. The same result may be more readily arrived at by means of a protractor. If the centre point of the protractor be placed on the point A and its base made to coincide with the line A B, we can from its circumference prick off the distance of 35°, and a line drawn from A through the point thus found will make, with the line A B, the required angle of 35°.

—To draw a line that makes a 35° angle with the line A B (Fig. 4), start by using a scale of chords, which is usually included with instrument sets, to measure 60°. From point A, use this measurement as a radius to draw an arc C D. On this arc, mark off 35° using the same scale of chords. Then, draw a line from A through this point. This will create a 35° angle between lines A E and A B. Alternatively, you can achieve the same result more easily with a protractor. By placing the center point of the protractor on point A and aligning its base with line A B, you can mark a 35° angle from the protractor's edge. Drawing a line from A through this marked point will form the desired 35° angle with line A B.

Fig. 4.

Fig. 4.

Fig. 5.

Fig. 5.

Fig. 4.

Fig. 4.

Fig. 5.

Fig. 5.

To bisect an Angle.

—Let B A C (Fig. 5) be the angle which it is required to bisect. From A, with any radius, describe an arc cutting the lines A B and A C in D and E; from D and E, with the same or any other radius, describe arcs cutting each other in F, and from A draw a line through F; this line will bisect the angle as required.

—Let B A C (Fig. 5) be the angle that needs to be bisected. From A, use any radius to draw an arc that intersects the lines A B and A C at D and E; from D and E, with the same or a different radius, draw arcs that intersect at F, and from A, draw a line through F; this line will bisect the angle as needed.

Fig. 6.

Fig. 6.

Fig. 7.

Fig. 7.

Fig. 6.

Fig. 6.

Fig. 7.

Fig. 7.

To construct an Equilateral Triangle on a given base.

—Let A B (Fig. 6) be the given base. From A and B, with radius A B, describe arcs cutting each other in C; join A C and C B, which will complete the required triangle.

—Let A B (Fig. 6) be the given base. From A and B, use the radius A B to draw arcs that intersect at C; then connect A to C and C to B, which will complete the required triangle.

To construct a Triangle, the lengths of the Sides being given.

—Let it be required to construct a triangle whose sides shall be equal respectively to 6, 5, and 4. Lay down the base A B (Fig. 7), making it equal to 6 divisions of the scale; from A with radius equal to 4 divisions, and from B with radius of 5 divisions of the scale[17] describe arcs cutting each other in C; join A C and C B, which will complete the required triangle.

—Let’s construct a triangle with sides measuring 6, 5, and 4. Start by drawing the base A B (Fig. 7) and make it 6 units long. From point A, use a radius of 4 units, and from point B, use a radius of 5 units to draw arcs that intersect at point C. Finally, connect points A to C and C to B to complete the triangle. [17]

Fig. 8.

Fig. 8.

To construct an Angle equal to a given angle.

—It is required to draw a line making with the line D E (Fig. 8) an angle equal to that contained by the lines B A C. From A, with any radius, draw an arc F G, and from D, with the same radius, draw the arc H I, and make H I equal F G; then a line drawn from D through I will make, with the line D E, an angle equal to the angle B A C.

—You need to draw a line that forms an angle with the line D E (Fig. 8) that is equal to the angle created by the lines B A C. From point A, use any radius to draw an arc F G, and from point D, use the same radius to draw the arc H I, making H I equal to F G; then a line drawn from D through I will create an angle with the line D E that is equal to the angle B A C.

Fig. 9.

Fig. 9.

To construct a Triangle, the length of the base and the angles at the base being given.

—It is required to construct a triangle whose base shall equal 1 inch, and the angles at the base be 30° and 45° respectively. Having made the base A B (Fig. 9) of the required length, make the angles at A and B of the required magnitude in the manner already described (see Fig. 4), and the continuation of these lines meeting in the point G will complete the construction of the required triangle.

—You need to create a triangle with a base that is 1 inch long, and the angles at the base should be 30° and 45° respectively. After you have drawn the base AB (Fig. 9) to the correct length, create angles of 30° at A and 45° at B as previously explained (see Fig. 4). The lines you draw will meet at point G, completing the construction of the triangle.

Fig. 10.

Fig. 10.

To describe a Circle which shall pass through three given points.

—Let A B C (Fig. 10) be the points through which it is required to draw the circle. From each of these points, with any radius, describe arcs cutting each other in D and E; join the points D and E, and the point where these lines intersect will be the centre from which to describe the circle which will pass through the points A B C as required.

—Let A B C (Fig. 10) be the points through which we need to draw the circle. From each of these points, use any radius to draw arcs that intersect at D and E; connect points D and E, and the point where these lines cross will be the center to draw the circle that will pass through points A B C as needed.

Fig. 11.

Fig. 11.

To draw a Tangent to a circle.

—I. Let B (Fig. 11) be the point from which it is required to draw the tangent. Draw the radius O B,[18] and at B erect a perpendicular (see Fig. 2); then will the line B D be a tangent to the circle. II. It is required to draw a tangent from the point E in the same circle. Draw the radius O E extending beyond the circumference to F, and make E G equal to E F. From F and G, with any radius, describe arcs cutting each other in H and I; then a line drawn through these points will be a tangent to the circumference at E.

—I. Let B (Fig. 11) be the point where we want to draw the tangent. Draw the radius O B,[18] and at B, draw a perpendicular line (see Fig. 2); then the line B D will be a tangent to the circle. II. Now, we need to draw a tangent from the point E in the same circle. Draw the radius O E extending past the circumference to F, and make E G the same length as E F. From points F and G, use any radius to draw arcs that intersect at points H and I; then a line drawn through these points will be a tangent to the circumference at E.

Fig. 12.

Fig. 12.

To find the Centre of a circle.

—From any point in the circumference, as B, (Fig. 12), describe an arc cutting the circumference in A and C, and from A and C, with the same radius, describe arcs cutting the first arc in two points; through the points of intersection draw lines to the interior of the circle, and the point O where these lines intersect will be the centre of the circle.

—From any point on the circle, as B, (Fig. 12), draw an arc that intersects the circle at A and C, and from A and C, using the same radius, draw arcs that intersect the first arc at two points; through the intersection points draw lines into the interior of the circle, and the point O where these lines meet will be the center of the circle.

Fig. 13.

Fig. 13.

To draw lines which shall be Radii of a circle, the centre being inaccessible.

—Having laid off on the circumference of the arc, the distances apart of the radii, as A, B, C, &c. (Fig. 13), from each of these points, with radius greater than a division, describe arcs cutting each other as at a, b, c, &c., join A a, B b, C c, &c., and the lines so drawn will be radii of the circle as required.

—After laying off along the curve of the arc, measure the distances apart of the radii, like A, B, C, etc. (Fig. 13), from each of these points, using a radius that’s greater than a division, draw arcs that intersect at a, b, c, etc. Connect A to a, B to b, C to c, etc., and the lines you create will be the radii of the circle as needed.

Fig. 14.

Fig. 14.

To construct an Oval, the width being given.

—Draw the line A B (Fig. 14) equal to the width, and bisect A B by C D (see Fig. 1). From the point of intersection E, with radius E A or E B, describe the circle A C B F, and from A and B through F, draw the lines A G[19] and B H. From A, with radius A B, describe the arc B G, and from B, with the same radius, describe the arc A H; also from F, with radius F G or F H, describe the arc G D H, which will complete the required oval.

—Draw line A B (Fig. 14) equal to the width, and bisect A B with C D (see Fig. 1). From the intersection point E, with radius E A or E B, draw the circle A C B F, and from A and B through F, draw lines A G[19] and B H. From A, with radius A B, draw the arc B G, and from B, with the same radius, draw the arc A H; also from F, with radius F G or F H, draw the arc G D H, which will complete the desired oval.

Fig. 15.

Fig. 15.

To construct a Square on a given line.

—Let A B (Fig. 15) be the given line. At A erect a perpendicular (see Fig. 2), and from A, with radius A B, describe an arc cutting the perpendicular in C; also from B and C, with the same radius, describe arcs cutting each other in D; join C D and B D, which will complete the required square.

—Let A B (Fig. 15) be the given line. At A, draw a perpendicular line (see Fig. 2), and from A, use the radius A B to draw an arc that intersects the perpendicular at C; also from B and C, using the same radius, draw arcs that intersect at D; connect C D and B D, which will complete the required square.

Fig. 16.

Fig. 16.

To construct a square that shall be a Multiple of any given square.

—Let A B C D (Fig. 16) be the given square, and let it be required to construct a square that shall contain 2, 3, 4, &c., times its surface. Draw the diagonal B C, then the square described on B C will be double the square A B C D. Lay off D E, equal to B C, and draw C E; then the square described on C E will be three times the square A B C D. In the same manner lay off D F, equal to C E, and the square described on C F will be four times the square A B C D; and so for any multiple of the square A B C D.

—Let A B C D (Fig. 16) be the given square, and we need to create a square that will contain 2, 3, 4, etc., times its area. Draw the diagonal B C, then the square formed on B C will be double the area of square A B C D. Mark off D E, equal to B C, and draw C E; then the square created on C E will be three times the area of square A B C D. Similarly, mark off D F, equal to C E, and the square formed on C F will be four times the area of square A B C D; and this applies for any multiple of square A B C D.

Fig. 17.

Fig. 17.

To construct a square that shall be equal to 12, 14, &c., of any given square.

—Let A B C D (Fig. 17) be the given square. On A B, as a diameter, describe the semicircle A G B, and erect at the centre E the perpendicular E G. Draw G B, which will be the side of a square equal to one-half of A B C D. Lay off B F, equal to one-fourth of A B, and erect the perpendicular F H; then the square described[20] upon H B will be equal to one-fourth of A B C D. In the same manner a square may be constructed equal to any part of A B C D.

—Let A B C D (Fig. 17) be the given square. On A B, using it as a diameter, draw the semicircle A G B, and from the center E, raise the vertical line E G. Connect G B, which will represent the side of a square equal to half of A B C D. Measure off B F, which is equal to one-fourth of A B, and raise the vertical line F H; then the square drawn[20] on H B will be equal to one-fourth of A B C D. Similarly, a square can be constructed that is equal to any part of A B C D.

Fig. 18.

Fig. 18.

To construct a square that shall be in any Proportion to a given square.

—Let A B C D (Fig. 18) be the given square. It is required to construct a square which shall be to A B C D as 2 is to 5. Upon the side A B as a diameter describe the semicircle A F B, and divide the line A B into five equal parts. At the second point of division erect the perpendicular E F and join A F; the square described upon A F will be to the given square A B C D as 2 is to 5.

—Let A B C D (Fig. 18) be the given square. We need to construct a square that relates to A B C D like 2 relates to 5. Use side A B as a diameter to draw the semicircle A F B, and divide the line A B into five equal parts. At the second division point, draw the perpendicular E F and connect A F; the square drawn on A F will relate to the given square A B C D like 2 relates to 5.

Fig. 19.

Fig. 19.

To construct, upon a given base, a Rectangle, which shall be similar to a given rectangle.

—Let A E F G (Fig. 19) be the given rectangle. It is required to construct upon the base A B, one that shall be similar to A E F G. Produce A E and lay off the given base from A to B; draw the diagonal A G and produce it indefinitely. Erect a perpendicular to A B at B, and from the point D where it intersects the diagonal produced, draw D C perpendicular to A F produced. Then A B C D will be similar to A E F G. All rectangles having their diagonals in the same line are similar.

—Let A E F G (Fig. 19) be the given rectangle. We need to construct a rectangle on the base A B that is similar to A E F G. Extend A E and measure out the given base from A to B; draw the diagonal A G and extend it indefinitely. Build a perpendicular line to A B at B, and from the point D where it meets the extended diagonal, draw D C perpendicular to the extended A F. Then A B C D will be similar to A E F G. All rectangles that have their diagonals aligned are similar.

Fig. 20.

Fig. 20.

To describe a regular Pentagon on a given line.

—Let A B (Fig. 20) be the given line. Bisect A B at C, draw C F perpendicular to A B, and make C D equal to A B. Draw A D and produce it[21] indefinitely; make D E equal to half A B. From A as a centre, with A E as a radius, describe an arc cutting the perpendicular C D in F; and from A F and B as centres, with radius A B, describe arcs cutting each other in G and H; join A G, B H, F G and F H; then A G F H B will be the pentagon required.

—Let A B (Fig. 20) be the given line. Bisect A B at C, draw C F perpendicular to A B, and make C D equal to A B. Draw A D and extend it[21] indefinitely; make D E equal to half of A B. From A as a center, with A E as a radius, draw an arc that intersects the perpendicular C D at F; and from A F and B as centers, with radius A B, draw arcs that intersect each other at G and H; then connect A G, B H, F G, and F H; the shape A G F H B will be the required pentagon.

Fig. 21.

Fig. 21.

To describe a regular Hexagon.

—With a radius equal to the length of one side of the required hexagon, describe a circle (Fig. 21), and set off the same radius round the circumference of the circle, which will be thus divided into six equal parts. Join the points thus found, and the required hexagon will be completed as A B C D E F.

—With a radius that matches the length of one side of the hexagon you need, draw a circle (Fig. 21), and mark off the same radius around the edge of the circle, dividing it into six equal sections. Connect the points you found, and you will have completed the hexagon as A B C D E F.

Fig. 22.

Fig. 22.

To draw a Parabola, the base and height being given.

—Let C A (Fig. 22) equal half the base, and C D the height. From the point D draw D E parallel and equal to A C, and from the point A draw A E parallel and equal to C D. Divide D E and A E similarly, making the end E of A E correspond to the end D of E D. Through 1, 2, &c., in DE draw 1, 1; 2, 2, &c., parallel to D C. Join D to the several points 1′, 2′, &c., in A E. The parabola will pass through the points of intersections of these lines with the verticals drawn from D E to C A.

—Let C A (Fig. 22) be half the base, and C D the height. From point D, draw D E parallel and equal to A C, and from point A, draw A E parallel and equal to C D. Divide D E and A E in the same way, so the end E of A E lines up with the end D of E D. Through 1, 2, etc., in DE, draw 1, 1; 2, 2, etc., parallel to D C. Connect D to the various points 1′, 2′, etc., in A E. The parabola will go through the intersection points of these lines with the vertical lines drawn from D E to C A.

Fig. 23.

Fig. 23.

Fig. 24.

Fig. 24.

Fig. 25 a.

Fig. 25 a.

Fig. 25 b.

Fig. 25 b.

Fig. 23.

Fig. 23.

Fig. 24.

Fig. 24.

Fig. 25 a.

Fig. 25 a.

Fig. 25 b.

Fig. 25 b.

To draw an Ellipse.

—I. By means of a piece of string and pins. Place the diameters A B and C D (Fig. 23) at right angles to each other, and set off from C half the major axis at E and F; then will E and F be the two foci in the ellipse. Fix a pin at E and another at F; take an endless string equal in length to the three sides of the triangle E F C and pass it round the pins, stretch the string with[22] a pencil G, which will then describe the required ellipse. II. From the centre O (Fig. 24) describe a circle of the diameter of the minor axis of the required ellipse. From the same centre, describe another circle with a diameter equal to its major axis. Divide the inner circle into any number of equal parts as 1, 2, &c., and through these points draw radii cutting the outer circle in 4, 3, &c. From 1, 2, &c., draw horizontals, and from 3, 4, &c., draw perpendiculars cutting each other in E F, &c.; the curve traced from C through the points C E F A, &c., will complete the curve of the required ellipse. III. Let A B (Fig. 25 a) be the major and C D the minor axis of the required ellipse. On any convenient part of the paper draw two lines F G, F H (Fig. 25 b) at any angle with each other. From F with the distance E C or E D, the semi-axis minor, describe an arc cutting the lines F G, F H, in I and K; and from F with the distance E A or E B, the semi-axis major, describe the arc L M. Join I M, and from L and K draw lines parallel to I M, cutting F G, F H, in N and O. From A and B (Fig. 25 a) set off the distance F N (Fig. 25 b) in points N′, and from these points as centres, with F N as radius, describe an arc of about 15° on each side of the major axis. From C and D[23] (Fig. 25 a) set off on the minor axial line the distance FO (Fig. 25 b) in points O′, and from these points as centres, with radius FO, describe arcs of about 15° on each side of the axis C D. To obtain any number of intermediate points take a slip of paper (Fig. 25 a) and mark upon one edge, with a sharp-pointed pencil, 1, 3, equal to the semi-axis major, and 2, 3, equal to the semi-axis minor. If the slip of paper be now applied to the figure and moved over it in such a manner that the point 2 is always in contact with the major axis, and the point 1 in contact with the minor axis, the outer point 3 will describe a perfect ellipse, any number of points in which can be marked off as the “trammel” is moved into successive positions.

—I. Using a piece of string and some pins. Position the diameters A B and C D (Fig. 23) at right angles to each other, and measure half the length of the major axis from C to E and F; these will be the two foci of the ellipse. Insert a pin at E and another at F; take a piece of string that’s the same length as the three sides of triangle E F C and wrap it around the pins, pulling the string with a pencil G, which will then trace the desired ellipse. II. From the center O (Fig. 24), draw a circle with the diameter of the minor axis of the ellipse needed. From the same center, draw another circle with a diameter equal to the major axis. Divide the inner circle into any number of equal parts like 1, 2, etc., and draw radii through these points until they intersect the outer circle at 4, 3, etc. From points 1, 2, etc., draw horizontal lines, and from points 3, 4, etc., draw vertical lines that intersect each other at E F, etc.; the curve connecting C through the points C E F A, etc., will create the curve of the required ellipse. III. Let A B (Fig. 25 a) be the major axis and C D the minor axis of the required ellipse. On any convenient spot on the paper, draw two lines F G, F H (Fig. 25 b) at any angle to each other. From F, using the distance E C or E D, the semi-minor axis, draw an arc that intersects lines F G and F H at I and K; then from F, with the distance E A or E B, the semi-major axis, draw arc L M. Connect I M, and from L and K draw lines parallel to I M, cutting through F G and F H at N and O. From A and B (Fig. 25 a) measure the distance F N (Fig. 25 b) at points N′, and from these points as centers, with F N as radius, draw arcs of about 15° on each side of the major axis. From C and D (Fig. 25 a), measure along the minor axis the distance FO (Fig. 25 b) at points O′, and from these points as centers, with radius FO, draw arcs of about 15° on either side of axis C D. To get any number of intermediate points, take a strip of paper (Fig. 25 a) and mark one edge with a sharp pencil, labeling 1, 3 for the semi-major axis, and 2, 3 for the semi-minor axis. If you place this strip of paper against the figure and move it so that point 2 always touches the major axis and point 1 touches the minor axis, the outer point 3 will trace a perfect ellipse, allowing you to mark off any number of points as the “trammel” moves into different positions.

For this last method, which in practice is by far the best, we are indebted to Binns’ ‘Orthographic Projection.’

For this last method, which is clearly the best in practice, we owe it to Binns’ ‘Orthographic Projection.’

Fig. 26.

Fig. 26.

To construct a Semi-Elliptical Arch.

—The span A B (Fig. 26) and rise C D being given, divide C A and C B into any number of equal parts. Through the point D, draw E F parallel to A B, and from the points A and B erect the perpendiculars A E and B F. Divide A E and B F similarly to C A and C B. Produce C D and make C G equal C D. From D draw lines to the points 1, 2, 3, &c., in the lines A E and B F; also from G draw lines through the points 1, 2, 3, &c., in the line A B, and produce these lines until they cut those drawn from D to the corresponding numbers in A E and B F. Through the points thus obtained draw the curve of the ellipse.

—Given the span A B (Fig. 26) and rise C D, divide C A and C B into any number of equal parts. Draw E F parallel to A B through point D, and from points A and B, draw vertical lines A E and B F. Divide A E and B F in the same way as C A and C B. Extend C D to create C G equal to C D. Draw lines from D to points 1, 2, 3, etc., in lines A E and B F; also, from G, draw lines through points 1, 2, 3, etc., in line A B, and extend these lines until they intersect those drawn from D to the corresponding numbers in A E and B F. Draw the curve of the ellipse through the points obtained this way.

Fig. 27.

Fig. 27.

To draw the Gothic Equilateral Arch.

—From the points A and B (Fig. 27), with radius A B equal to the span, describe the arcs B C and A C. By joining C to A and B we obtain an equilateral triangle from which this arch derives its name.

—From the points A and B (Fig. 27), with the distance A B as the radius, draw the arcs B C and A C. By connecting C to A and B, we create an equilateral triangle from which this arc gets its name.

[24]

[24]

Fig. 28.

Fig. 28.

To draw the Gothic Lancet Arch.

—In this arch, the centres E and D (Fig. 28) from which the arcs are struck, are situate outside of and in a line with the points of springing A and B; thus it is constructed on an acute-angled triangle, as will be seen by joining C to A and B.

—In this arch, the centers E and D (Fig. 28) from which the arcs are drawn are located outside of and in line with the points of springing A and B; thus, it is built on an acute-angled triangle, as will be clear by connecting C to A and B.

Fig. 29.

Fig. 29.

To draw the Gothic Obtuse Arch.

—This arch, called sometimes the Drop-Arch, is constructed on an obtuse-angled triangle; the centres E and D (Fig. 29) being situate below and within the points of springing A and B.

—This arch, sometimes referred to as the Drop-Arch, is built on an obtuse-angled triangle; the centers E and D (Fig. 29) are located below and within the points of springing A and B.

Fig. 30.

Fig. 30.

To draw the Gothic Tudor Arch.

—On the line of springing A B (Fig. 30), take any two points as F and G, so that A F is equal to G B. Draw F E and G D cutting each other on the bisecting line through C; from F and G, with radius F A or G B, describe the short arcs, and from E and D, with radius E C or D C, describe the arcs meeting in C.

—On the line of springing A B (Fig. 30), take any two points as F and G, so that A F is equal to G B. Draw F E and G D intersecting each other on the bisecting line through C; from F and G, with radius F A or G B, draw the short arcs, and from E and D, with radius E C or D C, draw the arcs that meet at C.

Fig. 31.

Fig. 31.

To draw the Moorish Horse-Shoe Arch.

—The centres E and D (Fig. 31) from which the arcs forming this arch are struck, are situate above and within the points of springing A and B. One of[25] the most graceful forms of this arch is obtained when the height of the points E and D above the line of springing and their distance from the bisecting line through C are equal to one-third of the span A B.

—The centers E and D (Fig. 31) from which the arcs creating this arch are drawn are located above and within the points of springing A and B. One of[25] the most elegant shapes of this arch is achieved when the height of points E and D above the line of springing and their distance from the bisecting line through C are both equal to one-third of the span A B.

Fig. 32.

Fig. 32.

To draw the Gothic Ogee Arch.

—The most pleasing form of this arch is that constructed on an equilateral triangle, in the following manner. Having drawn the equilateral triangle A B C (Fig. 32), draw F G parallel to A B. Bisect the sides A C and C B and produce the bisecting lines to F G and H, which will complete the triangle F G H similar and equal to the triangle A B C. From H, with radius H A or H B, describe the arcs A E and B D, and from F and G, with the same radius, describe the arcs E C and C D.

—The best shape for this arch is one built on an equilateral triangle, like this. First, draw the equilateral triangle A B C (Fig. 32). Next, draw F G parallel to A B. Divide the sides A C and C B in half and extend those lines to F G and H, which will complete triangle F G H that is similar and equal to triangle A B C. From H, using the radius H A or H B, draw arcs A E and B D, and from F and G, with the same radius, draw arcs E C and C D.

Fig. 33.

Fig. 33.

Fig. 34.

Fig. 34.

Fig. 33.

Fig. 33.

Fig. 34.

Fig. 34.

To draw the Roman Cyma Recta and Cyma Reversa.

—Join A B (Fig. 33) and bisect A B in C. From the points C and B, with the distance B C, describe arcs cutting each other in E; and from A and C, with the same radius, describe arcs cutting each other in D; from D, with the same radius, describe the arc A C, and from E describe the arc C B. The projection of the upper end of the curve over the under, as F B, is generally equal to the height, A F, of the moulding. The same description applies to the Cyma Reversa (Fig. 34) letter for letter.

—Join A B (Fig. 33) and bisect A B at C. From points C and B, using the distance B C, draw arcs that intersect at E; then from A and C, with the same radius, draw arcs that intersect at D; from D, using the same radius, draw the arc A C, and from E draw the arc C B. The height of the curve's upper end over the lower one, as F B, is usually equal to the height A F of the molding. The same method applies to the Cyma Reversa (Fig. 34) exactly.

Fig. 35.

Fig. 35.

To draw the Gothic Trefoil.

—Having drawn the equilateral triangle A B C (Fig. 35), bisect the angles and produce the bisecting[26] lines D E F which will bisect the sides of the triangle in G H I. From A B and C as centres, with radius A H or A I, equal to half the side of the triangle, describe the arcs K L M, and those concentric with them, and from the centre O of the triangle describe the outer circles and concentric arcs, which will complete the figure.

—Once you've drawn the equilateral triangle A B C (Fig. 35), split the angles in half and extend the bisecting[26] lines D E F, which will bisect the sides of the triangle at G H I. From points A, B, and C as centers, using radius A H or A I (which is half the length of the side of the triangle), draw arcs K L M, along with those that are concentric with them. From the center O of the triangle, draw the outer circles and concentric arcs to complete the figure.

Fig. 36.

Fig. 36.

To draw the Gothic Quatrefoil.

—Draw the square A B C D (Fig. 36); bisect the sides of the square at I K L M and produce the bisecting lines to E F G H. From the angles A B C D of the square as centres, with radius A I or A M equal to half the side of the square, describe the arcs P N R S, and draw the outer concentric arcs. The circles, completing the figure, are drawn from the centre O of the square.

—Draw the square A B C D (Fig. 36); bisect the sides of the square at I K L M and extend the bisecting lines to E F G H. Using the corners A B C D of the square as centers, with radius A I or A M equal to half the length of the square's side, draw the arcs P N R S, and then sketch the outer concentric arcs. The circles that complete the figure are drawn from the center O of the square.

Fig. 37.

Fig. 37.

To construct the Gothic Cinquefoil.

—Having drawn the regular pentagon A B C D E (Fig. 37), bisect the angles and produce the bisecting lines to F G H I K, which will cut the sides of the pentagon in a, b, c, d, e. From A B C D and E as centres, with radius A a or A b, equal to one-half of the side of the pentagon, describe the arcs L M N P R, and draw the outer concentric arcs and those concentric with them. The circles are drawn from the centre O of the pentagon, as in the preceding example.

—Having drawn the regular pentagon A B C D E (Fig. 37), bisect the angles and extend the bisecting lines to F G H I K, which will intersect the sides of the pentagon at a, b, c, d, e. From points A, B, C, D, and E as centers, with a radius of A a or A b, equal to half of the side of the pentagon, draw the arcs L M N P R, and create the outer concentric arcs and those that are concentric with them. The circles are drawn from the center O of the pentagon, as in the previous example.


[27]

[27]

Section III.—Lines, Dots, and Their Combinations.

All kinds of drawings are made up of lines and dots; these are the constituent parts, the materials which the draughtsman has to employ. It is therefore essential that he should make himself acquainted with their various forms and uses, and familiar with those means of producing them which experience has shown to be the best, before commencing the study of the principles by which the representation of an object is delineated. And moreover, it is desirable that he should acquire a familiarity with the operations required in the delineation of isolated objects, previously to making any attempt to place them in combination for the purpose of producing a complete drawing. The student will, therefore, do well to study carefully and to practise diligently the forms and examples given in this Section.

All kinds of drawings consist of lines and dots; these are the basic elements the artist has to work with. It’s crucial for them to understand the different shapes and uses of these elements and to become familiar with the best techniques for creating them, based on what experience has taught, before starting to learn the principles of illustrating an object. Additionally, it's important for them to get comfortable with the processes involved in depicting individual objects before attempting to combine them into a complete drawing. Therefore, the student should take the time to study carefully and practice diligently the forms and examples provided in this Section.

Straight and Curved Lines.

—All straight lines, however short, should be ruled, whether they be drawn with the pencil or the pen. Pencil lines, which are intended to serve merely as guides to the pen, should be drawn lightly, as otherwise it will be difficult to rub them out without injuring the ink. They should also be drawn a little beyond the point at which the line is required to terminate, because the intersection of the lines at that point makes it more distinctly visible, and there is, consequently, less danger of passing beyond that point or of stopping short of it when inking in. It is very important not to stop short of the required length when ruling a straight line with a pen, for it is extremely difficult to lengthen the line subsequently without leaving the join visible. An accurate line cannot be drawn unless the point of the pencil or the pen be kept close up to the rule, and to do this the top should be inclined a little outward. Before inking in a line that has been drawn in pencil, the indiarubber should be passed lightly over it, to remove the particles of lead adhering to the paper, for if these particles are allowed to remain, they get between the nibs of the pen and prevent the ink from flowing freely. The chief difficulties in ruling a straight line with[28] the pen are, to keep it of a regular thickness throughout, and, when numerous parallel lines have to be drawn, to keep them at equal distances apart. To draw an even line, a first requisite is that the pen be in good condition. Frequently it will be found when drawing fine lines that the pen ceases to mark before the end of the line is reached, and as we have already said, it is very difficult to join a line without leaving visible traces of the operation. To remedy this defect, the pen must be reset as described in Section I. If a very hard pencil has been used, or if the pencil has been pressed heavily upon the paper, the pencil line will lie in a groove in the paper, and as the nib of the pen will not touch the bottom of this groove, the line drawn will be ragged. Another cause of unevenness is unduly pressing the pen against the rule; this pressure closes the nibs, and besides producing an irregularity in the thickness of the line, is very apt to cause a blot by forcing out the ink, which adheres to the rule when brought into contact with it. To prevent this, care should be taken to press the pen very lightly against the edge of the rule. A pen is manufactured by Stanley, of Holborn, London, which has the back nib much stiffer than the other, so that all danger of defect from this cause is removed by the construction of the instrument. To ensure a good line, the pen should rest lightly upon the paper, and the handle of the pen should make the same angle with the paper from the beginning to the end of the line. A considerable amount of practice is required to accomplish this, and to acquire the habit, the same attention should be given to the pencil as to the pen. The ability to draw a number of parallel lines at equal distances apart without measuring requires considerable training of the eye, and this training can be obtained from practice alone. This ability must be acquired before anything further is attempted, and the student who spends a good deal of time in its acquisition may have the satisfaction of knowing that while he is going through this somewhat monotonous practice, besides exercising himself in drawing accurate lines, he is acquiring a correctness of eye and a power of hand that will be of incalculable service to him later.

—All straight lines, no matter how short, should be ruled, whether drawn with a pencil or a pen. Pencil lines, meant only as guides for the pen, should be drawn lightly; otherwise, it will be hard to erase them without damaging the ink. They should also extend a bit beyond where the line needs to end because the intersection at that point makes it more visible, reducing the risk of going past it or stopping too short when inking. It’s very important not to stop short of the required length when ruling a straight line with a pen, as it’s extremely difficult to extend the line later without a visible join. An accurate line can't be drawn unless the tip of the pencil or pen is kept close to the ruler, and to achieve this, the top should be tilted slightly outward. Before inking a pencil-drawn line, gently wipe it with an eraser to remove any graphite particles sticking to the paper; if these particles remain, they can get caught between the nibs of the pen and block the ink flow. The main challenges when ruling a straight line with the pen are maintaining a consistent thickness throughout and ensuring equal spacing when drawing multiple parallel lines. To draw an even line, it’s essential that the pen is in good condition. Often, you’ll find that when drawing fine lines, the pen stops marking before the end of the line is reached, and like we mentioned, it’s very difficult to connect a line without leaving visible marks. To fix this issue, the pen must be reset as described in Section I. If a very hard pencil has been used, or if too much pressure was applied to the paper, the pencil line will sit in a groove in the paper, causing the pen nib not to touch the bottom of the groove, resulting in a jagged line. Another reason for unevenness is pressing the pen too forcefully against the ruler; this pressure can close the nibs and create irregular thickness, and it can also lead to blotting by forcing out the ink, which sticks to the ruler upon contact. To avoid this, make sure to apply very light pressure on the pen's edge against the ruler. A pen made by Stanley, based in Holborn, London, has a much stiffer back nib compared to the others, which eliminates this defect due to its design. For a good line, the pen should rest lightly on the paper, and the pen handle should maintain the same angle with the paper throughout the line. Achieving this requires a lot of practice, and both the pencil and pen should receive equal attention. The skill of drawing multiple parallel lines spaced evenly without measuring requires significant eye training, which can only be developed through practice. This skill should be mastered before progressing to more complex tasks, and a student who dedicates ample time to this repetitive practice will not only sharpen their ability to draw precise lines but will also develop a keen eye and steady hand that will prove invaluable later on.

[29]

[29]

The straight line, besides being used for the outlines of regular objects, is employed conventionally for various purposes. When it is required to show an object in section, the part in section is covered with straight and parallel lines drawn at an angle of 45° and at equal distances apart, as in Fig. 38. To represent standing water, as ponds and lakes, horizontal straight lines are drawn parallel to each other and at equal distances apart over the surface, as shown in Fig. 39.

The straight line, aside from outlining regular objects, is commonly used for different purposes. When you need to show an object in section, the sectioned part is shaded with straight, parallel lines drawn at a 45° angle and spaced equally apart, like in Fig. 38. To depict standing water, such as ponds and lakes, horizontal straight lines are drawn parallel to each other and spaced equally apart across the surface, as shown in Fig. 39.

Fig. 38.

Fig. 38.

Fig. 39.

Fig. 39.

Curved lines, when arcs of circles, are drawn by the compasses. Other curves are drawn by hand through points previously found. To draw the curve correctly through these points, unless they be very numerous, a knowledge of the nature of the curve is necessary, which the draughtsman should in all cases endeavour to obtain. When the curved line is long, it is usually inked in with the drawing pen, with the aid of an instrument called the French curve, or cardboard moulds cut for the purpose; but for short lines an ordinary fine-pointed steel-pen point, or better, a good quill is used. In general, all lines drawn by hand should be drawn towards the body, as a better command of the pen can be obtained in that direction than in any other. In inking in curves by this means, the draughtsman should proceed continuously along the pencil-drawn line by partly repeated touches with the pen point, so held that the divided points of the pen may follow partly in the same track. Each touch should be made about one-thirtieth of an inch in length, and it should begin and end fine. Each succeeding touch must begin half its length back, so that the line is advanced by one-sixtieth of an inch. In map drawing all irregular lines are drawn in this way. Tracing maps[30] will afford the student excellent practice in this mode of using the pen.

Curved lines, when they’re arcs of circles, are drawn with a compass. Other curves are created by hand through previously identified points. To accurately draw the curve through these points, unless there are many of them, it's important to understand the nature of the curve, which the designer should always try to grasp. For long curved lines, it's typical to use a drawing pen to ink them in, aided by a tool called a French curve or by using cardboard templates designed for the purpose. For short lines, a regular fine-pointed steel pen or, preferably, a good quill is used. Generally, all hand-drawn lines should be made towards the body, as it's easier to control the pen that way. When inking curves using this method, the designer should move continuously along the pencil-drawn line with slightly repeated touches of the pen point, held so that the divided points of the pen can follow the same track for part of the way. Each touch should be about one-thirtieth of an inch long, starting and ending fine. Each successive touch should begin half its length back, so the line is advanced by one-sixtieth of an inch. In map drawing, all irregular lines are created this way. Tracing maps[30] will provide excellent practice for the student in using the pen this way.

Fig. 40.

Fig. 40.

Lines of uneven thickness.

—Though generally a line is required to be of even thickness throughout, cases sometimes occur in which a variation in the thickness may be made to express some feature or quality of the landscape. The usual application of this kind of line is to mark the outline of rivers, lakes, and ponds, as shown in Fig. 40. The drawing of such a line presents no difficulty; the increased thickness is produced by going over those parts of the line again with the pen. Care must, however, be taken not to make a sudden increase in the breadth of the line, but to begin and end imperceptibly.

—Although a line is typically expected to have a consistent thickness throughout, there are situations where varying the thickness can highlight a particular feature or quality of the landscape. This type of line is usually used to outline rivers, lakes, and ponds, as shown in Fig. 40. Drawing such a line isn’t difficult; you achieve increased thickness by tracing those sections of the line again with the pen. However, it’s important not to make a sudden jump in the line's width, but rather to start and finish gradually.

Fig. 41.

Fig. 41.

Fig. 42.

Fig. 42.

Fig. 41.

Fig. 41.

Fig. 42.

Fig. 42.

Fig. 43.

Fig. 43.

The Broken Line.

—The broken line, shown in Fig. 41, is of frequent occurrence in all kinds of drawings. In architectural and engineering drawings it is usually employed in roofs, as in Fig. 42, and for water in sections, as in Fig. 43. It is also used in combination with other lines for various purposes. In drawing a succession of broken lines, care must be taken not to allow the break in one line to be immediately over that in another. The effect may be varied considerably by increasing or diminishing the extent of the break. As in section lining, the lines should be at regular intervals apart, and be all of the same degree of fineness. Broken lines are sometimes used upon the face of stone buildings, instead of marking in the joints and[31] etching or colouring. In such a case the breaks are long, and the lines widely spaced.

—The broken line, shown in Fig. 41, appears frequently in all types of drawings. In architectural and engineering drawings, it's typically used for roofs, like in Fig. 42, and for water in sections, as in Fig. 43. It's also combined with other lines for various purposes. When drawing a series of broken lines, it's important to ensure that the break in one line doesn't directly overlap with that in another. The overall effect can change significantly by adjusting the length of the breaks. Similar to section lining, the lines should be evenly spaced and consistent in thickness. Broken lines are sometimes applied on the surface of stone buildings instead of marking the joints and etching or coloring. In this case, the breaks are longer and the lines are spaced further apart.

Fig. 44.

Fig. 44.

The Dotted Line.

—Of still more frequent occurrence is the dotted line. There are two kinds of dotted lines, distinguished by the shape of the dot, and known as the long and the round dotted line. These are shown in Fig. 44, as well as a combination of the two.

—Even more common is the dotted line. There are two types of dotted lines, identified by the shape of the dot, called the long and the round dotted line. These are shown in Fig. 44, along with a combination of the two.

The round dotted line is of very general application. In architectural and mechanical drawings, it is used to distinguish hidden parts, and to mark the path of a moving piece in a machine. In plans, it is used to show the position of proposed works, to denote the walks through pleasure grounds and gardens, to indicate lines chained over in surveying, and frequently for other purposes, at the pleasure of the draughtsman. The long dotted line is employed to mark the boundaries of a township, the navigable channel of a river or creek, and in large-scale maps to show farm and bridle roads, footpaths, and the divisions of land among different tenants. The combination of the long and round dotted lines is used for the boundaries of a parish. Another combination of two round and one long dots, or sometimes of three round and one long, is used to denote proposed railways, canals, roads, and other similar works.

The round dotted line has many general uses. In architectural and mechanical drawings, it's used to show hidden parts and to trace the movement of a piece in a machine. In plans, it indicates where proposed projects will be, shows paths in parks and gardens, marks lines crossed in surveying, and is often used for other purposes at the draughtsman's discretion. The long dotted line is used to outline the boundaries of a township, the navigable channel of a river or creek, and in large maps to show farm and bridle paths, footpaths, and land divisions among different tenants. The combination of long and round dotted lines marks the boundaries of a parish. Another combination of two round dots and one long dot, or sometimes three round dots and one long, is used to denote proposed railways, canals, roads, and other similar projects.

To draw a good dotted line requires some care. The difficulty lies in keeping the dots at equal distances apart, and in making them equal in size; and unless both these conditions are fulfilled, the line will not present a pleasing appearance. To obviate this difficulty, an instrument is sold by mathematical instrument makers, called the dotting or wheel pen. But it requires very great care in using, as otherwise it frequently happens that the ink escapes from it and spoils the drawing. For this reason, its use has been generally abandoned by draughtsmen. But if the instrument were better constructed and carefully handled, it might be made to do good service.

To create a good dotted line takes some attention. The challenge is keeping the dots evenly spaced and the same size; if these two things aren't met, the line won’t look visually appealing. To solve this issue, mathematical instrument makers sell a tool called the dotting or wheel pen. However, it requires a lot of care when using it, as it often causes ink to leak and ruin the drawing. Because of this, many draftsmen have stopped using it. But if the tool were designed better and handled with care, it could be very useful.

Fig. 45.

Fig. 45.

Fig. 46.

Fig. 46.

Fig. 45.

Fig. 45.

Fig. 46.

Fig. 46.

Fig. 47.

Fig. 47.

Fig. 48.

Fig. 48.

Fig. 49.

Fig. 49.

Fig. 48.

Fig. 48.

Fig. 49.

Fig. 49.

Combinations of Straight, Broken, and Dotted Lines.

—Combinations of the foregoing lines are used for various purposes. Some[32] draughtsmen employ alternate, full, and dotted lines, to denote wood in section, as in Figs. 45 and 46; when wood is used in combination with iron or other metal, this is a very good way of distinguishing it. Wood-graining, though not made up of straight, broken, or dotted lines, yet partakes somewhat of the nature of all three kinds, and may therefore be introduced here. Oak-graining is shown in Fig. 47, and fir-graining in Fig. 48. The former is executed with the drawing pen, and requires some care and practice; the latter is most readily done with a common pen or a crow-quill. End wood is grained as shown in Fig. 49. The spring bows are very suitable for drawing in the circles, as a certain degree of turn to the nut will open the ink leg to the required distance after drawing each circle. A few broken wavy lines, called shakes, radiating from the centre, produce a good effect. When several pieces of end wood come together, the centres in each should not be in the same relative position.

—Combinations of the previous lines are used for different purposes. Some draughtsmen use alternate, full, and dotted lines to represent wood in section, as seen in Figs. 45 and 46; when wood is combined with iron or other metals, this is a great way to differentiate between them. Wood-graining, while not made up of straight, broken, or dotted lines, shares aspects of all three types, so it can be included here. Oak-graining is displayed in Fig. 47, and fir-graining in Fig. 48. The former is done with a drawing pen and needs some care and practice; the latter is easiest with a standard pen or a crow-quill. End wood is grained as shown in Fig. 49. Spring bows are perfect for drawing circles, as a slight turn of the nut will adjust the ink leg to the needed distance after each circle is drawn. A few broken wavy lines, called shakes, radiating from the center create a nice effect. When multiple pieces of end wood join, the centers in each shouldn't align in the same relative position.

Fig. 50.

Fig. 50.

Cultivated land is represented by alternate broken and dotted lines, suggesting furrows, as shown in Fig. 50. For the sake of variety, these lines are put in in sets, and in different directions, one set being usually parallel to one side of the enclosure. The lines are first ruled in continuously with the pencil, and the broken and dotted lines afterwards drawn in over them by hand. The portions of the broken lines must in this case be short, and the breaks still shorter. The dots must be[33] fine and close together; they are made by touching the paper with the point of the pen, and immediately lifting it off without dragging it over the paper. All round dots must be made in this way.

Cultivated land is shown with alternating broken and dotted lines, suggesting furrows, as illustrated in Fig. 50. For variety, these lines are arranged in sets and oriented differently, with one set usually running parallel to one side of the enclosure. The lines are initially drawn continuously with a pencil, and then the broken and dotted lines are added by hand. The segments of the broken lines should be short, with even shorter breaks. The dots need to be fine and closely spaced; they are created by touching the paper with the tip of the pen and then lifting it off immediately without dragging it across the paper. All round dots should be made this way.

The Wavy Line.

—The wavy line is very important in topographical drawings, as it is employed to represent running water, and frequently large bodies of standing water to which motion is communicated by the wind, as lakes and the sea. These rippled lines are intended to represent the ripples in the water, a purpose which they fulfil in a very pleasing manner. They must, however, be well executed, or the pleasing effect will not be produced. The operation of drawing these lines is usually regarded by the draughtsman as a tedious and an uninteresting one. But such ought not to be the case, for there is ample scope in it for the exercise of the taste and the judgment, and in proportion to the taste displayed and the judgment exercised, will be the effect of the work when executed.

—The wavy line is really important in topographical drawings because it’s used to show running water, and often larger bodies of still water like lakes and the sea, where the wind creates movement. These rippled lines are meant to depict the ripples in the water, and they do so in a very pleasing way. However, they need to be done properly, or that pleasing effect won’t happen. Most draftsmen consider the task of drawing these lines to be boring and uninteresting. But that shouldn’t be the case, as there’s plenty of room for creativity and judgment in this task, and the quality of the work will reflect the level of taste and judgment applied.

Fig. 51.

Fig. 51.

Fig. 51 shows the manner of employing these lines. In representing water by this means, the lines should be drawn from the shores towards the middle of the stream or lake, and never from the middle outwards, for if the latter mode of proceeding be adopted, the proper graduation of the spaces between the lines becomes impossible. The shore line, or outline of the water, should be a moderately thick line, and of uniform thickness throughout. The first shading line may be of nearly the same thickness as the shore line, and it must be drawn as near to it as possible. Also this shade line, as well as all subsequent ones, must follow exactly all the windings of the shore line; this is essential to a correct expression. To effect this with accuracy, care should be taken to make the space between the shore and the shade line a fine white line. The second shade line must be drawn a little finer than the first, and at a slightly increased distance from it. This gradual diminution of the thickness of the lines, and increase of the spaces, must be continued to the middle of the[34] current. The last line in the middle of a piece of water must always return to itself. When the shading lines meet the margin of the drawing, they should terminate in it, that is, they should be drawn out to the margin as though they had been continued beyond and cut off.

Fig. 51 shows how to use these lines. When representing water this way, the lines should be drawn from the shores toward the center of the stream or lake, and never from the center outward. If you do it the latter way, it becomes impossible to properly space the lines. The shoreline, or outline of the water, should be a moderately thick line with consistent thickness throughout. The first shading line can be about the same thickness as the shoreline and should be drawn as close to it as possible. Additionally, this shading line, along with all the subsequent ones, must carefully follow every curve of the shoreline; this is essential for an accurate representation. To achieve this accurately, make sure to keep the space between the shoreline and the shading line a fine white line. The second shading line should be a little thinner than the first and positioned slightly farther away from it. This gradual decrease in line thickness and increase in space should continue to the middle of the[34] water. The last line in the center of the water should always loop back to itself. When the shading lines reach the edge of the drawing, they should end there, as if they were extended beyond and then cut off.

These lines require to be drawn clean, and to do this the hand must be kept steady. This steadiness may be obtained by taking a very short hold of the pen, and resting the middle finger upon the paper. The lines, as we have already said, should be drawn towards the body, the drawing being turned about as required to facilitate this, and the last line drawn must be always kept on the left of the one being drawn. By this means the last line and the point of the pen are kept constantly in sight. It is also important that the lines should be completed successively, rather than that several should be carried on at once, because if the latter mode of working be adopted, the eye is apt to become confused by the different intervals, and an uneven distribution of the lines is the result. A principle to be attended to is that every line shall return to itself, spirals being altogether inadmissible. The distance of the lines apart and their thickness are expressive of the character of the object; thus, in a small pond, for example, they will be fine and close together; in a large pond or a lake they will be thicker and more widely spaced; and in the open sea they will be made to present a bold appearance by increasing still more their thickness and the distance between them.

These lines need to be drawn cleanly, and to do this, you have to keep your hand steady. You can achieve this steadiness by holding the pen lightly and resting your middle finger on the paper. As we mentioned earlier, the lines should be drawn towards your body, rotating the drawing as needed to make this easier, and the last line you draw should always be on the left side of the one you're currently working on. This way, you can always see the last line and the point of the pen. It’s also important to complete each line one at a time rather than working on several at once, because if you try to do too many, your eye can get confused by the different gaps, leading to an uneven distribution of the lines. One principle to keep in mind is that every line should connect back to itself; spirals are not allowed. The distance between the lines and their thickness reflect the character of the object; for instance, in a small pond, the lines will be fine and close together; in a larger pond or a lake, they will be thicker and further apart; and in the open sea, they should be made bold by increasing both their thickness and the distance between them even more.

Fig. 52.

Fig. 52.

Grass-land.

—Various combinations of lines and dots are used, conventionally, to represent certain natural features of common occurrence. As far as convenient execution will allow, these signs are made to resemble the objects denoted. Thus the sign for grass-land consists of groups of short lines, arranged like tufts of herbage, as shown in Fig. 52. Each tuft is composed of five or seven lines converging towards a point situate below the base, the middle line being the longest, and the outside ones mere dots. In drawing these groups, the base must be kept quite straight,[35] and parallel to the base of the drawing whatever the shape of the enclosure may be. Beginners usually experience considerable difficulty in keeping the base straight, the tendency being to make it curved. Great care is needed to distribute the groups evenly over the paper, and to avoid the appearance of being in rows, for the latter arrangement is destructive of that natural aspect which this sign otherwise possesses.

—Various combinations of lines and dots are used, conventionally, to represent certain natural features that are commonly found. As much as practical execution allows, these signs are designed to look like the objects they represent. For example, the sign for grassland consists of clusters of short lines arranged like patches of grass, as shown in Fig. 52. Each patch is made up of five or seven lines coming together at a point below the base, with the middle line being the longest and the outer ones being just dots. When drawing these groups, the base must remain completely straight,[35] and parallel to the bottom of the drawing regardless of the shape of the area. Beginners often find it challenging to keep the base straight, as there is a tendency to curve it. Careful attention is needed to spread the groups evenly across the paper and to avoid a rowed appearance, as this would take away from the natural look that this sign typically has.

Fig. 53.

Fig. 53.

Swamps and Marshy Ground.

—As the surface of marshy ground consists of water and grass, a combination of the signs for these objects is employed to represent it. An illustration of this is given in Fig. 53. The lines representing the water should always be ruled parallel to the base of the drawing, and they should be grouped in an irregular manner so as to leave small islands interspersed throughout the locality. These islands should be covered with grass, and to show them out more distinctly, there should be nothing but water immediately around them. The division between the land and the water should be sketched in lightly before proceeding to rule in the lines. Sometimes dotted lines are used for the water, but full lines are to be preferred. The addition of a tree here and there improves the appearance of a drawing. A distinction is frequently made between a swamp and a marsh by watering the former more extensively than the latter. In drawing in marsh land, care should be taken to make the fineness of the lines in accordance with the scale of the map, as otherwise an offensive appearance will be produced. This caution applies equally to all signs.

—The surface of marshy ground is made up of water and grass, so we use a combination of symbols for these elements to represent it. You can see an example in Fig. 53. The lines that show the water should always be drawn parallel to the bottom of the drawing, and they should be arranged unevenly to create small islands scattered throughout the area. These islands should be covered with grass, and to make them stand out more, there should only be water immediately surrounding them. The boundary between the land and the water should be lightly sketched before you start drawing the lines. Sometimes, dotted lines are used for the water, but solid lines are preferred. Adding a tree here and there enhances the look of the drawing. A difference is often made between a swamp and a marsh by having the swamp be more waterlogged than the marsh. When drawing marshland, it’s important to make the thickness of the lines match the scale of the map; otherwise, the drawing can look awkward. This advice applies to all symbols.

Fig. 54.

Fig. 54.

Sand and Gravel.

—Sand and gravel are represented by dots, the dots being made larger for the latter than for the former, as shown in Fig. 54. Simple as the operation of filling in these dots is, it is one that requires some degree of care. Beginners are apt to mar the[36] appearance of their drawings by inattention in this respect. The dots should be made in the manner already described when speaking of the dotted line, that is, the point of the pen should be brought slowly down upon the paper, and lifted without dragging it; and no dot should be made without a deliberate intention respecting its position. All arrangement in rows must be carefully avoided. In sand-hills, the slopes should be made darker than the level parts by placing the dots closer together. Mud in tidal rivers may be represented by very fine dots placed close together.

—Sand and gravel are represented by dots, with the dots for gravel being larger than those for sand, as shown in Fig. 54. Although filling in these dots is a simple task, it requires some attention. Beginners often ruin the appearance of their drawings due to a lack of focus in this area. The dots should be made in the same way that was previously described for dotted lines—that is, the pen point should be lowered slowly onto the paper and lifted without dragging; no dot should be made without a clear intention regarding its position. Care must be taken to avoid any arrangement in rows. In sand dunes, the slopes should be darker than the flat areas by placing the dots closer together. Mud in tidal rivers can be represented by very fine dots placed closely together.

Fig. 55.

Fig. 55.

Fig. 56.

Fig. 56.

Fig. 55.

Fig. 55.

Fig. 56.

Fig. 56.

Woodland.

—Trees are generally shown in plan (as in Fig. 55). The outline is circular in character, and, to have a good effect, it should be made up of simple curves firmly drawn; small indentations should be avoided as bad. A few touches of the pen are given on the interior and towards the shadow. The latter is cast by parallel rays of light inclined 45° to the horizon, and is detached from the outline of the tree. When the scale is large, the shadow will be elliptical in form, but in small scales it will become a simple circle. In representing woodland, the trees and masses of trees should be disposed in every possible variety of position, care being taken, however, to avoid all regular figures and arrangements in lines. In parks and gardens, where the arrangement of the trees is artificial, it is usual to represent a grove in a rectangular form. Orchards are shown by placing single trees with their shadows at the points of intersection of two sets of equidistant parallel lines drawn at right angles to each other. These lines are drawn in pencil and afterwards erased. Some draughtsmen prefer to draw trees in elevation, as shown in Fig. 56. This method allows the various[37] kinds of trees to be distinguished on the plan, and gives scope to artistic skill.

—Trees are usually illustrated in a top-down view (as in Fig. 55). The shape is circular, and to achieve a pleasing appearance, it should consist of simple, clearly defined curves; small notches should be avoided as they are unappealing. A few pen strokes are added inside and towards the shadow. The shadow is created by parallel rays of light tilted at 45° to the horizon and is separate from the tree's outline. On larger scales, the shadow will have an elliptical shape, but on smaller scales, it will appear as a simple circle. When depicting a forest, trees and groups of trees should be arranged in a variety of positions, avoiding any symmetrical designs or straight lines. In parks and gardens, where trees are arranged artfully, a grove is typically represented in a rectangular shape. Orchards are shown by placing individual trees with their shadows at the intersections of two sets of evenly spaced parallel lines drawn at right angles to each other. These lines are initially drawn in pencil and then erased. Some artists prefer to depict trees in elevation, as shown in Fig. 56. This technique allows for different types of trees to be identified on the plan and showcases artistic talent.

Fig. 57.

Fig. 57.

Uncultivated Land.

—Uncultivated land, other than woodland, is represented by drawing bushes in plan, similar to trees, but of smaller dimensions, and mixing tufts of grass with them, as shown in Fig. 57.

—Uncultivated land, apart from forests, is depicted by sketching bushes in plan, like trees, but smaller, and blending groups of grass with them, as shown in Fig. 57.

Fig. 58.

Fig. 58.

Contour Lines.

—Suppose a cone A B C (Fig. 58) cut at regular vertical intervals apart by a series of horizontal planes 1, 2, 3. The intersections of these planes with the surface of the cone will give lines upon that surface; and it is obvious that the cone may be represented in plan by the projection of these lines, as shown in the figure. To obtain this projection, draw the horizontal line D E, and from the apex of the cone and from the intersections of the cutting planes let fall vertical lines. From the point where the line from the apex meets the line D E as a centre, with radii equal to the distances from this point to those where the lines from the sections meet D E, describe circles. These circles will be the horizontal projections of the lines on the surface of the cone produced by the cutting planes; and these lines are called contour lines. Also it is obvious that, from the plan of the cone so obtained, we may as readily project the elevation, provided we know the vertical distance apart of the sections denoted by the contour lines. To obtain the elevation, we have only to draw horizontal lines at the given distance apart, and from the points in D E erect perpendiculars to meet them. Lines drawn through the points of intersection will give the elevation of the cone. To find the inclination of the surface of the cone, upon a b, a portion of the normal D E, as a base, erect a perpendicular b c, equal in height to the distance of the sections apart, and join a c. The hypothenuse a c then represents that portion of the surface of the cone which is included between the two contour lines, and of which[38] the angle of inclination is b a c. The space between two contour lines is called a horizontal zone.

—Imagine a cone A B C (Fig. 58) sliced at regular vertical intervals by a set of horizontal planes 1, 2, 3. The intersections of these planes with the cone's surface will create lines on that surface; it’s clear that the cone can be represented in plan by projecting these lines, as illustrated in the figure. To get this projection, draw the horizontal line D E, and from the apex of the cone and from where the cutting planes intersect, drop vertical lines. From the point where the line from the apex meets line D E, use that point as a center to draw circles with radii equal to the distances from this point to where the lines from the sections hit D E. These circles will represent the horizontal projections of the lines on the cone's surface created by the cutting planes; these lines are called contour lines. Additionally, it’s evident that, from the plan of the cone obtained, we can easily project the elevation as long as we know the vertical distance between the sections marked by the contour lines. To find the elevation, we simply draw horizontal lines at the specified distance apart and erect perpendiculars from the points on D E to meet them. Lines drawn through the intersection points will show the elevation of the cone. To determine the angle of the cone's surface on a b, take a section of the normal D E as the base, erect a perpendicular b c equal in height to the distance between the sections, and connect a c. The hypotenuse a c then represents that part of the cone's surface found between the two contour lines, and the angle of inclination is b a c. The area between two contour lines is referred to as a horizontal zone.

The cone being a regular figure, its contour lines are circles. For irregular figures, the contour lines will be irregular curves. The regular inclination of the surface of the cone causes the projections of the contour lines to be at equal horizontal distances apart. But when the inclination varies, the horizontal distance between the contour lines also varies, the distance decreasing as the inclination increases. Thus the method of representing objects in plan by contour lines, not only gives the correct form of the object, but shows the relative inclination of every portion of its surface. This may be clearly seen in Figs. 59 and 60, the former of which is a representation in plan by contour lines of an irregularly shaped object, and the latter an elevation of the same object projected from the plan.

The cone is a regular shape, so its contour lines are circles. For irregular shapes, the contour lines will be uneven curves. The consistent slope of the cone's surface means the projections of the contour lines are equidistant from each other. However, when the slope changes, the horizontal distance between the contour lines also changes, decreasing as the slope increases. This method of representing objects in a layout with contour lines not only provides an accurate shape of the object but also reveals the relative slope of each part of its surface. This can be clearly seen in Figs. 59 and 60, where the former is a layout with contour lines of an irregularly shaped object, and the latter is a side view of the same object projected from the layout.

Fig. 59.

Fig. 59.

Fig. 60.

Fig. 60.

The system of representation by contour lines is generally adopted by topographers to distinguish and define the variation of the surface of the ground in regard to hill, valley, and plain. By intersecting a mountain, for example, by a sufficient number of horizontal planes, its correct form may be delineated, and the declivity of its surface accurately shown. The relative declivity of any portion of its surface is indicated by the difference in the horizontal distance of the curves apart; and by constructing a triangle upon a normal to the upper curve in the manner already described for the cone, the absolute slope at any point between any[39] two curves may be readily determined. The ground is supposed to slope uniformly from one curve or contour line to the next. Such, however, is rarely the case; but provided the curves are taken at frequent intervals, the error is of no practical importance. Hollows are represented in the same way; and whether the representation is that of a hill or a hollow, is known from the other parts of the map. Thus, if Fig. 59 represent a hill, the vertical projection will be as shown in Fig. 60; but if it denote a hollow, the outer curve must be projected highest, and the vertical section will be Fig. 60 inverted. In practice the contour lines are numbered, the number of any contour indicating its height above a plane of reference called a datum plane. The vertical distance of the contour lines apart varies with the character of the ground and the object of the survey; but it is seldom less than 25 feet. The lines are obtained by the surveyor by fixing a number of points on the same level by means of instruments.

The system of using contour lines is commonly used by topographers to show and define changes in the landscape, such as hills, valleys, and plains. By slicing through a mountain with enough horizontal planes, its shape can be accurately depicted, and the slope of its surface can be properly illustrated. The steepness of any part of the surface is shown by how far apart the curves are. By drawing a triangle on a line perpendicular to the top curve, like we did with the cone, you can easily find the exact slope at any point between two curves. It is assumed that the ground slopes evenly from one contour line to the next. However, this is rarely true; but as long as the curves are close together, the error doesn’t really matter. Depressions are shown the same way; whether it represents a hill or a depression can be understood from other parts of the map. For example, if Fig. 59 stands for a hill, the vertical projection will look like Fig. 60; but if it represents a depression, the outer curve will be shown as the highest point, and the vertical section will be an inverted Fig. 60. In practice, contour lines are numbered, with each number indicating how high it is above a reference level known as the datum plane. The distance between contour lines varies based on the type of terrain and the purpose of the survey, but it is usually no less than 25 feet. The surveyor establishes a number of points at the same elevation using instruments.


Section IV.—Colors.

The preceding Section treats exclusively of representation by lines and dots, or that mode of delineating objects and natural features known as line or pen drawing. There is, however, another mode of representation by means of colours that is fast coming into general use. This latter mode is far more expressive than the former, and, besides affording a wider scope for artistic effect, shows with greater distinctness and precision the character of the object represented. For these reasons it is almost always adopted for plans of estates and geological sections, and also very frequently for other kinds of topographical as well as for engineering and mechanical drawings. The colours used for this purpose are not applied in the way the artist applies them; but they are laid on in thin washes to produce a faint tint rather than a body of colour. The process is called tinting or[40] flat-washing, and though it cannot be described as a work of art, considerable practice and skill are requisite to execute it properly.

The previous section focuses solely on representation using lines and dots, a style known as line or pen drawing. However, there's another method of representation using colors that is quickly becoming popular. This method is much more expressive than the first one; it not only allows for a broader range of artistic effects but also displays the characteristics of the represented object with greater clarity and precision. For these reasons, it’s almost always used for estate plans and geological sections, as well as often for various topographical, engineering, and mechanical drawings. The colors used in this method aren’t applied the same way an artist would use them; instead, they are layered in thin washes to create a subtle tint rather than a solid color. This process is known as tinting or [40] flat-washing, and while it may not be considered a work of art, it requires significant practice and skill to execute correctly.

Flat-tints.

—A drawing to be coloured must be previously stretched and gummed to the board, in the manner described in Section I. Unless the paper be prepared in this way, it will remain blistered after being wetted by the laying on of the tints. The lines of the drawing must be very fine, and the ink, though black, should not be thick. Great care should be exercised in drawing in the outlines, that there be always a piece of clean paper between the hand and the drawing, for the least degree of greasiness will prevent the colours from working freely. Should the surface of the paper, however, from inattention to this matter, or from accident, become slightly greasy, the defect may be partially remedied by adding a little prepared ox-gall to the water with which the colours are mixed. When all the outlines have been drawn in and the pencil lines erased, the drawing is prepared for the colouring by being washed. The washing is effected by passing a soft sponge well saturated with clean water gently and rapidly over the surface. The purpose of this washing is twofold; first, to remove those portions of the ink which a wet brush would detach from the paper in laying on the colours, and which, by becoming mixed with the tint, would injure its purity; and second, to damp the surface of the paper in order to prevent the colour from drying too rapidly. The latter is an important matter, for if the tint which is being applied dries quickly, it is impossible to unite the edges properly, and the tint, especially if the surface be large, will have a cloudy and blotchy appearance. As the operation of washing renders the paper too wet to immediately receive the colour, it must be allowed to remain in a perfectly horizontal position for a short time to dry, and during this time any tendency to dry unequally must be corrected by means of blotting-paper. While the paper is drying, the tints may be prepared.

—A drawing that needs coloring should first be stretched and glued to the board, as described in Section I. If the paper isn’t prepared this way, it will remain wrinkled after being dampened with the application of colors. The lines of the drawing should be very fine, and the ink, while black, shouldn’t be thick. You should be careful when drawing the outlines and always keep a clean piece of paper between your hand and the drawing because even a small amount of grease will prevent the colors from blending well. If, however, the surface of the paper becomes slightly greasy due to carelessness or an accident, you can partially fix this by adding a little prepared ox-gall to the water you mix with the colors. Once all the outlines are drawn and the pencil lines erased, the drawing gets ready for coloring by being wash. The washing is done by gently and quickly passing a soft sponge, well-soaked with clean water, over the surface. This washing serves two main purposes: first, to remove any ink that a wet brush might pick up from the paper when applying the colors, which would mix with the tint and spoil its clarity; and second, to dampen the paper surface to prevent the color from drying too quickly. This is crucial because if the tint dries too fast, it’s impossible to blend the edges correctly, and the tint, especially over large areas, can look cloudy and blotchy. Since the washing makes the paper too wet for immediate coloring, it should be left flat for a short time to dry, and during this period, any uneven drying should be corrected using blotting paper. While the paper dries, you can prepare the colors.

To ensure satisfactory results, care must be taken in the preparation and preservation of the tints. They should never be made by artificial light, and a sufficient quantity should be made at first to cover all the portions required, as it is very difficult to match a tint[41] exactly. When a drawing is several days in hand, it is best to prepare a fresh tint for every coat, for the colours will change in the course of a day or two, even if protected from the light. A few drops of water should be added now and then, to make up for the loss by evaporation, especially in warm weather. Tints left to dry upon the palette should never be wet up again for use, but they should be washed clean out and a fresh tint made; if this precaution be not attended to, the colour will not be pure. When a tint is to be mixed, the end of the cake of colour should be moistened and allowed to soften for a minute or two, as this will cause it to rub smooth and free from fragments. The palette should then be moistened and the end of the cake rubbed gently and evenly upon it till a sufficient quantity of colour has been obtained, which may be added to the requisite quantity of water by means of a brush. A precaution necessary to be observed is never to rub one colour down upon another, as it will probably be laid aside to dry with the other colour on it. The brush used should be as large as the nature of the work will allow, and it should be of the best sable hair; the quality is judged by the length of the hair, the longest and stiffest being the best. Draughtsmen frequently do all their work with a couple of sable brushes attached to one holder, one being for colour and the other for water; in this case the brushes should be of different colours to prevent mistakes.

To get good results, you need to be careful when preparing and storing the colors. They should never be mixed under artificial light, and you should prepare enough at the start to cover all the areas you need, as it’s hard to match a color exactly later. If you're working on a drawing over several days, it’s better to mix a fresh color for each layer, because colors can change in just a day or two, even if they’re kept out of the light. You should occasionally add a few drops of water to compensate for evaporation, especially in warm weather. Colors left to dry on the palette should never be re-wet; instead, they should be completely cleaned out and a new color mixed. If this isn't done, the color won’t be pure. When mixing a color, wet the end of the block and let it soften for a minute or two, which will help it blend smoothly without bits. Then, moisten the palette and gently rub the end of the block on it until you get enough color, which can then be mixed with the right amount of water using a brush. It’s important never to mix one color into another, as it might get left to dry on top of the other color. The brush you use should be as large as the task allows and made from the best sable hair; the quality is determined by the length of the hair, with the longest and stiffest being the best. Artists often do their work with two sable brushes attached to one holder, one for color and the other for water; in this case, the brushes should be different colors to avoid confusion.

The art of laying on a flat-tint consists in allowing the coloured water to flow equally over the paper, which thus becomes uniformly tinged. To facilitate this, the surface of the drawing should be inclined towards the draughtsman at an angle of about five degrees during the process of laying on the colour. Having taken as much colour on the brush as it will safely carry without dropping, the operation of applying it should be begun in the upper left-hand corner, the brush being carried along towards the right, so as to make the colour lie neatly along the upper outline. The brush should then be struck unhesitatingly from right to left and from left to right alternately, so as to bring the colour down in horizontal bands or stripes, taking care not to pass the brush a second time over the same[42] surface during the same wash, and to control it neatly within the proper limits. If the surface of the paper be in this way kept well wetted with the colour, or if, in other words, a flow of colour be kept in motion with the point of the brush, the tint can be carried on with perfect continuity. It is important to keep as nearly as possible the same quantity of colour in the brush until the lower outline is nearly reached, when the quantity must be diminished so as to finish at the lower outline without a great excess of tint, for the excess must be taken up by a damp brush. No accumulations should be allowed to take place anywhere, as on drying, these places would show a darker tint. When the colour has once flowed over the surface, the tint is finished, and must not, as we have said, be touched a second time, for any attempt to remedy defects while the colour is drying will only make them worse. Generally it will be found that the more quickly a tint is laid on, the better is its appearance. A little practice will enable the student to lay on a wash in the proper manner, but to keep within the outlines is a matter of greater difficulty and one that requires some dexterity in the handling of the brush. If the boundary should be exceeded, a finger of the left hand should be instantly applied to brush the colour back. Though the foregoing directions can be followed strictly only on large surfaces, the principles involved in them must in every case be observed.

The technique of applying a flat tint involves letting the colored water flow evenly over the paper, achieving a uniform color. To make this easier, the drawing should be tilted towards the artist at about a five-degree angle while coloring. Begin by loading your brush with as much color as it can hold without dripping, then start applying it in the upper left corner, dragging the brush to the right to create a clean edge along the top outline. Next, move the brush back and forth from right to left and left to right alternately to bring the color down in horizontal stripes, being careful not to go over the same area again during this wash and keeping it within the set boundaries. If you keep the paper well-coated with color—or maintain a flow of color with the tip of the brush—it's possible to achieve a smooth tint. It's crucial to maintain a consistent amount of color in the brush until you're close to the bottom outline, at which point you should reduce the amount to avoid excess tint at the bottom, which can be removed with a damp brush. Avoid letting any excess build up, as these spots will dry darker. Once the color has been applied, the tint is complete and shouldn't be touched again; any attempts to fix mistakes while the color dries will only make them worse. Typically, the faster the tint is applied, the better it looks. With some practice, artists can learn to apply a wash correctly, but staying within the outlines is more challenging and takes skill with the brush. If you go outside the lines, quickly use a finger from your left hand to brush the color back. While these instructions can only be followed strictly on larger areas, the underlying principles should be applied in every case.

The alternate or double tint consists of two colours applied alternately, their edges being made to blend into each other. The application of the double tint involves no particular difficulty. Having prepared two tints of equal intensity and provided a brush for each, lay on one of the colours at the upper outline of the figure, and before this dries, take the brush charged with the other colour, and run round its edge, allowing them to blend together. Repeat the first tint in the same manner, and continue the tints alternately till the surface is covered. The forms of the masses of each colour should be varied, and not made in stripes or spots, but irregularly clouded.

The alternate or double tint consists of two colors applied alternately, with their edges blended together. Applying the double tint isn’t particularly difficult. After preparing two tints of equal intensity and getting a brush for each, apply one of the colors along the upper outline of the figure. Before it dries, take the brush loaded with the other color and go around its edge, letting them blend. Repeat the first tint in the same way, and continue alternating the tints until the surface is covered. The shapes of the areas of each color should be varied and not made in stripes or spots, but rather in irregular, cloud-like patterns.

All flat-tints should be made very light, and intensity of colour should be produced by repeating the wash. As every surface looks[43] better with two washes than with only one, the strength of the tint should be such as to allow two coats to be laid over the lightest parts. If the colours have been laid on too dark, or the general effect be uneven and disagreeable, the defect may be remedied by sponging. This operation should be performed with a close-grained 6-inch sponge, and be commenced at the upper end of the inclined board. A basin of clean water having been provided, and an empty basin to receive the dirty water from the sponge, first moisten all the white surface of the paper to prevent the tint taken off by the sponge from adhering to it; then, having filled the sponge with water, pass it gently to and fro across the sheet. Press out the dirty water into the basin, refill the sponge, and repeat the operation until hardly any tint comes off. Sponging after five or six coats have been laid on generally improves the appearance of a drawing; it softens down asperities, and makes the tints blend into each other; the surface of the paper also takes the tints more readily after sponging.

All flat tints should be made very light, and color intensity should be achieved by repeating the wash. Since every surface looks better with two washes than with just one, the strength of the tint should be such that two coats can be applied over the lightest areas. If the colors have been applied too darkly or if the overall effect is uneven and unappealing, the issue can be fixed by sponging. This process should be done with a close-grained 6-inch sponge, starting at the upper end of the inclined board. Prepare a basin of clean water and another empty basin to collect the dirty water from the sponge. First, dampen all the white surface of the paper to prevent the tint removed by the sponge from sticking to it; then, fill the sponge with water and gently move it back and forth across the sheet. Squeeze out the dirty water into the basin, refill the sponge, and repeat until hardly any tint comes off. Sponging after five or six coats have been applied usually enhances the appearance of a drawing; it smooths out rough spots and helps the tints blend together. The paper surface also accepts the tints more readily after sponging.

Small defects may frequently be remedied by a process called stippling. This consists in making a number of dots with the point of a brush containing an almost imperceptible quantity of colour. The process, though a tedious one, produces a very beautiful effect, similar to that of dotted engravings. Excesses beyond the boundary lines may be washed out with the water-brush, and the stains removed by a piece of clean blotting-paper. White spots left in a tint may be filled up, after the tint is dry, with the point of the brush; but care must be taken not to touch beyond the edges of the tint, as that would double the intensity at the edges and produce a ring.

Small defects can often be fixed with a technique called stippling. This involves making a series of tiny dots using the tip of a brush that has a barely noticeable amount of color on it. Though it's a slow process, it creates a beautiful effect similar to dotted engravings. Any excess that goes beyond the lines can be washed away with a water brush, and stains can be cleaned up with a piece of blotting paper. White spots left in a color can be filled in with the brush tip after the color has dried, but you have to be careful not to go beyond the edges of the color, as doing so would intensify the edges and create a ring.

All flat surfaces in a drawing should be lighter or darker, in accordance with their distance from the eye. In laying on flat-tints when the surface is not in shade, it must be borne in mind (1) that all surfaces which are parallel to the plane of the picture, and therefore equally distant from the eye, should receive a tint of uniform intensity; (2) that those surfaces which are farthest from the eye should receive the darkest tint; and (3) that surfaces which are inclined to the plane of the drawing should receive a tint of varying intensity, the[44] depth of the tint increasing as the surface recedes from the eye. When the surfaces are in shade, the converse of these rules holds good.

All flat surfaces in a drawing should be lighter or darker depending on how far they are from the eye. When applying flat tints, if the surface isn't in shadow, keep in mind (1) that all surfaces parallel to the picture plane and equally distant from the eye should have a consistent tint; (2) that surfaces farthest from the eye should have the darkest tint; and (3) that surfaces angled to the drawing plane should have a tint that varies in intensity, with the color deepening as the surface moves away from the eye. When the surfaces are in shadow, the opposite of these rules applies.

Conventional Colours.

—In representing objects by means of colours, the natural colours of the objects are in some cases adhered to; and in others, for the sake of greater distinctness, a conventional colour is adopted. In engineering, architectural, and mechanical drawings, the latter mode is nearly always resorted to, while in plans of estates the former is very frequently employed. Unfortunately, practice is not uniform among draughtsmen in the conventional use of colours; but the following Table shows the colours mostly employed, and represents the general practice.

—In depicting objects using colors, sometimes the natural colors of the objects are used, while in other cases, for clarity, a standard color is chosen. In engineering, architectural, and mechanical drawings, the latter method is almost always used, whereas in estate plans, the former is often utilized. Unfortunately, there isn't a consistent approach among draftsmen regarding the standard use of colors; however, the following Table shows the colors most commonly used and reflects the general practice.

Carmine or crimson lake For brickwork in plan or section to be executed.
Prussian blue Flintwork, lead, or parts of brickwork to be removed by alterations.
Venetian red Brickwork in elevation.
Violet carmine Granite.
Raw sienna English timber, not oak.
Burnt sienna Oak, teak.
Indian yellow Fir timber.
Indian red Mahogany.
Sepia Concrete works, stone.
Burnt umber Clay, earth.
Payne’s grey Cast iron, rough wrought iron.
Dark cadmium or orange Gun metal.
Gamboge Brass.
Indigo Wrought iron—bright.
Indigo, with a little lake Steel—bright.
Hooker’s green Meadow land.
Cobalt blue Sky effects.
And some few others occasionally for special purpose.

Sections are represented either by lines of the colour drawn with the pen or the point of the brush, or by a darker shade of the colour. In mechanical drawings, sections are frequently shown by ink lines drawn over the colour.

Sections are shown either by lines of color made with a pen or brush point, or by a darker shade of the color. In technical drawings, sections are often indicated by ink lines over the color.

In plans and maps, as we have said, some attempt is made to give the true appearance of things. As this—which may be called the natural mode of representation—allows more scope for artistic skill than the conventional, a great deal must be left to the judgment and the taste of the draughtsman. But there are general principles and[45] features that may be laid down and described, and such are the following:—

In plans and maps, as we've mentioned, an effort is made to show how things really look. This approach—which we can call the natural way of representing things—allows for more artistic creativity than the traditional method, so a lot is left up to the judgment and taste of the designer. However, there are general principles and[45] features that can be established and outlined, and these are the following:—

Water.

—For water, a flat-tint of pure indigo is used. To produce the clear, transparent effect of water, there should be two coats of the tint, which, to allow of this, must be very light coloured.

—For water, a flat tint of pure indigo is used. To achieve the clear, transparent effect of water, there should be two coats of the tint, which, to allow for this, must be very light in color.

Grass-land.

—For grass or cleared land, a flat-tint of green is employed. This tint is composed of indigo and gamboge, and should be of a lively hue, which may be produced by giving predominance to the gamboge. Care must always be taken in preparing greens for maps and plans, that the blue be kept subordinate to the yellow; for a predominance of the former colour produces a cold quality, which is utterly destructive of that natural appearance it is intended to give. The intensity of the tint for this and for other purposes should be such as to distinguish it clearly from others, and to allow somewhat for fading, without masking any of the details of the drawing; and it must be clear and transparent. We may here remark that all tints which are much extended should be balanced, that is, no one should obtrude itself upon the eye by its relatively too great intensity.

—For grass or cleared land, a flat shade of green is used. This shade is made from indigo and gamboge and should be a vibrant color, which can be achieved by emphasizing the gamboge. It’s important to prepare greens for maps and plans with the blue kept secondary to the yellow; if blue dominates, it creates a cold effect, which completely ruins the natural look intended. The intensity of the shade for this and other purposes should be distinct from others and account for some fading without obscuring any details of the drawing; it must be clear and transparent. It's worth noting that all tints that are widely spread should be balanced, meaning that none should stand out too much due to being overly intense.

Marsh.

—Marsh and swamp are represented, as in line drawing, by a combination of the signs for water and grass-land. The tints are laid on horizontally, that is, parallel to the base of the drawing. They are not, however, laid on in bands or strips across the drawing, but are made to project in irregular points from each side, with here and there a long and narrow patch to represent an island. The land should cover a larger portion of the space than the water, and it should be washed in first, care being taken to make the white spaces left for the blue colour resemble the green in form, which spaces should project their horizontal points into the green as the latter projects its points into the white. The outer limits of a marsh should consist of an outline of projecting green points. The land portion of the marsh is finished by drawing a light shading line of indigo and burnt sienna along the lower edge of the green. This line must be drawn upon the edge and not against it upon the white space. In washing in the water, care must be taken not to overlay the edges of the green. A good[46] effect is produced by introducing a tree here and there upon the land.

—Marshes and swamps are depicted, like a line drawing, using a mix of symbols for water and grassland. The colors are applied horizontally, meaning parallel to the bottom of the drawing. However, they aren't applied in bands or stripes across the drawing; instead, they stick out in uneven spots from both sides, with a few long and narrow areas to represent islands. The land should take up more space than the water and should be painted in first, making sure the white spaces left for the blue color resemble the green in shape, with those spaces extending their horizontal points into the green just as the green extends its points into the white. The outer edges of a marsh should have an outline of protruding green points. The land part of the marsh is finished by adding a light shade of indigo and burnt sienna along the bottom edge of the green. This line must be drawn on the edge rather than against it on the white space. While painting in the water, be careful not to cover the edges of the green. A nice effect can be achieved by placing a tree here and there on the land.

Sand and Gravel.

—Sand is shown by a flat-tint of yellow ochre. Sand and gravel are represented by dotting the flat-tint with burnt sienna by means of the point of the brush held in a vertical position. Stones and rocks in sand should be first outlined with the pen in burnt sienna and sepia in equal proportions, and afterwards filled in with the brush with the same colour.

—Sand is depicted with a flat tint of yellow ochre. Sand and gravel are illustrated by dabbing the flat tint with burnt sienna using the tip of the brush held vertically. Stones and rocks in the sand should first be outlined with a pen in equal parts burnt sienna and sepia, then filled in with the brush using the same color.

Mud.

—In the survey of rivers, creeks, and coasts, it frequently becomes necessary to show tracts of mud between the lines of high and low water. For this purpose a flat-wash of sepia or Indian ink may be used dotted with Indian ink of greater intensity. The dots in this case must be very minute and thinly placed, and they should be evenly distributed. A fine-pointed pen will be found more effective in putting in these dots than the point of the brush.

—In mapping rivers, streams, and coastlines, it often becomes necessary to depict mud areas between the high and low water lines. For this, a flat wash of sepia or Indian ink can be used, accented with more concentrated Indian ink. The dots in this case should be very small and spaced out thinly, and they need to be distributed evenly. A fine-pointed pen is more effective for adding these dots than the tip of a brush.

Woodland.

—To represent woodland, a flat-tint of green is first laid over the ground, as for grass-land. The groups and masses of trees are next drawn in outline, in the manner described in the last Section, with a hard and sharp lead pencil, or with a pen and pale ink. To fill in these outlines, a colour made up of indigo and gamboge in the same proportions as the ground tint, but of greater intensity, is laid on the lower and right-hand portion of each tree and mass of foliage, so as to occupy about two-thirds of the figure. The remaining portion, which will be the side towards the light, is then touched with an orange tint composed of gamboge and burnt sienna. It only remains to add the shadow. As the light is supposed to enter the drawing in parallel rays from the upper left-hand corner, the shadow of every object will surround its lower and right-hand outlines. It is laid close up to the outline in masses of foliage; but for single trees, as in orchards, it is detached. The form of the shadow was described in the last Section. To produce the shadow, the same tint is used as for the ground, two or three successive applications being sufficient to increase the intensity to the requisite degree; or a neutral tint may be used, composed of indigo, burnt sienna, and a little lake. After[47] the shadow has been put in, the outlines on that side should be strengthened by going over them again with the pen. By drawing the trees in elevation, an opportunity is afforded for the display of artistic skill far greater than the foregoing method admits of. When drawn in this way, the work partakes somewhat of the nature of landscape painting.

—To represent woodland, start by applying a flat tint of green over the ground, similar to grassland. Next, outline the groups and clusters of trees, as described in the last section, using a hard, sharp pencil or a pen with light ink. To fill in these outlines, use a color made of indigo and gamboge in the same proportions as the ground tint but with greater intensity. Apply this to the lower and right side of each tree and cluster of foliage, covering about two-thirds of the figure. The remaining portion, which faces the light, should be touched with an orange tint made of gamboge and burnt sienna. Finally, add the shadow. Since the light is assumed to come in parallel rays from the upper left corner, the shadow of each object will surround its lower and right outlines. For clusters of foliage, the shadow should be placed close to the outline; for single trees, like those in orchards, it should be detached. The shape of the shadow was described in the last section. To create the shadow, use the same tint as the ground, applying it two or three times to increase the intensity as needed, or use a neutral tint made of indigo, burnt sienna, and a bit of lake. After[47] applying the shadow, go over the outlines on that side again with the pen to strengthen them. Drawing the trees in elevation offers a much greater opportunity for artistic expression than the previous method allows. When drawn this way, the work resembles landscape painting.

Cultivated Land.

—Cultivated land is represented by a flat-tint of burnt sienna.

—Cultivated land is shown by a flat shade of burnt sienna.

Uncultivated Land.

—Uncultivated land or brushwood is represented by a double tint of green, as for grass-land, and burnt sienna, as for cultivated land, laid on in the manner already described for the double tint. As this is the only double tint used, it may be made, if thought desirable, with alternate green and crimson lake.

—Uncultivated land or brushwood is shown with two shades of green, like grassland, and burnt sienna, like cultivated land, applied in the way explained earlier for the two shades. Since this is the only two-shade combination used, it can be created, if desired, with alternating green and crimson lake.

Buildings.

—Buildings, including all structures of masonry, as bridges, locks, walls, and such like, are coloured with crimson lake, and shadowed with a neutral tint composed of indigo, burnt sienna, and a little lake, as given above for forest land.

—Buildings, including all masonry structures like bridges, locks, walls, and similar, are painted with crimson lake and shaded with a neutral tint made from indigo, burnt sienna, and a touch of lake, as described above for forest land.

Roads and Streets.

—Roads and streets, and generally all those portions of a drawing not particularly described, are tinted with yellow ochre.

—Roads and streets, and generally all the areas of a drawing that aren't specifically described, are shaded with yellow ochre.

Fences.

—Hedges are represented by green dots, varied in size for bushes; stone or brick walls, by a line ruled in red; and wooden fences by lines of neutral tint, either ruled or drawn in by hand, according as the line is to be straight or otherwise. In every case the shadow must be put in.

—Hedges are shown as green dots, with different sizes for bushes; stone or brick walls are indicated by a red line; and wooden fences are represented by lines in neutral colors, either straight or hand-drawn, depending on how the line should look. In every case, the shadow must be included.

In determining the intensity of the various tints employed on a topographical drawing, care must be taken that everything be “in keeping.” A cardinal rule of art is that nothing shall unduly obtrude itself; and in a coloured plan, spottiness, as it is called, should be studiously avoided. Forest, brushwood, and cultivated land, should be represented by tints of about equal intensity, and the same equality may be observed for grass-land, marsh, water, and sand, but the intensity should be less than in the former case. Tints that are of small extent may be a little exaggerated in intensity for the purpose[48] of giving them greater distinctness, especially when the object represented is a building. Gardens and orchards require a little exaggeration in depth of tint, to distinguish them from the surrounding country; but care must be taken not to make the distinction too marked. It will generally be found conducive to a maintenance of “keeping,” to lay the lightest tints on first.

In figuring out the intensity of the different colors used in a topographical drawing, it's important to ensure everything looks cohesive. A key rule in art is that nothing should stand out too much; in a colored plan, what’s known as spottiness should be carefully avoided. Forests, underbrush, and farmland should be shown with colors of roughly the same intensity, and the same balance can apply to grassland, marshes, water, and sand, but those colors should be less intense than the first group. Colors that are small in size can be slightly more intense to make them stand out better, particularly when depicting buildings. Gardens and orchards should have a bit more depth in color to set them apart from the surrounding area, but it’s essential not to make the difference too obvious. Generally, starting with the lightest colors first will help maintain that sense of cohesion.


Section V.—Shading.

In mechanical and architectural drawings, shade lines must be considered rather as embellishments than constituent parts of the drawing. They are, however, frequently employed; and as their incorrect use may deceive the eye with respect to the intention of the designer, it becomes an important matter to know when to apply them with propriety.

In mechanical and architectural drawings, shading lines should be viewed more as decorative elements than essential components of the drawing. However, they are often used, and their improper application can mislead the viewer about the designer's intent. Therefore, it's crucial to know when to use them appropriately.

Fig. 61.

Fig. 61.

Fig. 62.

Fig. 62.

Fig. 61.

Fig. 61.

Fig. 62.

Fig. 62.

Application of Shade Lines.

—As we have already explained, the light is supposed to fall upon the objects in a drawing in parallel rays from the upper left-hand corner for elevations, and from the lower left-hand corner for plans. To determine whether or not a given line should be a shade line, we have only to ascertain whether or not the light, introduced in such a manner, falls upon that edge of the object which the line represents. All those parts of a body upon which the rays of light fall directly, are said to be in light; all those parts upon which the rays of light do not fall directly, are said to be in shade; and those parts of a surface which are deprived of light by another body intercepting the rays, are said to be in shadow. These definitions should be borne in mind. Lines representing the boundaries of surfaces in light should be fine lines, and lines representing the boundaries of surfaces in shade should be thick or shade lines. Let it be required, for example, to determine the shade lines of the cube shown in elevation in Fig. 61. The extreme rays of light falling[49] upon the cube meet the edges in b and c; hence the surfaces a b, a c, are in light, and the surfaces d b, d c, are in shade. The foregoing rule will thus make a b and a c fine lines, and d b and d c shade lines. If the cube were turned so that a b should be at right angles to the rays of light, the extreme rays would fall on the edges a and b, and the middle ray which now falls on a would fall on the middle of the line a b. The rays immediately beyond those which are arrested by the edges a and b, may be considered to pass along in contact with the surfaces a c and b d; and these surfaces must, therefore, be regarded as in light. Thus we shall have in this case the lines a b, a c, and b d, fine lines, and the line c d a shade line. It is the practice of some draughtsmen to make a c and b d in such cases a medium line, and the practice has propriety to recommend it. The foregoing explanations of the shade lines in the elevation of the cube, render any further remarks concerning those in the plan, Fig. 62, unnecessary. In practice, whether or not a surface is in light may be determined by placing the set square of 45° against it.

—As we’ve already explained, the light is supposed to shine on the objects in a drawing in parallel rays from the upper left corner for elevations, and from the lower left corner for plans. To decide if a given line should be a shade line, we just need to check if the light, coming in this way, hits the edge of the object that the line represents. All areas of a shape where the light rays hit directly are said to be in light; all areas where the light rays don’t hit directly are said to be in shade; and the parts of a surface that are blocked from light by another object are said to be in shadow. These definitions should be kept in mind. Lines showing the edges of surfaces in light should be fine lines, while lines showing the edges of surfaces in shade should be thick or shade lines. For example, let’s determine the shade lines of the cube shown in elevation in Fig. 61. The extreme light rays falling on the cube hit the edges at b and c; therefore, the surfaces a b and a c are in light, while the surfaces d b and d c are in shade. According to this rule, a b and a c will be fine lines, and d b and d c will be shade lines. If the cube were turned so that a b was perpendicular to the light rays, the extreme rays would hit the edges a and b, and the middle ray that currently hits a would hit the middle of the line a b. The rays just beyond those blocked by the edges a and b can be thought of as running along the surfaces a c and b d; therefore, these surfaces must be considered to be in light. Thus, in this case, the lines a b, a c, and b d will be fine lines, while the line c d will be a shade line. Some draughtsmen choose to make a c and b d medium lines in such cases, and this practice has its merits. The previous explanations of the shade lines in the elevation of the cube make any further comments about those in the plan, Fig. 62, unnecessary. In practice, whether a surface is in light or not can be determined by placing a 45° set square against it.

Fig. 63.

Fig. 63.

Fig. 64.

Fig. 64.

Fig. 63.

Fig. 63.

Fig. 64.

Fig. 64.

The same principles are observed in the end elevation of the hollow cylinder, shown in Fig. 63. The extreme rays meet the circumference in the points a and b; consequently the surface a c b is in light, and the surface a d b is in shade. The middle ray meets the surface perpendicularly at the point c, which will be the lightest part of that surface; similarly, d will be the darkest part. To show this, the shade line must be gradually increased in thickness towards the point d. The shading of the inner circle will be the converse of the outer. Fig. 64 shows a plan of the same object.

The same principles apply to the end view of the hollow cylinder, as shown in Fig. 63. The extreme rays hit the edge at points a and b; as a result, the surface a c b is lit up, while the surface a d b is in shadow. The middle ray strikes the surface straight on at point c, which will be the brightest part of that surface; similarly, d will be the darkest part. To illustrate this, the shadow line should gradually get thicker as it approaches point d. The shading of the inner circle will be the opposite of the outer one. Fig. 64 shows a plan of the same object.

[50]

[50]

Fig. 65.

Fig. 65.

Cylindrical Surfaces.

—Let a b c d, Fig. 65, be a plan, and k l n m an elevation of a cylinder. The portion a c b is in light, and the portion a d b is in shade, of which latter portion a and b are the edges. From the points a and c draw vertical lines e f, g h. Then will e f be that part of the cylinder upon which the light falls perpendicularly, or the lightest part, and g h the edge of the surface in shade, or that portion of the surface of the cylinder that would cast a shadow upon the plane of projection. Hence this will be the darkest part, and consequently it is obviously improper to make the line k l a shade line. This demonstration, which is given by Binns, shows that shade lines must never be applied to cylindrical surfaces. If this principle be observed, cylindrical may be readily distinguished from flat surfaces.

—Let a b c d, Fig. 65, be a plan, and k l n m an elevation of a cylinder. The part a c b is lit, and the part a d b is in shadow, with a and b being the edges. From points a and c, draw vertical lines e f, g h. Then e f will be the part of the cylinder that the light hits directly, or the lightest part, while g h is the edge of the shaded area, or that part of the cylinder that would cast a shadow on the projection plane. Thus, this will be the darkest part, making it clear that it is incorrect to treat the line k l as a shade line. This explanation, provided by Binns, illustrates that shade lines should never be used on cylindrical surfaces. If this principle is followed, cylindrical surfaces can be easily distinguished from flat ones.

Fig. 66.

Fig. 66.

Shading Lines.

—Shade lines are applied only to the edges or boundaries of surfaces; when lines are put upon a surface to show the effects of light and shade, they are called shading lines. The use of the latter is determined by the same principles as that of the former; indeed, a shade line may be practically considered as an end view of a number of shading lines. In Fig. 66, which is an elevation of a hexagon, the surface c is in shade, and to represent this surface correctly, it must be made darker than the others. This darkening of the surface is effected by drawing the shading lines heavier or closer together, or by both of these means combined. The surface b is in light, but the rays fall upon it obliquely; the shading lines on this surface will therefore be lighter and more widely spaced than on c. The surface a is also in light, and receives the rays normally, that is, the[51] direction of the rays is normal to the surface. Hence this surface will reflect most, or, in other words, will be the lightest. This is shown by making the shading lines still lighter, and spacing them still more widely than those on b. The greatest care is needed in applying shading lines to keep their thickness and the spacing regular, as an error in these respects will frequently produce an effect quite opposed to what is intended.

—Shade lines are applied only to the edges or boundaries of surfaces; when lines are added to a surface to show how light and shadow interact, they are called shading lines. The use of shading lines follows the same principles as shade lines; in fact, a shade line can realistically be seen as an end view of several shading lines. In Fig. 66, which is an elevation of a hexagon, the surface c is in shade, and to represent this surface accurately, it needs to be darker than the others. This darkening is achieved by drawing the shading lines thicker or closer together, or by using both methods. The surface b is in light but receives the rays at an angle; therefore, the shading lines on this surface will be lighter and more spaced out than on c. The surface a is also in light and receives the rays directly, meaning the direction of the rays is perpendicular to the surface. Thus, this surface will reflect the most light, making it the lightest. This is shown by making the shading lines even lighter and spacing them further apart than those on b. Great care is needed when applying shading lines to maintain consistent thickness and spacing, as any mistakes in these areas can often create an effect opposite to what is intended.

Fig. 67.

Fig. 67.

Shading Lines on Cylindrical Surfaces.

—If the demonstration previously given concerning shade lines on cylindrical surfaces be understood, the application of shading lines to these surfaces will present no difficulty. The darkest and the lightest part of the cylinder having been determined, and in practice this can be accomplished with sufficient exactness by the eye, the shading lines are applied according to the principles explained above with respect to the hexagon. The first shading line is drawn upon the darkest part; and each successive line on each side of this first line is drawn lighter and spaced more widely than the preceding. At the lightest part, a clear space is left to represent the reflexion of the rays that occurs strongly there, and beyond this part the shading is made equal to that of the corresponding part on the other side. The thickening of the lines is effected by going over them a sufficient number of times. Fig. 67 shows a vertical and a horizontal cylinder shaded in this manner. In outline drawings of machinery, this mode of shading with parallel lines is frequently resorted to.

—If you understand the earlier demonstration about shading lines on cylindrical surfaces, applying these shading lines will be straightforward. After identifying the darkest and lightest parts of the cylinder—which you can do quite accurately by eye—you apply the shading lines using the principles explained earlier regarding the hexagon. The first shading line is drawn on the darkest area, and each subsequent line on either side of this first line is drawn lighter and spaced further apart than the one before. At the lightest area, a clear space is left to show the reflection of the rays that are particularly strong there, and beyond this area, the shading matches that of the corresponding part on the opposite side. Thickening the lines is done by going over them several times. Fig. 67 shows a vertical and a horizontal cylinder shaded in this way. In outline drawings of machinery, this method of shading with parallel lines is often used.

Fig. 68.

Fig. 68.

Fig. 69.

Fig. 69.

Fig. 70.

Fig. 70.

Fig. 71.

Fig. 71.

Fig. 68.

Fig. 68.

Fig. 69.

Fig. 69.

Fig. 70.

Fig. 70.

Fig. 71.

Fig. 71.

It will be evident, on reflection, that when the cylindrical body stands parallel with the direction of the rays of light, as shown in Fig. 68, the lightest part will be in the middle, and the shade will increase in intensity as it approaches the edges. The shading of the interior of a cylinder is, as we have already remarked when treating[52] of shade lines, the converse of that of the exterior. This is shown in the sectional elevation, Fig. 69. When parallel with the direction of the rays of light, as in Fig. 70, the internal shading is the same as the external. On bright circular surfaces, such as that of a circular saw, or the polished end of a shaft, the light is radiated from the centre, as shown in Fig. 71. This mode of shading is strictly in accordance with the appearance presented by such surfaces. It may be remarked here, that if, through inadvertence, any part should be made too dark, the error may be corrected by darkening all the other parts in a corresponding degree.

It will be clear, upon reflection, that when the cylindrical body is positioned parallel to the direction of the rays of light, as shown in Fig. 68, the brightest area will be in the middle, and the shading will become darker as it gets closer to the edges. The shading inside a cylinder is, as we've already noted when discussing[52] shade lines, the opposite of that on the outside. This is illustrated in the sectional elevation, Fig. 69. When it is parallel to the direction of the rays of light, as in Fig. 70, the interior shading matches the exterior. On shiny circular surfaces, like that of a circular saw or the polished end of a shaft, the light radiates from the center, as shown in Fig. 71. This way of shading aligns perfectly with how such surfaces appear. It’s worth mentioning that if, by mistake, any part ends up being too dark, the mistake can be fixed by darkening all the other parts to the same degree.

Fig. 72.

Fig. 72.

Shading Lines in Topographical Drawings.

—The shading lines put upon mechanical drawings are merely accessories used for purposes of embellishment. But in topographical drawings, shading lines are applied to give expression, and they constitute an essential element in the representation. We have shown how undulations of the ground, constituting hill and valley, are represented by contour lines. But it is obvious that these lines furnish information respecting[53] the character of the surface only at those points through which they pass. Thus we are necessarily left in ignorance of the irregularities existing between any two successive contours. To supply this information which the contours fail to give, shading is resorted to. Another important object of hill shading is to represent the surface of the ground conventionally in a manner that will immediately afford an idea of its character without the aid of regular contours. The method adopted consists in employing lines varying in their thickness and in their intervals apart according to the slope of the ground to be represented. This method is based upon the principle of the horizontal contours, which is to give to the same vertical interval the same absolute amount of shade, whatever the inclination of the ground may be. The shading lines are used, as we have said, to fill in the features of the ground between contours already fixed; and to ensure accuracy and uniformity in the representation, a “scale of shade” is employed. The accompanying Fig. 72 shows the standard scale of shade adopted by the Council of Military Education, and made use of for all the Government surveys. The second and the fifth columns of this scale show the spacing of the hachures and their thickness for different angles of slope, while the first and the last columns show the number of hachures to be interpolated between contours at every 25 feet vertical intervals, supposing the slope to be uniform. The slope is denoted both by the number of degrees in the angle it makes with the horizontal,[54] and by a fraction showing the ratio of the vertical height to the base in a right-angled triangle, the hypothenuse of which is the slope in question.

—The shading lines used in mechanical drawings are just decorative elements. However, in topographical drawings, shading lines are used to create a sense of depth and are a crucial part of the representation. We've illustrated how the variations in the terrain, forming hills and valleys, are shown using contour lines. But it's clear that these lines only provide information about the surface characteristics at the points they intersect. As a result, we miss out on the details of the surface variations between any two consecutive contour lines. To fill in this gap in information, shading is utilized. Another key purpose of hill shading is to represent the ground's surface in a way that conveys its character right away, without relying solely on regular contours. The technique involves using lines of varying thickness and spacing depending on the steepness of the slope being represented. This method follows the principle of horizontal contours, which ensures that the same vertical distance receives an equal amount of shade, regardless of the ground's incline. The shading lines serve to enhance the features of the terrain between the established contours, and to maintain accuracy and consistency in the depiction, a “scale of shade” is used. The accompanying Fig. 72 outlines the standard scale of shade adopted by the Council of Military Education, used for all Government surveys. The second and fifth columns of this scale indicate the spacing and thickness of the hachures for various slopes, while the first and last columns show the number of hachures to be added between contours at every 25 feet vertical intervals, assuming the slope is uniform. The slope is represented both by the degree measure of the angle it forms with the horizontal,[54] and by a fraction indicating the ratio of the vertical height to the base in a right triangle, where the hypotenuse is the slope being considered.

The scale of shade is constructed for a horizontal scale of six inches to the mile, and the amount of shade has been chosen with a view of producing the best possible artistic effect. Of course, the most satisfactory results, both artistically and practically, will be obtained when the ground is delineated to this scale, but it can be readily applied to any other scale. For example, the horizontal interval for a slope of 120, corresponding to a vertical interval of 25 feet, will be 20 × 25 = 500 feet, which, on a scale of six inches to a mile, will be represented by a length equal to 5005280 × 6 = 0·566 inches. In this case, therefore, supposing the slope of the ground to be uniform between two given contours 25 feet apart, we should represent it by means of the hachures shown opposite a slope of 120, continued over a space of 0·566 inch.

The shade scale is designed for a horizontal measurement of six inches per mile, and the amount of shade has been carefully selected to create the best artistic effect. Naturally, the most satisfying outcomes, both artistically and practically, will be achieved when the ground is represented at this scale, but it can easily be adapted to any other scale. For instance, the horizontal distance for a slope of 120, which corresponds to a vertical change of 25 feet, will be calculated as 20 × 25 = 500 feet. On a scale of six inches per mile, this distance will be represented as 5005280 × 6 = 0.566 inches. In this scenario, assuming the slope of the ground is uniform between two specified contours that are 25 feet apart, we would depict it with the hachures shown for a slope of 120, spread over a distance of 0.566 inches.

Fig. 73.

Fig. 73.

In topographical drawings, the light is supposed to fall vertically upon the surface; hence a level surface will reflect all the light that falls upon it, while one of 45° will not reflect any.

In topographical drawings, light is expected to shine straight down onto the surface; therefore, a flat surface will reflect all the light that hits it, while a surface at a 45° angle will not reflect any.

The drawing of the hachures presents certain difficulties of execution that can be overcome only by continued practice and careful attention to the modes of proceeding which experience has proved to be the most effectual. Thus an important rule is always to draw “from left to right and downwards.” To allow this to be done, the drawing must be placed with the summit of the hill to the left hand, and be turned round as the work progresses. The hachures should always be commenced at the crest of the hill, working outwards towards the foot of the slope. They should be drawn firmly, and of a length varying from 14 inch to 34 inch, according to the width of the zone, that is, according to the greater or less degree of the slope, as shown in Fig. 73, at a, b, c, d. When the hill is steep, the lines are made short and thick, and when the declivity is less, they are made longer and lighter, becoming fine and clean as the level is approximated[55] to. A difficulty with beginners is to press upon the pen equally from the beginning to the end of the stroke, the tendency being to press more heavily towards the end, thus producing a whip-like appearance quite opposed to artistic effect, and conveying a false impression of the character of the ground. A good effect is produced by imparting a slightly tremulous motion to the pen when drawing the hachures. The form of the hill being accurately defined by the pencil contour lines, it is not necessary that the accessory curves formed by the shading lines should be rigorously continuous, and indeed a much better effect, artistically, is gained by avoiding such a manner of drawing them. The various sets of lines must be placed together, end to end, in such a way that the groups or sets shall not be separated by a vacant space, nor overlap each other. Care must be taken that the junctions of sets in two contiguous zones do not form a continuous line from one zone to the other, but everywhere “break joint.” Each zone must be filled in before the next lower one is commenced, the drawing being turned as the work progresses to allow the rule enunciated above of “from left to right and downwards” to be complied with. The distance between the shading lines must be increased or diminished according as the width of the zone varies, so as to divide the space equally; and on reaching the part where the lines were begun, the ends must be brought neatly together. As this can be most satisfactorily accomplished where the lines come close together, it is best to begin at the steepest part of the slope.

The drawing of hachures has some execution challenges that can only be overcome with ongoing practice and careful attention to proven methods. An important rule to remember is to always draw “from left to right and downwards.” To do this, the drawing should be positioned with the peak of the hill to your left and rotated as you work. Start the hachures at the top of the hill, drawing outward towards the bottom of the slope. They should be drawn firmly, with a length that varies from 14 inch to 34 inch, depending on the width of the zone, which corresponds to the steepness of the slope, as shown in Fig. 73, at a, b, c, d. When the hill is steep, the lines should be short and thick; when the slope is gentler, they should be longer and lighter, becoming fine and clean as they approach the level[55]. Beginners often struggle to apply even pressure on the pen throughout the stroke, which leads to pressing harder at the end, creating a whip-like effect that detracts from the artwork and misrepresents the terrain. A good result can be achieved by giving a slight tremble to the pen while drawing the hachures. The hill's shape is precisely defined by the pencil contours, so the shading lines do not need to be perfectly continuous; in fact, avoiding that creates a more artistic effect. The different sets of lines should be placed end to end without gaps or overlaps. It's important that the junctions of sets in adjacent zones do not create a continuous line but rather “break joint” everywhere. Each zone must be filled in before starting the next lower one, and the drawing should be rotated to comply with the “from left to right and downwards” rule as you proceed. The spacing between the shading lines must be adjusted based on the width of the zone, ensuring the space is evenly divided, and the ends should meet neatly where the lines began. Since this is easiest to achieve where the lines are close together, it's best to start at the steepest part of the slope.

In taking a set of hachures round a sharp bend, as in the case of a spur or a ravine, a practical difficulty occurs, which difficulty is increased as the angle becomes more acute. The most effective way of overcoming this difficulty is to draw a pencil line down the spur or[56] re-entering angle, as shown at A B and C D in Fig. 74, and to mark off on this line, at the proper intervals, small arcs of the same radius, as near as can be judged by the eye, as the curve of the contour line. The sets of hachures on each side may then be drawn to these arcs. Guiding lines, as a b, c d, e f, and g h, should be drawn at right angles to the general direction of the contours to ensure the hachures being correctly placed before and after rounding the angle. For this method of carrying a set of hachures round a sharp curve, we are mainly indebted to Lieut. R. Pulford’s ‘Theory and Practice of Drawing.’ When this method is not employed, the hachures must be drawn on each side of the angle first, and those for the angle filled in separately.

When drawing a set of hachures around a sharp bend, like on a spur or in a ravine, a practical challenge arises, and this challenge becomes tougher as the angle gets sharper. The best way to tackle this issue is to draw a pencil line down the spur or re-entering angle, as illustrated at A B and C D in Fig. 74, and to mark small arcs of the same radius along this line at proper intervals, as closely as possible to the curve of the contour line. The sets of hachures on each side can then be drawn to these arcs. Guiding lines, like a b, c d, e f, and g h, should be drawn at right angles to the overall direction of the contours to ensure the hachures are placed correctly before and after rounding the angle. This method for carrying a set of hachures around a sharp curve is primarily credited to Lieut. R. Pulford’s ‘Theory and Practice of Drawing.’ If this method isn't used, the hachures must first be drawn on each side of the angle, with the ones for the angle filled in separately.

Fig. 74.

Fig. 74.

Great care must be taken in filling in the zones formed by the contour lines, that the drawing when finished do not present the appearance of separate layers or bands; for such an appearance is not only quite opposed to artistic effect, but it conveys a false notion of the character of the ground. The successive zones are not separate portions of the surface, but each is a continuation of the one adjoining it. The great principle to be observed in this, as in all matters of hill shading, is that changes of slope are gradual. When the contours are only pencilled in as guide lines to be afterwards erased, the above-mentioned defect may be avoided by drawing the hachures over them, without reference to exact spacing. But when, as is usually the case in regular surveys, the contours are inked in in dotted lines, the only means of avoiding it is to space the hachures on each side of a contour line at the same distance apart.

Great care must be taken when filling in the areas created by the contour lines to ensure that the finished drawing doesn’t look like it has separate layers or bands. Such a look not only goes against artistic quality, but also gives a misleading impression of the ground's character. The different areas are not separate parts of the surface; each one is a continuation of the one next to it. The main principle to keep in mind here, as with all hill shading techniques, is that changes in slope are gradual. When the contours are lightly sketched in as guides to be later erased, this issue can be avoided by drawing the hachures over them without worrying about exact spacing. However, when the contours are usually inked in with dotted lines during regular surveys, the only way to prevent this issue is to space the hachures evenly on both sides of the contour line.

The student of map drawing should practise assiduously this[57] system of shading in detached portions before undertaking the delineation of a complete hill. For such exercises, either a soft, medium-pointed steel pen, or a quill may be used.

The student learning to draw maps should diligently practice this[57] shading technique in smaller sections before trying to sketch an entire hill. For these exercises, either a soft, medium-pointed steel pen or a quill can be used.

The Vertical System of Shading.

—The foregoing system of shading is known as the Horizontal, and is now generally employed in this country for all kinds of surveys. There is, however, another system much used abroad, and frequently adopted here for engraved maps. In this system, which is known as the vertical, the shading lines are made to radiate from or converge into the curved parts of a hill, according as they project or re-enter. Such lines are called lines of greatest descent; they are supposed to describe the same course that water would describe if allowed to trickle in streams down the slopes, and hence they exhibit both the direction and the degree of the slope. Having the horizontal sections given, we may obtain a complete knowledge of the direction in which the ground slopes by drawing perpendicular to them any number of lines of greatest descent; the degree of declivity is expressed by purely conventional means. The means adopted for this purpose are of two kinds. One depends upon the principle of vertical illumination, in which the maximum quantity of light is reflected upwards to the eye by a horizontal surface, and a minimum by a surface inclined 45° to the horizon. This is the English and German convention, and it lays more stress upon the proportions of black to white in indicating the degree of slope, than upon the distance between the shading lines. The other convention, which is the French, on the contrary, makes its expression depend more upon the distance between the lines of greatest descent than upon the shade of colour produced, though in this also the tint is graduated from dark to light, according to the degree of declivity.

—The shading method described earlier is known as the Horizontal system, and it's commonly used in this country for all types of surveys. There is, however, another system that is widely used abroad and often adopted here for engraved maps. This system, known as the Vertical, has shading lines that radiate from or converge into the curved areas of a hill, depending on whether they stick out or dip in. These lines are referred to as lines of greatest descent; they are thought to follow the same path that water would take if it flowed down the slopes, thus showing both the direction and the degree of the slope. With the horizontal sections provided, we can fully understand the direction in which the ground slopes by drawing perpendicular lines of greatest descent; the degree of steepness is represented through conventional methods. There are two types of conventions used for this purpose. One is based on vertical illumination, where the maximum amount of light reflects upward to the viewer from a horizontal surface and the minimum from a surface slanted at 45° to the horizon. This is the convention used in England and Germany, which focuses more on the ratio of black to white to indicate the slope degree rather than the distance between shading lines. The other convention, used in France, relies more on the distance between the lines of greatest descent rather than the shade of color produced, though it also uses a gradient from dark to light according to the slope degree.

A scale of shade is used for this system, founded upon the same principles as that already given for the horizontal system. The scale adopted is due originally to Major Lehmann, of the Saxon Infantry; but it has received some modification to adapt it to the requirements of practice. Fig. 75 shows Lehmann’s scale. It is constructed for every 5°, from a level up to a slope of 45°, which is the steepest[58] slope at which earth will stand. Each division of the scale corresponding to a given slope is subdivided into nine parts, to show the proportions of black to white. For a level, the whole of these spaces are left white; for a slope of 5°, the proportion is one black to eight white; for a slope of 10°, two black to seven white; and so on up to 45°, for which slope we have all black. The longitudinal divisions of the scale below that against the outer edge A B contain the same proportions of black to white, but equally distributed to show the mode of applying it. Thus, in the division o p r s, corresponding to a slope of 5°, the single black space is, in E F G H, divided into two equal parts and distributed; in G H I K, these two parts are again equally divided and distributed; and so on throughout the other longitudinal divisions. If now the scale be cut off along the line L M, the part L M C D will constitute a scale, the graduated edge L M of which will furnish us with a means of marking off the distance between the centres of the shading lines.

A shade scale is used in this system, based on the same principles as the horizontal system previously described. This scale was originally developed by Major Lehmann of the Saxon Infantry, but it has been modified to meet practical needs. Fig. 75 displays Lehmann’s scale. It is designed for every 5°, ranging from a level surface up to a 45° slope, which is the steepest angle at which earth remains stable.[58] Each division of the scale for a specific slope is split into nine parts to represent the ratio of black to white. At a level position, all these sections are white; at a 5° slope, the ratio is one black to eight white; for a 10° slope, it’s two black to seven white; and this continues up to a 45° slope, which is entirely black. The longitudinal divisions of the scale below the outer edge A B maintain the same black to white ratio, spread out evenly to illustrate how to apply it. For example, in the division o p r s, which corresponds to a 5° slope, the single black section in E F G H is divided into two equal parts and spread out; in G H I K, those two parts are again equally divided and arranged; and this pattern continues across the other longitudinal divisions. If the scale is cut along the line L M, the section L M C D will form a scale, with the graduated edge L M providing a way to measure the distance between the centers of the shading lines.

Fig. 75.
Lehmann’s Scale of Shade.

Fig. 75.
Lehmann’s Shade Scale.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (48 kB).

To find the proportion of black to white in the foregoing scale for any given slope:—Subtract the given inclination from 45° for a denominator, and put the given inclination for a numerator. In the scale, as drawn in the figure, the variations are by 5°; but it is obvious that a scale may be drawn in the same manner to mark smaller variations, if thought desirable.

To calculate the ratio of black to white in the previous scale for any specific slope:—Subtract the given angle from 45° for the denominator, and use the given angle for the numerator. In the scale, as illustrated in the figure, the changes are in increments of 5°; however, it's clear that a scale can be created in the same way to indicate smaller increments, if desired.

[59]

[59]

In applying this method in the United States’ Coast Survey, it was remarked that “this scale of shade does not represent slopes greater than 45°, thereby limiting the graphic capabilities and effect of the map. It also makes the slopes too dark as they approach the inclination of 45°, and does not well represent slopes of less than 5°, which latter it is often desirable and necessary to express distinctly.” The following modification was therefore made:—

In using this method in the United States Coast Survey, it was noted that “this scale of shading doesn’t represent slopes greater than 45°, which limits the graphic capabilities and impact of the map. It also makes the slopes too dark as they near a 45° incline, and doesn’t accurately represent slopes of less than 5°, which is often important and necessary to express clearly.” Therefore, the following modification was made:—

  Slope. Proportion of  
Black. White.
2 12° or 2 34° 1 10
5 ° 6 ° 2 9
10 ° 11 ° 3 8
15 ° 16 ° 4 7
25 ° 26 ° 5 6
35° 6 5
45° 7 4
60° 8 3
75° 9 2

By this scale, the slighter slopes are represented distinctly. For slopes less than 16°, the shades are darker than in Lehmann’s scale; this makes their difference more noticeable. Above 25° the shades are lighter.

By this scale, the gentler slopes are clearly shown. For slopes less than 16°, the shades are darker than in Lehmann’s scale; this makes their differences more noticeable. Above 25°, the shades are lighter.

A further modification, which for ordinary purposes possesses the advantages of simplicity and facility of application, has been made in England, and very generally adopted. This modification consists in fixing with accuracy only three proportions of black to white for three medium slopes, as follows:—

A further change, which for everyday use offers the benefits of simplicity and ease of application, has been implemented in England and widely adopted. This change involves defining precisely three ratios of black to white for three medium slopes, as follows:—

  Slope. Proportion of  
Black. White.
Level .. all
15 ° 1 2
22 12° 1 1
30 ° 2 1
45 ° all ..

A scale of shade may at once be constructed from this Table, by assuming the thickness of the shading line for the medium slope of 2212°, which thickness must be suited to the scale, and to the degree of fineness and finish it is intended to give the drawing. Generally,[60] if the lines have such a relation to the scale of the drawing as to present a well-connected appearance, it will be found that fewer shading lines and a rather coarse texture will conduce more to clearness of expression than a finer texture, which tends to produce a dryness of style. In shading to this scale, it should be applied to the drawing wherever the slope corresponds to one of the three on the scale. Intermediate slopes are indicated by graduating the thickness of the shading lines. In all cases a good deal must be left to correctness of eye and skill of hand.

A shade scale can be created from this table by using a shading line thickness appropriate for a medium slope of 2212°, which should match the scale and the level of detail intended for the drawing. Typically,[60] if the lines are proportionate to the scale of the drawing to create a cohesive look, fewer shading lines with a coarser texture will generally enhance clarity more than finer textures, which can lead to a dry appearance. When shading to this scale, it should be applied to the drawing wherever the slope aligns with one of the three on the scale. For intermediate slopes, the thickness of the shading lines should be adjusted. In all instances, a lot depends on the accuracy of the eye and the skill of the hand.

In the French method, as we have said, the inclination is expressed by the distances between the centres of the lines of greatest descent. The limits of the slopes that can be represented by this method are, 11 or 45° for the greatest and 164 or 0° 53′ 43″ for the smallest. The largest scale that will admit of conveniently drawing the lines of greatest descent is 1600 full size, or about 834 feet to a mile. The vertical distance between the horizontal sections is generally taken as 1 yard. Hence to a scale of 1600 the least width of zone will be 6100 inch, and the greatest 6100 × 64 = 384100 inches.

In the French method, as we mentioned, the slope is shown by the distances between the centers of the lines of steepest descent. The range of slopes that this method can represent is 1/1 or 45° for the steepest and 1/64 or 0° 53′ 43″ for the gentlest. The largest scale that allows for easily drawing the lines of steepest descent is 1/600 full size, which is about 8¾ feet to a mile. The vertical distance between the horizontal sections is typically taken as 1 yard. Therefore, at a scale of 1/600, the smallest width of the zone will be 6/100 inch, and the largest will be 6/100 × 64 = 384/100 inches.

The distance between the shading lines is reckoned from centre to centre, and is determined by the rule:—To the distance between the upper and the lower curves of any zone add 310 of an inch; a sixteenth part of this sum will be the proper interval for the shading lines. The distance is measured along the line of greatest descent. Thus, if the inclination be 160 and the scale 1600, the width of zone will be ·06 × 60 = 3·60 inches, and by the rule we have 3·60 + ·316 = 3·916 = 0·244 inch. Another rule is:—To a fourth of the distance between the upper and the lower curves of any zone, add 751000 of an inch; a fourth part of the sum will be equal to the interval.

The distance between the shading lines is measured from center to center and is determined by the following rule: To the distance between the upper and lower curves of any zone, add 310 of an inch; one-sixteenth of this total will be the proper spacing for the shading lines. The distance is measured along the line of steepest descent. So, if the slope is 160 and the scale is 1600, the width of the zone will be ·06 × 60 = 3·60 inches, and using the rule we get 3.60 + 316 = 3.916 = 0·244 inch. Another rule is: To a fourth of the distance between the upper and lower curves of any zone, add 751000 of an inch; a fourth of the total will be equal to the interval.

The thickness or breadth of the lines is made to vary directly as the inclination to assist in expressing the declivity. This thickness is determined by the following rule. For a slope of 11 the thickness of the shading lines is equal to 23 of the distance between their centres,[61] and this thickness will diminish with the inclination down to 164, where the lines will be as fine as they can be drawn. In a slope of 11 this rule will always make the breadth of the shading lines twice that of the white space contained between them.

The thickness or width of the lines changes based on the slope to help show the steepness. This thickness follows this guideline: for a slope of 11, the thickness of the shading lines is 23 of the distance between their centers,[61] and this thickness decreases with the angle until it reaches 164, where the lines become as thin as possible. For a slope of 11, this rule will always make the width of the shading lines twice that of the white space between them.

To represent declivities by the vertical system of shading a considerable amount of practice is required. This practice should be commenced by drawing repeatedly the scale of shade, and gradually applied, as proficiency is attained, to the varying inclinations of a hillside. Having the horizontal sections of the hill given, the degree of slope should be written upon it in pencil in as many places as is necessary. The distances between the centres of the shading lines may then be marked off upon the upper curve of the zone from the scale of shade, and the lines of greatest descent drawn through the points thus determined. The exact proportion of black to white being then adopted, the colour will express the degree of the slope, and the line of greatest descent will show its direction.

To show slopes using vertical shading, you'll need quite a bit of practice. Start by repeatedly drawing the shading scale, and as you get better, apply it to the different angles of a hillside. Once you have the horizontal sections of the hill, you should mark the slope's degree with a pencil in as many spots as needed. Next, measure the distances between the centers of the shading lines along the top curve of the zone using the shading scale, and draw the lines of steepest descent through those points. By establishing the right ratio of black to white, the color will indicate the slope's degree, and the steepest descent line will show its direction.

The principle of making the shading lines longer on a gentle slope than on a steep one should be adhered to generally; but in this matter much must be left to the judgment and the skill of the draughtsman. Frequently on slight inclinations it will be desirable to divide and subdivide the zone by medial lines, as shown in Fig. 76, and on very steep slopes the shading lines may be drawn over two or more zones. For ordinary scales the extremes of length may be fixed at 16 of an inch on the steepest slopes, and 34 of an inch on the gentlest.

The idea of making the shading lines longer on a gentle slope compared to a steep one should generally be followed; however, much of this relies on the judgment and skill of the drafter. Often, on slight inclines, it will be helpful to divide and subdivide the area with midlines, as shown in Fig. 76, and on very steep slopes, the shading lines can be drawn across two or more areas. For regular scales, the lengths can be set at 16 of an inch for the steepest slopes, and 34 of an inch for the gentlest.

Fig. 76.

Fig. 76.

It is not necessary to repeat the process of construction for every line, such a mode of proceeding would be too laborious and slow. It will be sufficient to determine the lines in this exact manner at those parts where the greatest changes of slope occur. Thus a group should be constructed in each zone where the slope is greatest and another[62] where it is least, after which a few intermediate ones may be put in. The vacancies may then be filled in, taking care to graduate the changes in passing from group to group. By this means we do not, of course, get a mathematically exact representation of the surface, but it is sufficiently accurate for practical purposes.

There's no need to go through the construction process for every single line; that would be too tedious and slow. It's enough to pinpoint the lines accurately only in the places where the steepest changes in slope happen. So, you should create a group in each area where the slope is highest and another where it’s lowest, and then add a few in-between ones. After that, you can fill in the gaps, making sure to gradually change from one group to the next. This way, we won’t achieve a mathematically precise representation of the surface, but it will be accurate enough for practical use.

When the preparatory pencil lines have been drawn in and the spaces for the shading lines laid off by dots, the shading should be commenced at the steepest part of the upper zone. The lines should be drawn firmly from curve to curve, taking care to make each row terminate evenly at the lower edge; they must always be drawn downwards and from left to right, proceeding in this direction round the zone till the point of setting out is reached, where the joining must be carefully effected. This can always be done most neatly where the lines are thickest, as we have previously pointed out. The succeeding zones should be filled up in the same manner. As changes must be gradual in every direction, care must be taken to make the contiguous zones blend into each other. When it is required to pass from a light zone to a darker one beneath it, the lower ends of the lines in the light zone should be thickened a little, so as to meet the upper ends of the lines in the dark zone with nearly the same colour. The upper ends of these latter lines should also be slightly lightened. The lines of one zone must not be continued into those of the next. Even on a uniform slope such a prolongation of the lines would produce a hard appearance, which should be avoided. But in the case of a conical hill, like that shown in Fig. 77, it would give rise to an error in principle; for soon after leaving the summit we should have too few lines of descent. When the hill has been covered with shading lines, the base and the summit must be softened off by tapering the lower end of each line at the base, and the upper end of each line at the summit. To give the taper to the latter, the drawing should be turned upside down.

When the initial pencil lines are drawn and the areas for the shading lines are marked by dots, shading should start at the steepest part of the upper zone. The lines should be drawn firmly from curve to curve, ensuring that each row ends evenly at the lower edge; they must always be drawn downward and from left to right, continuing in that direction around the zone until you reach the starting point, where the lines should be carefully joined. This is usually most neatly done where the lines are thickest, as previously mentioned. The following zones should be filled in the same way. Since transitions must be gradual in every direction, it's important to ensure that the adjacent zones blend into one another. When moving from a lighter zone to a darker one below it, the lower ends of the lines in the light zone should be slightly thickened to match the upper ends of the lines in the darker zone with a similar color. The upper ends of those latter lines should also be slightly lightened. The lines of one zone should not extend into those of the next. Even on a uniform slope, extending the lines would create a harsh look, which should be avoided. However, in the case of a conical hill, like the one shown in Fig. 77, this would lead to a fundamental error; because shortly after leaving the top, there would be too few descending lines. Once the hill is covered with shading lines, the base and the summit need to be softened by tapering the lower end of each line at the base and the upper end of each line at the summit. To create the taper for the latter, the drawing should be turned upside down.

Fig. 77.

Fig. 77.

When the curves are parallel or nearly so, the shading lines are[63] straight, and also nearly parallel. But when the curves depart widely from each other, the shading lines will themselves have a slight curvature, for being lines of greatest descent, they must be normal to the curves. In such cases, a number of normals should be put in at short distances with the pencil, as shown in Fig. 78, to serve as guides to the shading lines. The foregoing directions for shading a hill apply equally to the shading of a hollow, the shading lines in which are converging.

When the curves are parallel or almost parallel, the shading lines are[63]straight and nearly parallel as well. However, when the curves are far apart, the shading lines will have a slight curve because, as lines of greatest descent, they need to be perpendicular to the curves. In these cases, several perpendiculars should be drawn at short distances with a pencil, as shown in Fig. 78, to act as guides for the shading lines. The instructions for shading a hill are just as applicable to shading a hollow, where the shading lines converge.

Fig. 78.

Fig. 78.

Occasionally short slopes steeper than the “natural slope” of 45° will be met with. Such being exceptions to the law of slopes, are marked in an exceptional manner. When the surfaces of these slopes are of earth, they are shown by black lines drawn parallel to the horizontal curves, and when of rock, by black lines drawn in all directions, not intersecting, but abutting abruptly upon each other in short heavy masses, as shown in Fig. 78.

Occasionally, you’ll encounter short slopes that are steeper than the “natural slope” of 45°. These are exceptions to the slope rules and are marked distinctly. When the surfaces of these slopes are made of soil, they’re indicated by black lines running parallel to the horizontal curves. If they’re made of rock, they’re represented by black lines drawn in various directions that don’t cross each other but meet abruptly in short, thick sections, as shown in Fig. 78.

Shading in Colours.

—Frequently in topographical drawings, and still more frequently in mechanical drawings, colour is resorted to to produce the effect of shading lines. As the principles according to which colour is applied for this purpose are the same as those which determine the use of shading lines, there remains little to be said on this matter beyond describing the modes of applying the colour.

—Often in topographical drawings, and even more so in mechanical drawings, color is used to create the effect of shading lines. Since the principles for using color in this way are the same as those that guide the use of shading lines, there's not much to discuss on this topic apart from outlining the methods of applying the color.

Hill Slopes.

—In representing slopes, the tint employed to give the effect of that produced by the ink lines already described is composed of indigo and burnt sienna, and is applied as a flat-wash. A little lake is added to neutralize the greenish hue of this tint when it is to be laid over sand or cultivated ground. The different degrees of intensity required to express the inclination are produced by repeating the wash over those parts which are darker than the rest. To accomplish[64] this neatly, the darker portions must be washed in first, so that the final washings may cover the whole surface, and the edges of each successive wash must be softened off or blended into the next with a brush and clean water. In shading hills, the paper along the crest of the slope should be first moistened with the water-brush, and before it dries, the laying on of the colour should be begun on the moistened part, and proceeded with down the slope. The effect of representing hills by this method, which is a very expeditious one, is much improved by adding light shading lines with the pen, either in pale ink, or a mixture of indigo and burnt sienna. The ground is always covered with its appropriate sign before the shading tint is laid on.

—To represent slopes, the color used to achieve the effect created by the ink lines mentioned earlier is a mix of indigo and burnt sienna, applied as a flat wash. A bit of lake is added to neutralize the greenish tint when it will be applied over sand or cultivated land. The various levels of intensity needed to indicate the slope are achieved by layering the wash over the darker areas. To do this neatly, the darker sections should be washed in first, allowing the final washes to cover the entire surface, and the edges of each wash must be blended into the next with a brush and clean water. When shading hills, the paper along the top of the slope should be dampened with a water brush, and before it dries, the color application should start on the damp area and continue down the slope. This quick method of depicting hills is enhanced by adding light shading lines with a pen, using either light ink or a mix of indigo and burnt sienna. The ground is always marked with its appropriate symbol before the shading color is applied.

Cylindrical Surfaces in Mechanical Drawings.

—In shading cylindrical surfaces and drawings generally, three methods are employed. One of these is known as softening off, and is employed on finished drawings of machinery. For shading by this method, a brush called a softener is required; this has a brush at each end of the handle, one being larger than the other. Having moistened the paper, and filled the smaller brush with colour and the larger one with water, a narrow strip of colour is laid along the darkest part of the cylinder, and immediately after, while the colour is quite moist, the water-brush is drawn along one edge of the strip and then in like manner along the other, so as to cause the colour to flow over that portion of the surface which has been damped. The brush is then wiped upon a cloth and drawn lightly down the edge to take up the superfluous water. The colour should be light to begin with, and the quantity to be taken in the brush must be determined by experience. The same remark applies to the water-brush, for if too little be used the colour will not spread sufficiently, and if too much, the colour will be diluted and rendered uneven. These operations of laying on the colour and softening off are continued until the cylindrical appearance has been produced. Each succeeding coat should be laid on before the preceding one is quite dry, as the colour will spread more evenly over a damp surface. The previously applied coat must, however, have been[65] sufficiently absorbed not to wash up, or a clouded appearance will be the result.

—In shading cylindrical surfaces and drawings in general, three methods are used. One of these is called softening off, and it's used on final drawings of machinery. To shade using this method, a brush known as a softener is needed; it has a brush on each end of the handle, one larger than the other. After moistening the paper and loading the smaller brush with color and the larger one with water, a narrow line of color is applied along the darkest part of the cylinder. Immediately after, while the color is still wet, the water brush is drawn along one edge of the strip and then the other, allowing the color to flow over the dampened area. The brush is then wiped on a cloth and lightly drawn down the edge to remove any excess water. The color should start light, and the amount taken on the brush should be learned through experience. The same applies to the water brush; if too little is used, the color won't spread enough, and if too much is used, it will dilute the color and create an uneven finish. These steps of applying color and softening off continue until the cylindrical effect is achieved. Each new coat should be applied before the previous one is completely dry, as the color will spread more evenly on a damp surface. However, the earlier coat must have been absorbed enough not to wash away, or a cloudy effect will occur.

Another method, known as the French, consists in applying a narrow strip of colour to the darkest part, and overlaying this with other strips, each wider than the one previously laid on. To regulate the breadth of the strips, a number of meridian lines are drawn upon the cylinder. When shaded in this manner, the cylinder presents the appearance of a polygon rather than that of a cylinder.

Another method, called the French, involves applying a narrow strip of color to the darkest part, then layering on wider strips one by one. To control the width of the strips, several meridian lines are drawn on the cylinder. When shaded this way, the cylinder looks more like a polygon than a cylinder.

The third method, by reason of the facility it affords of producing effect, is very suitable for large drawings and diagrams for illustrating papers and lectures. In shading according to this method, a thick line or a narrow strip of very thick and black Indian ink is laid on the darkest part of the cylinder with the point of the brush. The breadth of the strip will be regulated by the diameter of the object, and it should be previously lined out in pencil. When dry, a damp brush is passed over it so as to remove the sharp edges of the strip, and to cause the ink to run slightly over the moistened surface of the paper. The flat colour washes are then applied as required, the washes being carried over the black strips, which will be further reduced in tone by a portion of the ink mixing with the colour.

The third method, because it makes it easy to create effects, is great for large drawings and diagrams for illustrating papers and lectures. When shading with this method, use a thick line or a narrow strip of really thick and black Indian ink on the darkest part of the cylinder with the brush tip. The width of the strip should match the object's diameter, and it should be outlined in pencil first. Once dry, use a damp brush to soften the sharp edges of the strip and let the ink spread slightly over the wet paper surface. Then, apply the flat color washes as needed, allowing the washes to go over the black strips, which will be further toned down as the ink mixes with the color.

In shading, it will be found convenient to keep the light side of the object next to the operator, as it is easier to wash towards the body than from it with the water-brush. The brush should be held in as nearly a vertical position as possible, as it is more easy, when that position is observed, to keep within the boundary lines.

In shading, it's helpful to keep the light side of the object closest to you, as it's easier to wash towards your body with the water brush than away from it. The brush should be held as vertically as possible because it's easier to stay within the boundary lines when you do that.


[66]

[66]

PART II.—APPLICATIONS.

Line

Section I.—Letters, Borders, and North Points.

Lettering.

—The lettering of a plan, map, or drawing of any kind, occupies a prominent and conspicuous position, and may be considered as forming an essential part of the drawing. It is, therefore, obvious that the character of the lettering, and the degree of finish introduced into its execution, will have an important influence on the general appearance of the drawing. Nothing detracts more from the value of a map, considered as a work of art, than a bad style of lettering, while, on the other hand, a well-chosen and well-executed style is both pleasing to the eye, and produces on the mind an impression of accuracy in the more important features of the work. Hence it is not merely desirable, but necessary, that the draughtsman should acquire the ability to form letters correctly and neatly, especially if he be engaged on topographical drawings, into which lettering enters very largely.

—The lettering of a plan, map, or drawing of any kind plays a major role and is considered an essential part of the drawing. It's clear that the style of the lettering and the attention to detail in its execution greatly affect the overall look of the drawing. Nothing ruins the aesthetic value of a map, seen as an artwork, more than poorly done lettering, while a well-chosen and skillfully executed style is not only visually appealing but also conveys a sense of accuracy in the significant aspects of the work. Therefore, it’s not just desirable but necessary for the drafter to be able to create letters correctly and neatly, especially when working on topographical drawings, which heavily rely on lettering.

The formation of letters requires great attention and long practice. It is not a matter in which much assistance is to be derived from descriptions or written instructions of any kind; practice alone from good models will give the requisite skill. The difficulty of forming the letters correctly and of uniform dimensions may, however, be considerably lessened by using guide lines drawn in pencil, to be afterwards erased. Such lines are called construction lines, and the mode of employing them is shown in Plate 4. A careful study of this Plate will give the student a clear understanding of the use of these lines, which could not be imparted by pages of description. A reference to the letters B, E, and T, in connection with the construction lines will[67] show most readily the nature and the degree of assistance afforded by the latter.

Forming letters takes a lot of focus and practice. You can't really rely on descriptions or written instructions for help; only practice with good examples will develop the necessary skill. However, the challenge of creating letters accurately and consistently can be significantly eased by using pencil guide lines that can be erased later. These lines are called construction lines, and how to use them is demonstrated in Plate 4. A careful study of this plate will give students a clear understanding of how to use these lines, which can't be fully explained in written form. Looking at the letters B, E, and T alongside the construction lines will clearly show the kind of help these lines provide.

In making capitals, each letter must be sketched in pencil; the outline must then be drawn in ink with a firm and steady line, and afterwards filled up with the pen. In forming the small roman and italic letters, three construction lines are drawn, the lower two to limit the height of the ordinary letters, and the upper one to limit the height of such letters as d and l, and the capitals. The heavy parts of these letters are made at once by a bold pressure of the pen. The curved portions should be carefully distinguished from the straight. The letters a, c, g, o, s, &c., for example, are composed wholly of curved lines. They should be drawn symmetrically, and their width should be only a little less than their height. The round portion of the g should not quite reach to the lower line. A perfect regularity should be maintained throughout the letters, as the beauty of their appearance depends greatly on this. Care must also be taken, in italic writing, to keep the inclination the same everywhere. Manuscript lettering should be more extended than the clear roman or italic type, for crowding greatly mars its appearance.

In creating capital letters, each one should first be sketched in pencil. Then, the outline should be drawn in ink with a firm and steady line, before being filled in with a pen. When forming small Roman and italic letters, three construction lines are drawn: the lower two set the height for the regular letters, and the upper line sets the height for letters like d and l, as well as the capitals. The thicker parts of these letters should be created with a strong pressure of the pen. Curved sections need to be clearly distinguished from straight ones. Letters like a, c, g, o, s, etc., are made entirely of curved lines. They should be drawn symmetrically, and their width should be slightly less than their height. The round part of the g should not touch the lower line. Consistent regularity throughout the letters is essential, as their beauty depends heavily on this. It's also important in italic writing to keep the slant uniform. Handwritten letters should be more spaced out than clear Roman or italic type, as crowding can ruin its look.

The character of the letters employed should be in accordance with that of the drawing upon which they are to appear. Thus for engineering and mechanical drawings, there is nothing more suitable generally than the plain block letter. But on drawings of a more artistic and ornamental character, a more elaborate form of letter may and should be used. And of these elaborate forms, there will always be one more suitable than the rest to the particular character of the drawing. The choice of this form is a matter to be left entirely to the judgment and the taste of the draughtsman.

The style of the letters used should match the drawing they accompany. For engineering and mechanical drawings, simple block letters are usually the best choice. However, for drawings that are more artistic and decorative, a fancier type of letter can and should be used. Among these decorative types, one will always be more fitting for the specific nature of the drawing. Choosing this style is entirely up to the judgment and taste of the drafter.

Another matter on which the draughtsman will have to exercise his judgment is the size of the letters employed. This must manifestly be in accordance, first, with the character of the object denoted, and, second, with the scale of the drawing. With regard to the former of these conditions, it is obvious that propriety will demand a larger letter for the city than the town, for the town than the village, for[68] the village than the farm, and for the mansion than the gate-lodge. This propriety of relative importance must be everywhere observed. The different types of lettering are arranged in the order of importance as follows:—1, The upright capital; 2, the inclined capital; 3, the upright roman, or ordinary small type; and 4, the small italic. The draughtsman will have to exercise his judgment in suiting the size to the scale of the map, but the following Table may be taken as a general guide:—

Another thing the drafter needs to consider is the size of the letters used. This should clearly align with, first, the nature of the object being represented, and second, the scale of the drawing. Regarding the first point, it’s clear that a larger letter is appropriate for a city than for a town, a town than for a village, a village than for a farm, and a mansion than for a gatehouse. This relative importance must always be kept in mind. The different types of lettering are ranked by importance as follows: 1. The upright capital; 2. The inclined capital; 3. The upright roman, or regular small type; and 4. The small italic. The drafter will need to use their judgment to match the size to the scale of the map, but the following Table can serve as a general guide:—

Scale. Height of
Upright Capitals.
Height of
Small Roman.
1600, or one inch to fifty feet. Six-tenths of an inch. Twelve-hundredths of an inch.
12640, or two feet to a mile. Four Eight
15280, or one foot to a mile. Three Six
110560, or four inches to a mile. Two Four

The thickness of the capital should be one-seventh of the height.

The thickness of the capital should be one-seventh of its height.

As far as practicable, the lines of lettering should be parallel to the base of the drawing. Frequently, however, cases will occur in which it will be desirable to letter in other directions and in curved lines. In writing along a curved or very irregular outline, the course of a river or the boundary of an estate, for example, an agreeable effect is produced by making the lines of lettering conform in some degree with the outlines against which they are written.

As much as possible, the letters should be parallel to the bottom of the drawing. However, there will often be situations where it's better to write in different directions and in curved lines. When writing along a curved or very irregular shape, like the path of a river or the edge of a property, it looks nice to have the lines of text follow the shapes they are placed along.

The arrangement of the letters in titles and the effective disposition of the words are also matters requiring great care and some taste. The design and the execution of the title afford another opportunity of enhancing the beauty of a drawing by a display of striking arrangement and appropriate ornamentation. Plates 7 and 8 show some useful models for plans, and Plate 25 contains some specimens of flourishes which may frequently be introduced with pleasing effect. The form which the title shall assume and the space which it shall occupy must be determined before beginning to put it upon the drawing. To avoid erasures, it is well to sketch roughly upon a piece of paper, a trial title, emendations in which can be easily made. When found satisfactory, draw a vertical centre line, which[69] should pass through the middle letter of each line. Apply this centre line to the centre line of the title on the drawing, and lightly mark in with the pencil the position of each letter. When this method is not adopted, the middle letters should be put in first upon the centre line, and the others afterwards inserted from left to right, and from right to left.

The way letters are arranged in titles and how the words are laid out also need careful thought and a bit of style. The design and execution of the title offer another chance to enhance the beauty of a drawing through striking arrangements and suitable decorations. Plates 7 and 8 provide some useful models for layouts, and Plate 25 includes examples of flourishes that can often be added for a nice effect. You need to decide how the title will look and how much space it will take up before starting to put it on the drawing. To avoid erasing, it’s a good idea to roughly sketch a trial title on a piece of paper, where changes can be easily made. Once you're happy with it, draw a vertical center line that passes through the middle letter of each line. Align this center line with the center line of the title on the drawing, and lightly mark the position of each letter with a pencil. If you don’t use this method, start by placing the middle letters on the center line first, then add the others from left to right and from right to left.

In maps, the title may be placed outside the border if it consist of one line only, but if it occupy more than one line, it should be placed within the border. Generally, it should be placed in one of the corners of the map, and its size should bear some proportion to that of the map. The letters composing the name of the locality, which is usually the most important word, should not exceed in height three-hundredths of the length of the short side of the border. The letters of the other words will vary in size according to their relative importance.

In maps, the title can be outside the border if it’s just one line, but if it takes up more than one line, it should go inside the border. Typically, it should be in one of the corners of the map, and its size should be proportional to the map itself. The letters in the name of the location, which is usually the most important word, shouldn’t be more than three-hundredths of the length of the short side of the border. The letters for other words can vary in size based on their importance.

Borders.

—Plain borders usually consist of two lines, the outer one heavy, and the inner one light. The heavy line should be equal in breadth to the blank space between it and the light line, and the total breadth of the border, that is, of the two lines and the space between them, should be one hundredth part of the length of the shorter side. Ornamental corners may be made to embellish a drawing considerably, and they afford some scope to the fancy and the taste of the draughtsman. Several examples of borders and ornamental corners will be found in the accompanying Plates.

—Plain borders usually have two lines: a thick outer line and a thin inner line. The thick line should be the same width as the gap between it and the thin line, and the total width of the border, which includes both lines and the space between them, should be one-hundredth of the length of the shorter side. Decorative corners can significantly enhance a drawing and allow the designer to express their creativity and style. You can find several examples of borders and decorative corners in the accompanying Plates.

North Points.

—The meridian or north and south line is an indispensable adjunct to every topographical drawing. When the extent of country represented is considerable, it is usual to make the top of the map the north, and in such a case the side border lines are meridian lines. Frequently, however, in plans, the shape of the ground does not admit of this arrangement, and then it becomes necessary to mark a meridian on some part of the map. This line is usually made a conspicuous one, and its north extremity is often ornamented with some fanciful device. The ornamentation of the meridian line should be in keeping with the rest of the map. Plate 9 contains several examples which may be adopted or modified as deemed desirable.

—The meridian or north-south line is an essential part of every topographical drawing. When the area represented is large, it's common to have the top of the map point north, making the side borders meridian lines. However, in some plans, the land's shape doesn't allow for this setup, so it's necessary to indicate a meridian somewhere on the map. This line is usually made bold, and its northern end is often decorated with a creative design. The decoration of the meridian line should match the overall style of the map. Plate 9 contains several examples that can be used or modified as needed.

[70]

[70]


Section II.—Scales.

To all drawings which do not show the full size of the objects represented, it is necessary to affix the scale according to which the objects are drawn. Such a scale is called a scale of lengths or distances, because, by means of it, the distance from one point to another is ascertained. The scale of distances does not contain very minute subdivisions, and consequently is not suitable for use in constructing the drawing. For the latter purpose, another scale, similarly but more minutely divided, is employed, and is known as the scale of construction. A familiarity with the modes of constructing both of these scales should be early acquired by the young draughtsman.

To all drawings that don't show the full size of the objects represented, it’s necessary to include the scale used for drawing the objects. This scale is referred to as a scale of lengths or distances, because it helps determine the distance from one point to another. The scale of distances doesn’t have very fine subdivisions, so it’s not suitable for constructing the drawing. For that purpose, a different scale, which is similarly but more finely divided, is used and is known as the scale of construction. Young draughtsmen should learn how to use both of these scales early on.

Scales of Distances.

—One means of denoting the scale of a drawing is furnished by what is called its representative fraction, the denominator of which shows how many times greater the actual length is than that in the drawing. Thus a scale of 124 shows that 1 inch on the drawing represents 24 inches on the object; in other words, that the object is twenty-four times larger than the drawing. But in addition to this representative fraction, it is usual to affix a graduated straight line, termed a scale, for the purpose of conveniently measuring distances upon it. It is manifest that the unit of length in this scale must bear the same ratio to the real unit of length that a line in the drawing bears to the line which it represents. Thus if the representative fraction be 124, 1 inch on the scale will represent 2 feet.

—One way to indicate the scale of a drawing is through its representative fraction, where the denominator shows how many times larger the actual length is compared to that in the drawing. For example, a scale of 124 means that 1 inch on the drawing represents 24 inches on the object; in other words, the object is twenty-four times larger than the drawing. Additionally, it’s common to include a graduated straight line, called a scale, to conveniently measure distances on it. It's clear that the unit of length on this scale must maintain the same ratio to the real unit of length as a line in the drawing does to the line it represents. So, if the representative fraction is 124, 1 inch on the scale will represent 2 feet.

Scales of distances are usually of such a length as to be a multiple of 10 linear units of some kind, as 100 miles, 50 chains, 20 feet; and this length should also be such as to allow of long lines being taken off at one measurement. To construct the scale, two light lines should be drawn at a suitable distance apart, and below the lower of these lines and at a distance from it equal to one-third of the space between them, a third and heavy line should be drawn. The primary divisions may then be made with the compasses in the following manner. Supposing the number of divisions to be five, open the[71] dividers to what appears to be the fifth part of the line, and step this distance along the line; if the fifth step exceed or fall short of the end of the line, close or open the dividers 15 of the distance, and repeat the trial. This is the quickest and, for large divisions, the most accurate method of dividing a line. To render the divisions more distinct, draw a heavy line between the two light lines in alternate divisions. The left-hand division must be subdivided into the units or lesser measures of which it is made up. For example, if the primary divisions are each of 10 feet, the subdivisions will be feet; if they represent feet, the subdivisions will be inches, and so on. The subdividing should be performed in the following manner. Having erected a perpendicular of indefinite length from the left-hand extremity of the scale, take with the compasses from any scale the number of divisions into which it is required to divide the part. With this distance in the compasses, strike, from the first primary or zero division, an arc cutting the perpendicular, and join the point of intersection to the centre from which the arc is struck. Thus we shall have a right-angled triangle formed of the first primary division of the scale, the perpendicular and the radius, the latter being the hypothenuse (see Fig. 79). Mark on the hypothenuse the divisions to which it was made equal, and from the points of division let fall perpendicular lines upon the scale. These will divide the latter into the required number of equal parts. The length of the hypothenuse should be so chosen as to make an angle not greater than 50° with the base.

Scales of distance are typically set up to be multiples of 10 linear units, like 100 miles, 50 chains, or 20 feet. This length should also be sufficient to measure long lines in a single go. To create the scale, draw two light lines at a suitable distance apart. Below the lower of these lines, and at a distance equal to one-third of the space between them, draw a third, heavier line. You can then create the primary divisions with a compass as follows. If you want five divisions, open the dividers to what seems to be one-fifth of the line and step this distance along the line. If the fifth step goes past or falls short of the end of the line, adjust the dividers to one-fifth of the distance and try again. This method is the fastest and, for larger divisions, the most accurate way to divide a line. To make divisions clearer, draw a heavy line between the two light lines at alternate divisions. The left-hand division must be broken down into the smaller units it contains. For instance, if the primary divisions are 10 feet each, the subdivisions will be feet; if they represent feet, the subdivisions will be inches, and so on. To perform the subdivisions, draw a perpendicular line of indefinite length from the left end of the scale. Using a compass, take the number of divisions needed to divide that part. With this distance set in the compass, create an arc from the first primary or zero division that crosses the perpendicular line, and connect the intersection point to the center from which the arc was drawn. This will form a right-angled triangle made up of the first primary division of the scale, the perpendicular, and the radius, which serves as the hypotenuse (see Fig. 79). Mark the divisions on the hypotenuse to which it was made equal, and drop perpendicular lines from those division points onto the scale. This will divide the scale into the required number of equal parts. The length of the hypotenuse should be chosen to create an angle of no more than 50° with the base.

Fig. 79.

Fig. 79.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (19 kB).

The total length of the scale will be determined by the greatest length which it is required to read off at once, and in the following manner. Thus, let it be required to construct a scale of 124, = 12 inch to[72] the foot, to show 12 feet. Here ·5 inch : x inches :: 1 inch : 12 inches; whence x = 12 × ·5 = 6 inches. This distance of 6 inches must, therefore, be set off upon the lines intended for the scale, and divided in the manner described above. Again, to construct a scale of 110560, = 6 inches to a mile, to show 100 chains. Since 6 inches represents 5280 feet or 528060 = 80 chains, the proportion becomes 6 : x :: 80 : 100; whence x = 60080 = 712 inches. If the scale is 13960 = 16 inches to a mile, = 5 chains to an inch, and the distance to be shown is 30 chains, we have 1 : x :: 5 : 30; or x = 305 = 6 inches. In a scale of 10 yards to the inch, for example, the representative fraction is 10 × 3 × 12 = 1360. So, on the contrary, 1360 = 36036 = 10 yards to the inch. Sometimes it is required to construct a comparative scale, that is, a scale having the same representative fraction, but containing other units. Thus suppose, for example, we have a Russian plan on which is marked a scale of archines measuring a length of 50 archines. It is required to draw upon this plan a comparative scale of yards, upon which a distance of 50 yards may be measured. The Russian archine = ·777 yard. Hence we have the proportion 50 : x :: ·777 : 1, whence x = 50777 = 64·35 archines. Measure off this length from the Russian scale, and upon it construct the English scale in the manner already described. This scale may then be used to measure distances on the plan.

The total length of the scale will be determined by the maximum length that needs to be read at once, like this: let’s say we need to create a scale of 124, which equals 12 inch to[72] the foot, to show 12 feet. Here, ·5 inch : x inches :: 1 inch : 12 inches; so x = 12 × ·5 = 6 inches. This 6-inch distance must be marked on the lines intended for the scale and divided as described above. Next, to create a scale of 110560, equal to 6 inches to a mile, to show 100 chains. Since 6 inches represents 5280 feet or 528060 = 80 chains, the equation becomes 6 : x :: 80 : 100; thus, x = 60080 = 712 inches. If the scale is 13960 = 16 inches to a mile, which equals 5 chains to an inch, and the distance to be shown is 30 chains, we have 1 : x :: 5 : 30; or x = 305 = 6 inches. For a scale of 10 yards to the inch, for example, the representative fraction is 10 × 3 × 12 = 1360. Conversely, 1360 = 36036 = 10 yards to the inch. Sometimes it’s necessary to create a comparative scale, which has the same representative fraction but different units. For instance, suppose we have a Russian plan that shows a scale of archines measuring 50 archines. We need to draw a comparative scale of yards on this plan, allowing a distance of 50 yards to be measured. The Russian archine equals ·777 yards. Therefore, we set up the proportion 50 : x :: ·777 : 1, from which x = 50777 = 64·35 archines. Measure this length from the Russian scale, and then construct the English scale on it as previously described. This scale can then be used to measure distances on the plan.

Amongst Continental nations, decimal scales are usually employed, which are far more convenient in practice than those involving the awkward ratios of miles, furlongs, chains, yards, feet, and inches. The decimal scale has also been adopted for the United States’ Coast Survey, the smallest publication scale of which is 130000; this is also the scale of the new map of France.

Among Continental countries, decimal scales are typically used, which are much more practical than the cumbersome ratios of miles, furlongs, chains, yards, feet, and inches. The decimal scale has also been adopted for the United States Coast Survey, with the smallest publication scale being 130000; this is also the scale of the new map of France.

In choosing a scale, regard must be had alike to the purposes for which the drawing is intended, and to the nature and the amount of detail required to be shown. Thus a larger scale is required in plans of towns than in those of the open country; and the smaller and more intricate the buildings, the larger should the scale be. Also a plan to be used for the setting out of works should be to a larger scale than one made for parliamentary purposes.

In choosing a scale, you need to consider both the purpose of the drawing and the level of detail that needs to be shown. For example, a larger scale is necessary for city plans compared to those of rural areas; the smaller and more complex the buildings, the larger the scale should be. Also, a plan meant for setting out construction should be at a larger scale than one made for parliamentary purposes.

[73]

[73]

The following Tables, given by Rankine in his ‘Civil Engineering,’ enumerate some of the scales for plans most commonly used in Britain, together with a statement of the purposes to which they are best adapted.

The following tables, provided by Rankine in his ‘Civil Engineering,’ list some of the most commonly used scales for plans in Britain, along with a description of the purposes they are best suited for.

Horizontal Scales.
Ordinary Designation of Scale. Fraction
of real
Dimensions.
Use.
1.— 1 inch to a mile 163360   Scale of the smaller Ordnance maps of Britain. This scale is well adapted for maps to be used in exploring the country.
2.— 4 inches to a mile 115840   Smallest scale permitted by the Standing Orders of Parliament for the deposited plans of proposed works.
3.— 6 inches to a mile 110560   Scale of the larger Ordnance maps of Great Britain and Ireland. This scale, being just large enough to show buildings, roads, and other important objects distinctly in their true forms and proportions, and at the same time small enough to enable the eye of the engineer to embrace the plan of a considerable extent of country at one view, is on the whole the best adapted for the selection of lines for engineering works, and for parliamentary plans and preliminary estimates.
4.— 6·366 inches to a mile 110000   Decimal scale possessing the same advantages.
5.— 400 feet to an inch 14800   Smallest scale permitted by the Standing Orders of Parliament for “enlarged plans” of buildings and of land within the curtilage.
6.— 6 chains to an inch 14752     - Scale answering the same purpose.
7.— 15·84 inches to a mile 14000 Scales well suited for the working surveys and land plans of great engineering works, and for enlarged parliamentary plans.
8.— 5 chains to an inch, or 16 inches to a mile. 13060
      (Scale 8 is that prescribed in the Standing Orders of Parliament for “cross sections” of proposed railways, showing alterations of roads.)
9.— 25·344 inches to a mile 12500   Scale of plans of part of the Ordnance survey of Britain, from which the maps before mentioned are reduced. Well adapted for land plans of engineering works and plans of estates.
10.— 200 feet to an inch 12400   Scale suited for similar purposes. Smallest scale prescribed by law for land or contract plans in Ireland.
11.— 3 chains to an inch 12376   Scale of the Tithe Commissioners’ plans. Suited for the same purposes as the above.
12.— 100 feet to an inch 11200   Scale suited for plans of towns, when not very intricate.
13.— 88 feet to an inch, or 60 inches to a mile. 11080   Scale of the Ordnance plans of the less intricately built towns.
14.— 63·36 inches to a mile 11000   Decimal scale having the same properties.
15.— 44 feet to an inch, or 120 inches to a mile. 1528   Scale of the Ordnance plans of the more intricately built towns.
16.— 126·72 inches to a mile 1500   Decimal scale having the same properties.
17.— 30 feet to an inch 1360     - Scales for special purposes.
18.— 20 feet to an inch 1240
19.— 10 feet to an inch 1120
     

[74]

[74]

Vertical Scales.
Ordinary Designation of Vertical Scale. Fraction of real Height. Horizontal Scales with which the Vertical Scale is usually combined. Exaggeration. Use.
      from  
1.— 100 feet to an inch 11200 115840 to 110560 13·2 to 8·8   Smallest scale permitted by the Standing Orders of Parliament for sections of proposed works.
2.— 40 feet to an inch 14800 14800 to 13960 10 to 8·25   Smallest scale permitted by the Standing Orders of Parliament for cross sections showing alterations of roads.
3.— 30 feet to an inch 1360 13960 to 12376 11 to 6·6     - Scales suitable for working sections.
4.— 20 feet to an inch 1240 13960 to 12376 16·5 to 9·9
         

The vertical scale, or scale of heights, is always much greater than the horizontal scale or scale of distances, and the proportion in which the vertical scale is greater than the horizontal, is called the exaggeration of the scale. This exaggeration is necessary, because the differences of elevation between points on the ground are in general much smaller than their distances apart, and would therefore, without exaggeration, be unapparent, and also because, in the execution of engineering works, accuracy in levels is of more importance than accuracy in horizontal positions.

The vertical scale, or height scale, is always much larger than the horizontal scale, or distance scale, and the ratio of how much larger the vertical scale is compared to the horizontal is referred to as the exaggeration of the scale. This exaggeration is essential because the elevation differences between points on the ground are generally much smaller than the distances between them, making them nearly invisible without exaggeration. Additionally, when it comes to engineering projects, having precise levels is more crucial than being accurate with horizontal positions.

Scales of Construction.

—Scales of construction are intended to afford means of measuring more minute quantities than scales of distances. Of the former there are two kinds, known respectively as the Diagonal and the Vernier scale. The diagonal is the more frequently employed. Its construction involves no peculiar difficulty, as it consists simply of an ordinary scale of distances, with the addition of a number of parallel lines crossed by other parallel lines drawn diagonally from the smaller points of division. An example will best show the construction and mode of using this scale. Suppose it to be required to construct a scale of 10 miles to the inch, showing furlongs diagonally; the scale to measure 50 miles. Here 1 : 10 :: x : 50, whence x = 5 inches. Divide this length of 5 inches into five equal parts, and the first part into tenths to show miles, in the manner already described for scales of distances. Then, since it is required to[75] show furlongs or eighths of a mile, eight equidistant parallel lines must be drawn above the scale, at a convenient interval apart, as shown in Fig. 80. Produce the primary points of division to meet the top parallel; and from the last secondary point of division draw a line to the point in which the extreme primary division meets the top parallel. Draw from the other points of division, lines parallel to this one, and the scale will be complete. It will be seen that the inclined lines are the diagonals of the rectangular figures formed by the top and bottom parallels and vertical lines drawn from the smaller points of division.

—Construction scales are designed to measure smaller quantities than distance scales. There are two types of these: the Diagonal and the Vernier scale. The diagonal is the one that's used more often. It’s simple to construct because it consists of a regular distance scale, with the addition of several parallel lines crossed by others that are drawn diagonally from the smaller division points. An example will help illustrate how to create and use this scale. Let’s say we need to create a scale of 10 miles per inch that shows furlongs diagonally, measuring up to 50 miles. Here, 1 : 10 :: x : 50, which gives x = 5 inches. Divide this 5 inches into five equal parts, then divide the first part into tenths to indicate miles, following the method already described for distance scales. Next, since we need to show furlongs or eighths of a mile, we should draw eight equally spaced parallel lines above the scale, leaving a convenient gap between them, as shown in Fig. 80. Extend the main division points to meet the top parallel line; then, from the last secondary division point, draw a line connecting it to the point where the outermost primary division meets the top parallel. Draw lines from the other division points parallel to this one, and the scale will be finished. You'll see that the inclined lines serve as the diagonals of the rectangles formed by the top and bottom parallel lines and the vertical lines drawn from the smaller division points.

Fig. 80.

Fig. 80.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (31 kB).

To use this scale, suppose a length of 24 miles 5 furlongs is required. Place one leg of the dividers upon the point in which the fourth diagonal intersects the fifth parallel, and extend the other to the point in which the primary division marked 20 intersects the same parallel. In like manner, if the distance required be 33 miles 3 furlongs, it must be taken from the intersection of the third diagonal with the third parallel, to the intersection of the primary division marked 30 with the same parallel.

To use this scale, let's say you need a length of 24 miles and 5 furlongs. Place one leg of the dividers on the point where the fourth diagonal meets the fifth parallel, and stretch the other leg to the point where the primary division marked 20 intersects the same parallel. Similarly, if you need a distance of 33 miles and 3 furlongs, it should be taken from the intersection of the third diagonal with the third parallel, to the intersection of the primary division marked 30 with that same parallel.

It is obvious that if a scale of feet showing inches diagonally be required, twelve equidistant parallel lines must be drawn instead of eight as in the foregoing example where furlongs are required. The diagonal scale possesses the important advantages of accuracy and distinctness of division which render it very suitable as a scale of construction. Another practical advantage is that it is less rapidly defaced by use than the other kinds, in consequence of the measurements being taken on so many different lines.

It’s clear that if you need a scale that shows inches diagonally, you should draw twelve evenly spaced parallel lines instead of eight, like in the previous example where furlongs were needed. The diagonal scale has the key benefits of being accurate and having clear divisions, making it great for construction purposes. Another practical benefit is that it doesn't wear out as quickly as other types because the measurements are taken across multiple lines.

The construction of the vernier scale is similar to that of the[76] graduated arcs of surveying and astronomical instruments. The principle of the vernier is as follows. If a line containing n units of measurement be divided into n equal parts, each part will, of course, represent one unit; and if a line containing n + 1 of these units be also divided into n parts, each part will be equal to n + 1n units; and the difference between one division of the latter and one of the former will be x + 1n - 1 = 1n of the original unit. Similarly, the difference between two divisions of the one and two of the other will be 2n of a unit, between three of the one and three of the other, 3n, and so on. Hence, to obtain a length of xn of a unit, we have only to make a division on one scale coincide with one on the other scale; the space between the two corresponding xth divisions from this on both scales will be the required length of 2n of a unit. The same reasoning will evidently hold good if a length equal to n - 1 be taken.

The construction of the vernier scale is similar to that of the[76] graduated arcs used in surveying and astronomical instruments. The principle of the vernier works like this: if you divide a line that has n units of measurement into n equal parts, each part will represent one unit. If you take a line that has n + 1 of these units and divide it into n parts, each part will equal n + 1n units; the difference between one division of the first line and one of the second line will be x + 1n - 1 = 1n of the original unit. Similarly, the difference between two divisions of the first line and two of the second will be 2n of a unit, three from the first and three from the second will be 3n, and so forth. Therefore, to get a length of xn of a unit, you just need to make one division on one scale line up with a division on the other scale; the space between the two corresponding xth divisions on both scales will be the required length of 2n of a unit. The same logic will clearly apply if you take a length equal to n - 1.

Fig. 81.

Fig. 81.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (23 KB).

To show how the foregoing principle is applied in practice, we will take an example. It is required to construct a scale of 1100 to show feet and tenths of a foot. Construct a scale in the ordinary way, and subdivide it throughout its whole length, as shown in Fig. 81; then each division will show one foot. Above the first primary division, draw a line parallel to the scale and terminating at the zero point. From the zero point, set off on this line towards the left a distance equal to eleven subdivisions, and divide this distance into ten equal parts. Now, as eleven divisions of the plain scale have been divided into ten equal parts on the vernier, each division on the latter will represent 1110 = 1·1 of that on the former; and as the divisions of the plain scale represent feet, those of the vernier will represent 1·1 foot. Consequently, the distances from the zero of the scale to the successive divisions[77] on the vernier are 1·1, 2·2, 3·3, 4·4, 5·5, 6·6, 7·7, 8·8, 9·9, and 11 feet. It will be seen that the divisions of the two scales are made to coincide at the zero point.

To demonstrate how the principle mentioned earlier is applied in practice, let’s use an example. We need to create a scale of 1100 to show feet and tenths of a foot. Construct the scale in the usual way and divide it evenly along its entire length, as shown in Fig. 81; then each division will represent one foot. Above the first main division, draw a line parallel to the scale that ends at the zero point. From the zero point, measure a distance to the left equal to eleven subdivisions, and split that distance into ten equal parts. Now, since eleven divisions of the plain scale have been divided into ten equal sections on the vernier, each division on the vernier will represent 1110 = 1.1 of what’s on the plain scale; and since the divisions of the plain scale represent feet, those of the vernier will represent 1.1 feet. Therefore, the distances from the zero point of the scale to the successive divisions[77] on the vernier are 1.1, 2.2, 3.3, 4.4, 5.5, 6.6, 7.7, 8.8, 9.9, and 11 feet. You will notice that the divisions of the two scales align at the zero point.

The mode of using this scale will be seen from the following example. Let it be required to take off a distance of 26·7 feet. From zero to the 7th division of the vernier is, as we have seen, 7·7 feet. Therefore, to ascertain how far to the right of zero we must go to obtain the distance of 26·7 feet, we must subtract 7·7 from that distance, which gives 19. Thus to take off the distance, one leg of the dividers must be placed on the 7th division of the vernier, and the other on the 19th division of the plain scale. If the distance to be taken were 27·6 feet, one leg of the dividers would have to be placed on the 6th division of the vernier, and the other on the (27·6) - (6·6) = 21st division of the plain scale.

The way to use this scale can be understood through the following example. Suppose we need to measure a distance of 26.7 feet. From zero to the 7th division of the vernier is, as noted, 7.7 feet. To figure out how far to the right of zero we need to go to get the distance of 26.7 feet, we subtract 7.7 from that distance, which gives us 19. So, to measure the distance, one leg of the dividers should be placed on the 7th division of the vernier, and the other on the 19th division of the plain scale. If the distance to measure were 27.6 feet, one leg of the dividers would need to be placed on the 6th division of the vernier, and the other on the (27.6) - (6.6) = 21st division of the plain scale.

To construct a scale to show feet and inches, make the vernier equal to thirteen divisions of the plain scale and divide it into twelve equal parts. Each of these divisions will then represent 1312 = 1112 of a foot.

To create a scale that shows feet and inches, set the vernier equal to thirteen divisions of the main scale and split it into twelve equal parts. Each of these divisions will represent 1312 = 1112 of a foot.

Scales of construction may be purchased upon box-wood or ivory, but where great accuracy is important, it is best to lay down the scale upon some part of the drawing, as in such a case it expands and contracts with the drawing under the influence of moisture.

Scales for construction can be bought in boxwood or ivory, but when precision is crucial, it's better to place the scale directly on a section of the drawing since it will expand and contract with the drawing due to moisture.

Examples of scales of distances will be found on Plates 8 and 9.

Examples of distance scales can be found on Plates 8 and 9.


Section III.—Plotting.

The transference of the measurements determined by the survey from the field-book to the paper is termed plotting. The operations of plotting are very simple, and the ability to perform them properly may be acquired with a little practice. But their due performance demands the same extreme care and attention as that of the operations in the field, for it is obvious that the precautions taken to ensure accuracy in the latter may be rendered nugatory by inaccurate[78] plotting. The angular instrument used in plotting is the protractor, and to ensure correct results this instrument must be accurately divided. When, however, the survey has been made without the aid of an angular instrument, the protractor is not required in laying down the results. In such a case, which frequently occurs in surveys of small extent, the lines, having all been chained and registered in the field-book, are laid down directly from the scale by means of an ordinary straight-edge and a pair of compasses. The several methods of plotting and the various operations involved have now to be considered.

The process of transferring the measurements taken during a survey from the field notebook to paper is called plotting. The steps involved in plotting are quite straightforward, and with a bit of practice, anyone can learn to do them well. However, executing this task correctly requires as much care and focus as the fieldwork itself, since any precautions taken to ensure accuracy during the survey can be wasted if plotting is done inaccurately. The tool used for plotting angles is the protractor, which must be precisely marked to ensure accurate results. If the survey was done without an angle measuring tool, however, a protractor isn't needed to lay down the results. In such cases, which often happen in smaller surveys, the lines, having been measured and recorded in the field notebook, are drawn directly from the scale using a regular straightedge and a pair of compasses. Now, we need to look at the different methods of plotting and the various steps involved.

Reference Lines and Points.

—The lines chained over in a survey and recorded in the field-book are not usually the actual lines existing on the ground, but imaginary straight lines chosen for the purpose of referring other lines and points to them. They are, therefore, appropriately termed reference lines, and all points situate in them to which other lines are referred, in other words, all points in a reference line in which other reference lines intersect it, are termed reference points. Reference lines are generally made to form triangles for facility of computation, and these triangles enclose the area to be surveyed. But to determine the details included within them, it is necessary to form other and smaller triangles within the larger ones first laid down. The latter are, therefore, distinguished as Primary and the former as Secondary triangles, and the lines of which they are composed are called primary and secondary reference lines.

—The lines marked in a survey and recorded in the field notebook are typically not the actual lines on the ground, but rather imaginary straight lines selected to help reference other lines and points. They are thus properly called reference lines, and all points situated on them to which other lines are referenced, in other words, all points on a reference line where other reference lines intersect it, are called reference points. Reference lines are usually arranged to form triangles for easier calculations, and these triangles outline the area to be surveyed. However, to identify the details within them, it’s necessary to create additional smaller triangles inside the larger ones initially established. The larger ones are referred to as Primary triangles and the smaller ones as Secondary triangles, and the lines that compose them are known as primary and secondary reference lines.

Plotted Points.

—In laying down a line of definite length upon paper, the positions of its extremities are determined and marked by pencil dots; such dots, or rather the points indicated by such dots, are termed plotted points. The line is drawn by joining the plotted points.

—When you draw a straight line of a specific length on paper, you mark the ends with pencil dots. These dots, or the points they represent, are called plotted points. The line is created by connecting the plotted points.

To Plot Reference Lines and Points.

—To plot a reference line of a given length when the position of neither of its extremities is given, a light dot must be made upon the paper in a convenient part to indicate the position of one extremity. The pencil-point mark should be as light and well defined as possible, and hence it is essential that the pencil used should be hard, and always kept pared to a fine[79] conical point. The scale must then be applied, in the direction of the line to be drawn, with its zero point coincident with the plotted point. The scale should be lightly but firmly held in this position with the left hand. The distance of the other extremity of the line must then be found upon the scale, and the eye placed directly over the line of the graduation; this is necessary to the correct placing of the point, and it is well to train the eye to trace accurately the prolongation of the line of graduation upon the paper. A dot must be placed in the prolongation of this line and close to the edge of the scale, to mark the position of the other extremity. The reference line is then to be drawn between these two plotted points with a sharp chisel-pointed pencil. Reference lines, like reference points, should be well defined, but drawn as fine and light as possible. The degree of fineness and lightness should be such that when the detail is finely but firmly outlined, the reference lines and points may not be visible, except on a close inspection of the surface.

—To plot a reference line of a certain length when the positions of both ends aren't known, first make a light dot on the paper in a convenient spot to indicate one end. The mark from the pencil should be as light and precise as possible, so it’s important to use a hard pencil and keep it sharpened to a fine conical point. Next, place the scale along the direction of the line you want to draw, making sure the zero point lines up with the dot you made. Hold the scale gently but firmly in this spot with your left hand. Then, locate the other end of the line on the scale and position your eye directly above the graduation line; this helps ensure you place the point accurately. It's good to practice guiding your eye to extend the graduation line onto the paper. Place a dot in line with this extension, close to the edge of the scale, to mark the location of the other end. Finally, draw the reference line between these two marked points using a sharp chisel-pointed pencil. Reference lines, similar to reference points, should be clearly defined but drawn as fine and light as possible. The thickness and lightness should be such that when you outline the details firmly and finely, the reference lines and points are barely visible unless you closely inspect the surface.

To plot secondary reference lines, as, for example, a number of offset lines, apply the scale so that its edge may be parallel to and almost over the pencil trace of the primary line and its zero point coincident with the point at which the line begins. Care must always be taken to place the zero of the scale at the beginning of the line, and not at the end of it. At the distances recorded in the field-book as those at which the offsets were taken, plot upon the line, in the manner described above, the points indicating the extremities of the offset lines. All other points, such as stations and intersection of fences, roads, and streams, should be plotted at the same time. Around all stations, a light, hand-drawn circle should be placed, and intersections marked by small cross lines. This being done, place the offset scale so that the zero may coincide with the plotted point in the reference line and the edge be perpendicular to the line. To bring the edge into this position, the end of the scale should be placed parallel to the reference line; this is, of course, assuming the scale to be perfectly rectangular, as it ought to be. The other extremities of the lines may then be plotted in the same manner as those of the primary lines.

To create secondary reference lines, like a set of offset lines, position the scale so that its edge is parallel to the pencil mark of the primary line and its zero point lines up with where the line starts. Always make sure to place the zero of the scale at the beginning of the line, not the end. At the distances noted in the field-book where the offsets were taken, plot the points on the line, as described above, to indicate the ends of the offset lines. All other points, such as stations and the intersections of fences, roads, and streams, should be plotted at the same time. Draw a light circle around all stations and use small cross lines for intersections. Once that’s done, position the offset scale so the zero aligns with the plotted point on the reference line and the edge is perpendicular to that line. To get the edge in this position, the end of the scale should be parallel to the reference line, assuming the scale is perfectly rectangular, as it should be. You can then plot the other ends of the lines the same way as those of the primary lines.

[80]

[80]

To illustrate the foregoing remarks, let it be required to plot the following portion of a field-book.

To illustrate the above comments, let's plot the following part of a field-book.

  00   1346 or 000 Line 1.
75 1170
96 1000
05 650
66 400
00 000
Line 3. From 1946 last.
  arrow  
  1946 00    
1420 88
1200 144
1000 110
600 75
520 50
000 00
Line 2. From 2504 last.
  arrow  
  2504 00    
2000 65
1790 95
1610 115
1440 87
1220 110
1000  
850 28
420 100
Line 1.   000 00 or 1346
Line 3.
Begin at south corner and range N.

Having laid down in a convenient part of the paper the beginning of Line 1, place the edge of the scale so that the zero may coincide with the plotted point and the edge be parallel to one of the meridians. Holding the scale firmly in this position, plot the distance 2504 links, and join the plotted points. Then, without removing the scale, plot upon this reference line the distances at which the secondary or offset lines were taken, that is at 420, 850, 1220, 1440, 1610, 1790, and 2000 links. In this case we have nothing but offsets; had there been stations or intersections of fences, roads, or streams, these would have had to be plotted at the same time, and distinguished by an appropriate mark. Line 2 begins at the end of Line 1, and returns on the left at an acute angle, as indicated by the arrow in the field-book. But as the magnitude of this angle is not known, the survey having been taken with the chain alone, the exact direction of Line 2 must be ascertained in the following manner. Take the length of the line in the compasses, and with this distance as a radius, strike an arc from the end of Line 1. Also with the length of Line 3 as a radius, strike an arc from the beginning of Line 1, at which point Line 3 closes, intersecting the former. The point of intersection will be the end of[81] Line 2. Join this point to the end of Line 1, and plot the offset reference points upon this line in the manner already described for Line 1. Line 3 begins at the end of Line 2, and terminates at the beginning of Line 1; hence both extremities being determined, we have only to join these points, and to plot the offset reference points as before. Had a split line been taken for the sake of accuracy from the angle A C B to the base Line 1, the intersection of this line should have been plotted upon Line 1, and the position of the end of Line 2 found by striking an arc from this point also with a radius equal to the length of the split line. If the distances have been correctly measured in the field and correctly taken from the scale, the three arcs will intersect at the same point. If they do not so intersect, the error must be noted in an error-sheet, and corrected in the field before proceeding further. It may be remarked here that on account of the irregularities of the surface chained over, all measured lines are liable to be recorded a little too long. One link in ten chains may be allowed for this source of error. Assuming, however, that the primary reference lines “close” properly, the offset lines may be plotted in the manner already described, and the detail or boundary lines drawn in, which in the present instance are hedges. Fig. 82 shows the survey as laid down in the foregoing notes.

Having marked the start of Line 1 in a convenient spot on the paper, position the edge of the scale so that the zero aligns with the plotted point and the edge is parallel to one of the meridians. Keep the scale steady in this position, plot a distance of 2504 links, and connect the plotted points. Then, without moving the scale, plot the distances for the secondary or offset lines at 420, 850, 1220, 1440, 1610, 1790, and 2000 links along this reference line. In this case, we only have offsets; if there were stations or intersections of fences, roads, or streams, these should also be plotted at the same time and marked appropriately. Line 2 starts at the end of Line 1 and angles back to the left, as indicated by the arrow in the field-book. However, since we don't know the exact angle size because the survey was done using only a chain, we need to find the direction of Line 2 in the following way. Measure the length of the line with the compasses, and using this distance as a radius, draw an arc from the end of Line 1. Also, using the length of Line 3 as a radius, draw an arc from the start of Line 1, where Line 3 closes and intersects the previous arc. The intersection point will be the end of Line 2. Connect this point to the end of Line 1 and plot the offset reference points on this line as previously described for Line 1. Line 3 starts at the end of Line 2 and ends at the beginning of Line 1; thus, with both ends determined, we just need to connect these points and plot the offset reference points as before. If an accurate split line was taken from angle ACB to base Line 1, the intersection of this line should be plotted on Line 1, and the position of the end of Line 2 should be found by drawing an arc from this point with a radius equal to the length of the split line. If the distances have been measured correctly in the field and taken accurately from the scale, the three arcs should intersect at the same point. If they do not intersect, the error must be recorded on an error sheet and corrected in the field before moving on. It should be noted that due to the irregularities of the surface measured, all lines recorded can be a little too long, allowing for one link of error in every ten chains. Assuming the primary reference lines close correctly, the offset lines can be plotted as already described, and the detail or boundary lines, which in this case are hedges, can be drawn in. Fig. 82 shows the survey as outlined in the notes above.

When the survey has been made with the aid of an angular instrument, the method of plotting the primary reference lines differs somewhat from the foregoing. In this case, the paper should be first covered with a number of parallel straight lines ruled about an inch and a half apart to represent magnetic meridians. The first station may then be marked upon one of these meridians in a convenient part of the paper. To lay down the first reference line, apply the protractor to this meridian with its centre point coincident with the plotted point, and from the bearing recorded in the field-book, lay off the given angle. Join the two plotted points and produce the line indefinitely; and upon this line lay off a distance equal to the length of the measured line. The second reference line must be drawn in the same manner, from the end of the first, by laying off from that point[82] the recorded angle. But as the end of the first line will probably not fall upon a meridian, the protractor will have to be moved up to the point by means of a parallel ruler adjusted to the nearest meridian. A more convenient and a more accurate method, however, is to make the left of the drawing represent the north while plotting, and to use the T-square instead of the parallel ruler. All subsequent lines are plotted in the same way. Instead of covering the paper with meridians before commencing to plot, it may, in some cases, be found more convenient to draw with the set and T squares a short meridian through the point as required.

When the survey has been completed with an angular instrument, the way to plot the primary reference lines is a bit different from what was described earlier. First, the paper should be filled with several parallel straight lines drawn about an inch and a half apart to represent magnetic meridians. You can then mark the first station on one of these meridians in a convenient spot on the paper. To create the first reference line, place the protractor on this meridian so that its center point aligns with the plotted point, and from the bearing recorded in the field notebook, measure out the specified angle. Connect the two plotted points and extend the line indefinitely; then from this line, measure out a distance equal to the length of the line that was measured. The second reference line should be drawn in the same way, starting from the end of the first line by measuring the recorded angle from that point. However, since the end of the first line may not land on a meridian, the protractor will need to be moved up to that point using a parallel ruler adjusted to the nearest meridian. A more convenient and accurate method is to make the left side of the drawing represent north while plotting, and to use the T-square instead of the parallel ruler. All subsequent lines are plotted in the same manner. Instead of filling the paper with meridians before you start plotting, it might sometimes be more convenient to draw a short meridian through the point using the set and T squares as needed.

Fig. 82.

Fig. 82.

To lay down Fig. 82 in this manner, having fixed the first station A, the length of the first primary reference line A B may be laid off upon the meridian, because in this case the bearing being due north, the reference line will[83] be coincident with the meridian. This done, the protractor is to be placed over the plotted point B and the second bearing laid down. Having plotted the length of this line in the point C, the third reference line C A will be determined both in length and direction by the plotted points C A, which should be joined and the line measured to ascertain whether its length corresponds with the measured distance. If these do not correspond, the angle must be replotted and the lengths laid off anew to discover the source of the error. Assuming, however, that the lines close properly, the offsets and other secondary points may be next plotted in the manner previously described.

To lay down Fig. 82 this way, having set the first point A, the length of the first main reference line A B can be marked along the meridian, since in this case, the direction is straight north, meaning the reference line will[83] align with the meridian. Once that's done, place the protractor over the marked point B and draw the second angle. After plotting the length of this line at point C, the third reference line C A will be established in both length and direction using the plotted points C A. These should be connected, and the line measured to check if its length matches the measured distance. If they don’t match, the angle needs to be redrawn, and the lengths adjusted again to identify where the mistake is. However, assuming the lines fit correctly, the offsets and other secondary points can then be plotted as described earlier.

Angles may be more accurately laid down by means of a table of natural sines and cosines and a linear scale than by means of a protractor. This is especially true when the angles are subtended by long lines, as, for example, lines of 3, 4, and even 6 feet. In such cases, a protractor is of little use. This mode of laying down angles is also convenient in some cases where angles have been taken, but some of the sides not measured. In using the table, it must be remembered that the radius of the sines and cosines is taken as unity; therefore, to find the sine and cosine for any other radius, the sine and cosine in the tables must be multiplied by that radius. To lay down the angle A B C in Fig. 82, the reduced cosine of the angle should be plotted from B in the point a, according to some scale. The scale length of the reduced sine should then be scribed from a, and the scale length of the radius scribed from B. A line drawn from B through the point of intersection of the scribes will lay down the angle corresponding to the sine and cosine in the table. Suppose the radius chosen to be 5 chains, the angle being 32° 30′. The cosine of 32° 30′ is ·8434, which multiplied by 5, the assumed radius, = 4·2170. Lay off this distance from B on the base A B. The sine of 32° 30′ is ·5373, which multiplied by 5, = 2·6865. From the point a, which is distant 4·2170 chains from B, with a radius equal to 2·6865 chains, describe an arc; and from the point B, with a radius equal to 5 chains, describe another arc. From B draw a line through the intersection of these arcs, and lay off upon it the measured length of 1946 links as recorded in the field-book.

Angles can be more accurately measured using a table of natural sines and cosines along with a linear scale instead of a protractor. This is especially true for angles formed by long lines, like those that are 3, 4, or even 6 feet long. In such cases, a protractor isn't very helpful. This method of measuring angles is also useful when angles have been determined but some sides haven't been measured. When using the table, keep in mind that the radius for sines and cosines is considered to be one; therefore, to find the sine and cosine for any other radius, you need to multiply the sine and cosine in the tables by that radius. To measure angle A B C in Fig. 82, plot the reduced cosine of the angle from point B at position a, according to a certain scale. Then, mark the scale length of the reduced sine from a, and the scale length of the radius from B. A line drawn from B through the intersection of the marks will create the angle corresponding to the sine and cosine in the table. For example, if you choose a radius of 5 chains and the angle is 32° 30′, the cosine of 32° 30′ is ·8434, which when multiplied by 5 (the chosen radius) equals 4·2170. Measure this distance from B on the line A B. The sine of 32° 30′ is ·5373, which multiplied by 5 equals 2·6865. From point a, which is 4·2170 chains away from B, draw an arc with a radius of 2·6865 chains; then from point B, draw another arc with a radius of 5 chains. Draw a line from B through the intersection of these arcs and measure 1946 links along it as recorded in the field book.

[84]

[84]

If only the length of the base A B and the magnitudes of the angles A B C and B A C were given, the lengths of the sides B C and A C would have to be calculated by trigonometrical formulæ. This method of calculating the lengths of the sides of triangles and plotting them with the beam compasses, like chained triangles, is the most accurate for laying down the great or primary triangles of a survey.

If only the length of the base AB and the sizes of the angles ABC and BAC were provided, the lengths of the sides BC and AC would need to be calculated using trigonometric formulas. This method of calculating the lengths of triangle sides and plotting them with beam compasses, similar to chained triangles, is the most precise for setting out the large or primary triangles in a survey.

When it is required to plot according to this principle a solitary angle, as, for example, that between a station line and the meridian, a circle should be drawn with as large a radius as practicable round the station at which the angle is to be laid down. The distance between the points at which the two lines enclosing the angle cut that circle is then found by multiplying the radius by the chord of the angle, that is, by twice the sine of half the angle.

When you need to plot a single angle, like the one between a station line and the meridian, draw a circle with the largest radius possible around the station where you're placing the angle. Then, to find the distance between the points where the two lines that form the angle intersect that circle, multiply the radius by the chord of the angle, which is twice the sine of half the angle.

It sometimes happens, particularly in extensive surveys, that all the angular points of some triangles cannot be plotted upon the same sheet of paper. In such cases, the plot of the outlying points and the sides of the triangles may be laid down in the following manner. Plot the intersected triangles independently and trace them on tracing paper. Then, having drawn a fine line upon both sheets to represent the sheet edge, lay the points on the trace corresponding to those already plotted on the first sheet down upon, and make them to coincide with, the latter. Secure the trace in this position and trace the sheet edge line upon it. The intersected lines may now be plotted on the fair sheet with a pricker at points outside the sheet edge line. Next apply the trace to the second sheet and make the sheet edge lines coincide. Having secured the trace in this position, the points and the intersected lines on this second sheet may be plotted upon the fair paper by means of the pricker.

It sometimes happens, especially in large surveys, that all the corner points of some triangles can't be plotted on the same sheet of paper. In these situations, the points outside and the sides of the triangles can be laid out as follows. Plot the intersected triangles separately and trace them on tracing paper. Then, draw a fine line on both sheets to represent the edge of the paper, place the points on the trace that correspond to those already plotted on the first sheet, and align them with the latter. Secure the trace in this position and trace the edge line on it. The intersected lines can now be plotted on the main sheet with a pricker at points outside the edge line. Next, align the trace with the second sheet so the edge lines match. Once the trace is secured in this position, you can plot the points and intersected lines on this second sheet onto the main paper using the pricker.

To Plot Traverse Reference Lines.

—In plotting a traverse survey in which the angles have been measured from a fixed line of direction, the magnetic meridian, the direction of the lines may be all laid down at the first angular point. An example will best show the method employed in this case. It is required to lay down the traverse shown in Fig. 83.

—In planning a traverse survey where the angles are measured from a set line of direction, the magnetic meridian, the direction of the lines can all be established at the first angular point. An example will clearly demonstrate the method used in this case. It is necessary to outline the traverse shown in Fig. 83.

[85]

[85]

Fig. 83.

Fig. 83.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (75 kB).

In a convenient part of the paper draw the straight line N S to represent the magnetic meridian, and plot upon it the first station A. Set the protractor with its centre accurately placed over this point and its 360th and 180th divisions coinciding with the meridian. Holding the instrument securely in this position, lay off around it all the bearings as entered in the field-book, numbering them in the order in which they were taken. Against each of these numbers it is well to place the page of the field-book on which the measurement of the angle and the survey of the line are entered. The plotting must now be commenced by laying down the first line through the first bearing[86] and determining its length from the recorded measurements. The direction of the second line has next to be transferred from the first station A to the extremity of the first line, or the second station B. This is accomplished by means of the parallel ruler, by placing the edge of the ruler through the plotted point and the point marked as bearing 2, and extending it till the same edge intersects the point B. A line is then to be drawn from this point and its length laid off from the field-book as before. The direction of the third line will then be transferred from the first angular point to the end of the second line, or station C, in the same manner. This will be continued for all the lines in the traverse, and if all the measurements have been correctly laid down, not only will the last line pass through the point A, but it will be of the same length as the chained line. Also the bearings taken from A to E and H will pass through these latter stations. These proof line bearings should be laid down at the same time as the reference line bearings, from which they should be distinguished by some sign. The directions of the reference lines should be consecutively transferred, and the length of each line should be plotted in its proper place before the direction of the next is transferred. To ensure the work closing properly, great care must be taken to plot the points accurately and to draw the pencil lines fine.

In a convenient area of the paper, draw the straight line N S to represent the magnetic meridian, and mark the first station A on it. Position the protractor with its center directly over this point, aligning its 360 and 180 degree divisions with the meridian. Hold the instrument steady in this position and plot all the bearings recorded in the field book around it, numbering them in the order they were taken. Next to each number, it's helpful to note the page of the field-book where the angle measurement and line survey are listed. Begin plotting by drawing the first line based on the first bearing[86] and determine its length from the recorded measurements. The direction of the second line must then be transferred from the first station A to the end of the first line, or the second station B. This is done using a parallel ruler by placing the edge of the ruler through the plotted point and the point marked as bearing 2, extending it until the same edge hits point B. Next, draw a line from this point and measure its length from the field book as before. The direction of the third line will then be transferred from the first angular point to the end of the second line, or station C, in the same way. This process will continue for all the lines in the traverse, and if all measurements have been accurately plotted, the last line will not only pass through point A but will also match the length of the chained line. Additionally, the bearings taken from A to E and H will go through those latter stations. These proof line bearings should be plotted at the same time as the reference line bearings but distinguished by a specific sign. The directions of the reference lines should be transferred consecutively, and the length of each line should be plotted correctly before transferring the direction of the next. To ensure the work closes properly, it’s essential to plot the points accurately and draw the pencil lines finely.

Fig. 84.

Fig. 84.

The degree of accuracy to be attained will depend in a great measure upon the extent of the traverse. With long lines the difficulties increase, and with a great number of angles the chances of error are multiplied. If the angles are carefully taken, it is probable that seconds have been read off in several instances, and these if neglected, especially upon long chain lines, may lead to an error of some importance. Also when the lines are long, the parallel ruler becomes practically useless, and some other system has to be adopted. One way of overcoming these difficulties is to draw a parallel to the first meridian through every third or fourth angle; in such a case, great care must be observed in drawing the parallels. A more easily practicable method, however, is to use the T-square in the manner already described. If the left-hand edge of the drawing board be made the north, the blade will determine meridional lines, and by[87] laying the straight side of a semicircular protractor against the edge of the blade, its zero will be adjusted to the fixed line of direction. The first bearing having been laid down, the line is drawn and made the scale length of the chain line; the blade of the square is then pushed to the station thus found, and the next bearing set off. This operation is repeated until all the lines have been laid down. If the work closes properly, the plotting of the secondary lines may be proceeded with.

The level of accuracy achieved will largely depend on the length of the traverse. With longer lines, challenges increase, and with more angles, the chances of error multiply. If the angles are taken carefully, it's likely that seconds have been noted in several cases, and if overlooked, especially on long chain lines, this could lead to significant errors. Additionally, for long lines, the parallel ruler becomes almost useless, requiring a different method. One way to tackle these challenges is to draw a parallel to the first meridian through every third or fourth angle; in this case, great care must be taken when drawing the parallels. However, a more straightforward method is to use the T-square as previously described. If the left edge of the drawing board is set as north, the blade will establish meridional lines. By placing the straight side of a semicircular protractor against the edge of the blade, its zero can be aligned with the fixed direction line. After setting down the first bearing, the line is drawn and made to the scale length of the chain line; then the blade of the square is pushed to the station found, and the next bearing is set off. This process is repeated until all lines are laid down. If the work closes correctly, plotting the secondary lines can proceed.

The most accurate method of plotting a traverse is by rectangular co-ordinates, or, as it is usually termed, Northings, Southings, Eastings, and Westings, because the position of each station is plotted independently, and is not affected by the errors committed in plotting previous stations. This method consists in assuming two fixed lines or axes crossing each other at right angles at a fixed point, computing the perpendicular distances or co-ordinates of each station from those two axes, and plotting the position of each station by means of the T and set squares and a linear scale. The meridian is usually made to represent one of the axes, and in this case the co-ordinates parallel to one axis will be the distances of the stations to the north or south of the fixed point, and those parallel to the other axis will be their distances to the east or west of the same point. Let N S, Fig. 84, represent the meridian, and A B the first bearing taken, and the first line measured. The angle in this case is N A B = θ. If θ is an acute angle, the second station B is to the north of the first station A; if it is an obtuse angle, B is to the south of A. If the angle θ lies to the right of the meridian, B is to the east of A; if to the left, to the west. Thus it will be seen that if the northernly and easternly directions are considered positive, the southernly and westernly directions will be negative. From the foregoing it is manifest that the co-ordinates of B are as follows:—

The best way to plot a traverse is by using rectangular coordinates, commonly known as Northings, Southings, Eastings, and Westings. This method allows you to plot each station independently, without being affected by any errors made when plotting earlier stations. It involves establishing two fixed lines or axes that intersect at right angles at a fixed point, calculating the perpendicular distances from these axes for each station, and then plotting each station's position using a T and set squares along with a linear scale. Usually, one of the axes represents the meridian. In this setup, the distances north or south from the fixed point will be on one axis, while the distances east or west will be on the other axis. Let N S, Fig. 84, represent the meridian, and A B be the first bearing taken and the first line measured. In this case, the angle N A B = θ. If θ is an acute angle, the second station B is north of the first station A; if it is an obtuse angle, B is south of A. If angle θ is to the right of the meridian, B is east of A; if to the left, then it’s west. So, if we consider north and east as positive directions, south and west will be negative. From the above, it’s clear that the coordinates of B are as follows:—

Northing A a = b B (or if negative, southing) = A B × cos. θ.
Easting A b = a B (or if negative, westing) = A B × sin. θ.

Northing A a = b B (or if negative, it's southing) = A B × cos. θ.
Easting A b = a B (or if negative, it's westing) = A B × sin. θ.

[88]

[88]

To plot the point B, draw through the point A, with the aid of the T-square, a horizontal line. Multiply the chained length of the line A B by the sine of the angle N A B as entered in the field-book, and set off this distance along the horizontal line. From the point thus determined, erect, with the aid of the set square, a perpendicular, which will be parallel to the meridian. Multiply the chained length of A B by the cosine of the angle N A B, and set off this distance along the perpendicular line. The point thus determined will be the position of the second station B, which may then be joined to A by a straight line.

To plot point B, draw a horizontal line through point A using the T-square. Multiply the measured length of line A B by the sine of angle N A B as recorded in the field book, and mark that distance along the horizontal line. From this point, use the set square to draw a perpendicular line that runs parallel to the meridian. Next, multiply the measured length of A B by the cosine of angle N A B, and mark that distance along the perpendicular line. The point you find will be the location of the second station B, which can then be connected to A with a straight line.

Fig. 85.

Fig. 85.

The mode of laying down the survey in Fig. 85 will now be obvious. Having determined the position of the second station B in the manner just described, draw a horizontal line through B and determine the third station C in the same way. The fourth station D being to the left of the meridian passing through C, c d is a westing and is to be considered as negative. Therefore the horizontal line through C must be drawn to the left of that station, and the station D determined in the same manner as the preceding stations.

The way to lay out the survey in Fig. 85 is now clear. After figuring out the position of the second station B as described, draw a horizontal line through B and find the third station C in the same way. Since the fourth station D is to the left of the meridian running through C, c d is a westing and should be considered negative. So, the horizontal line through C must be drawn to the left of that station, and station D should be determined just like the previous stations.

The results of all these calculations should be entered in a book,[89] in four columns, for northings, southings, eastings and westings respectively. Also in four other columns should be entered the total northing or southing, and easting or westing, of each station from the first station, computed by adding all the successive northings and subtracting the southings made in traversing to the station, the result being a northing if positive, and a southing if negative. The same treatment is applied to the eastings and westings. This affords a means of testing the accuracy of the work. It is also obvious that the position of the last or any station may be determined by this means without plotting the intermediate stations.

The results of all these calculations should be recorded in a book,[89] in four columns for northings, southings, eastings, and westings respectively. Additionally, another four columns should show the total northing or southing, and easting or westing, of each station from the first station, calculated by adding all the northings and subtracting the southings made while moving to the station. The result will be a northing if positive and a southing if negative. The same method applies to the eastings and westings. This provides a way to check the accuracy of the work. It's also clear that the position of the last or any station can be determined this way without plotting the intermediate stations.

Let it be observed that both θ and sin. θ are positive or negative according as that angle lies to the east or to the west of the meridian; and that the cosines of obtuse angles are negative.

Let it be noted that both θ and sin. θ are positive or negative depending on whether the angle is east or west of the meridian; and that the cosines of obtuse angles are negative.

To Plot Detail.

—By “detail” is meant outlines or objects whether natural or artificial, such as fences, walls, rivers, canals, roads, lakes, water margins, beach marks, seas, or imaginary boundary lines. In plotting from the entries of measurements for detail, these measurements should be laid down upon the paper in the order and manner indicated in the field-book. The mode of plotting the perpendicular reference lines by means of which the position of the detail is fixed has already been fully described and illustrated. The proper connections for detail, as shown by the field-book, should be made by drawing a firm pencil line through the detail points with the aid of an offset scale adjusted successively to the adjacent points. All such connections should be clearly and elegantly made. When all boundaries, roads, and streams have been drawn and inked in, tracings should be taken in small portions of all that has been laid down for the use of the “examiner.” The duties of the examiner are to make on the ground the necessary corrections for omissions and detail in error; to give, in position and character, woods, water, marsh, commons, vegetable and geological features, and permanent artificial structures; and to furnish the descriptive names of places and things, or any other desirable information. The topographical character of mountains, marshes, bogs, rough pasture, woods and water, should be drawn in character[90] on trace and tinted. If required, hill sketching should also be supplied on the examiner’s trace. On being returned to the office, the plotter should replot from the field notes the detail corrected, and transfer the details from the trace to the map.

—By “detail” we mean outlines or objects, whether natural or man-made, like fences, walls, rivers, canals, roads, lakes, shorelines, seas, or imaginary boundary lines. When plotting from the recorded measurements for detail, these measurements should be laid out on the paper in the order and manner shown in the field notebook. The method for plotting the vertical reference lines that determine the position of the detail has already been fully described and illustrated. The proper connections for detail, as indicated in the field notebook, should be made by drawing a solid pencil line through the detail points with the help of an offset scale adjusted to the adjacent points. All connections should be clear and well-made. Once all boundaries, roads, and streams have been drawn and inked in, take tracings in small sections of everything that has been laid out for the use of the "examiner." The examiner's responsibilities include making necessary corrections on site for omissions and errors, positioning and characterizing woods, water, marshes, commons, and both plant and geological features, as well as providing the names of places and anything else that's needed. The topographical features of mountains, marshes, bogs, rough pastures, woods, and water should be drawn in character at[90] on tracing paper and tinted. If needed, hill sketching should also be provided on the examiner's tracing. When returned to the office, the plotter should replot the corrected detail from the field notes and transfer the details from the trace to the map.

To Plot Contours.

—The student who has made himself familiar with the methods of laying down angles, and plotting reference lines and points, will find no difficulty in laying down contour traces. When the contour points have been surveyed with the chain, the contour is obtained by drawing a free line of feature through the plotted points. But when the contour points have been surveyed by measuring magnetic angles to known points, such angles must be laid down at these points, and produced to meet in the contour point. The drawing of contours differs from the drawing of ordinary detail insomuch as each contour point is shown by a small dot, and each carrying point by a similar dot surrounded by a small hand-drawn circle to distinguish it. The former should be so plotted as to be distinguishable in the trace or contour line, which should be readily traceable, but not conspicuous. The line joining adjacent points should be true lines of feature. Colour is usually employed for these lines, and it is well to give them a broken or somewhat undefined character. When the French system is adopted, contour lines are drawn continuous, a broad but faint line of colour.

—The student who is familiar with how to lay down angles and plot reference lines and points will find it easy to draw contour lines. Once the contour points have been measured with a chain, the contour is created by drawing a smooth line through the plotted points. However, when the contour points have been surveyed by measuring magnetic angles to known points, those angles need to be marked at the points and extended to meet the contour point. Drawing contours is different from drawing regular details because each contour point is represented by a small dot, and each carrying point is marked with a similar dot surrounded by a small hand-drawn circle for distinction. The former should be plotted to be noticeable in the trace or contour line, which should be easy to follow but not overly prominent. The line connecting adjacent points should be true lines of feature. Color is typically used for these lines, and it’s best to give them a broken or somewhat vague appearance. When using the French system, contour lines are drawn as continuous, with a broad but faint line of color.

To Plot Sounded Points in Submerged Districts.

—When the angles have been measured on dry land with the theodolite, these angles should be laid down at the dry-land points, and the lines produced to meet in the sounded point. But when the angles have been measured on the water with a sextant, a station pointer is required. The arcs of the pointer should be adjusted to read the measured angles, and the instrument applied to the plotted points of the observed objects so as to bring the hair lines accurately to their respective object points. The sounded point may then be correctly plotted through the centre of the pointer. If the angles have been measured by the magnetic compass, that is, if the angles are those made with the magnetic meridian, the angles should be laid down at the plotted points of the[91] observed land objects, and the lines produced to meet in the sounded point. Instead of the station pointer, a piece of tracing paper may be used in the following manner. Draw three straight lines radiating from one point so as to make with each other angles equal to the measured angles. Lay the paper on the plan and move it about till the three lines traverse the observed objects. The point from which they diverge will then mark the position of the sounded point, which may be plotted by being pricked off.

—Once the angles have been measured on dry land using a theodolite, these angles should be marked at the dry-land points, and the lines extended to intersect at the sounding point. However, when the angles are measured on water with a sextant, a station pointer is necessary. The arcs of the pointer need to be adjusted to indicate the measured angles, and the instrument should be positioned over the plotted points of the observed objects to align the hairlines precisely with their corresponding object points. The sounding point can then be accurately plotted through the center of the pointer. If the angles have been measured using a magnetic compass, meaning they are in relation to the magnetic meridian, these angles should be marked at the plotted points of the [91] observed land objects, with the lines extended to meet at the sounding point. Instead of a station pointer, a piece of tracing paper can be used as follows. Draw three straight lines radiating from a single point so that the angles formed between them are equal to the measured angles. Place the paper on the plan and adjust it until the three lines intersect the observed objects. The point where they diverge will then indicate the location of the sounding point, which can be plotted by marking it off.

The sounded point determined by angles measured with the sextant may also be plotted by describing circles on the land-object lines as chords, to contain segmental angles equal to the measured angles. Such circles will intersect in the common land-object point and the sounded point. To plot the sounded point in this manner, requires the solution by construction of the problem, “to describe on a given line a segment of a circle that shall contain a given angle.” But this method is generally found too tedious in practice.

The point determined by angles measured with the sextant can also be plotted by drawing circles on the land-object lines as chords, which will contain segment angles equal to the measured angles. These circles will intersect at the common land-object point and the sounded point. Plotting the sounded point this way requires solving the problem of “drawing a segment of a circle that contains a given angle on a specified line.” However, this method is often considered too tedious in practice.

Errors and Error-sheets.

—There is a tendency, as we have previously remarked, for the measured lengths of lines to be a little too long, by reason of the irregularities of the surface. It is usual to allow for this source of error 1 in 1000 in fair open country, and 112 in 1000 in close country. When the measurements differ by an amount exceeding these limits, the pencil trace should not be drawn between the reference points, but the line should be entered on an “office error-sheet.” The error-sheet should show the number of the plot-sheet, the triangle, the book and page in which the measurements are entered, and the scale and measured lengths of the line. To ascertain the source of the error, other lines referenced to the reference point or points of the line in error should be plotted, and the apparent source should be entered on the error-sheet. If the lines referred to the same point be found to plot to another point in the reference line, the scale measurement of this point should also be entered. And if the reference point in error be not directly surveyed in the survey of their respective lines, the measurements for reference and the arithmetical reductions will have to be examined. Besides the office error-sheet, there should[92] be a field error-sheet for each book and triangle, upon which should be entered the book, the page, and the line in error, and some indication of the source of the error. This sheet will be forwarded with the field-book to the surveyor for correction. The following are examples of a common and very good form of error-sheet, but it may be varied in many ways if thought desirable:—

—There’s a tendency, as we've mentioned before, for the measured lengths of lines to be slightly longer due to the irregularities of the surface. It’s standard to account for this error as 1 in 1000 in open country, and 1½ in 1000 in dense country. When the measurements differ by more than these limits, a pencil trace shouldn’t be drawn between the reference points; instead, the line should be noted on an “office error-sheet.” The error-sheet should include the plot-sheet number, the triangle, the book and page where the measurements are recorded, along with the scale and measured lengths of the line. To determine the source of the error, additional lines referenced to the error line’s reference point(s) should be plotted, and the apparent source noted on the error-sheet. If the lines referencing the same point plot to a different point on the reference line, the scale measurement for that point should also be recorded. If the erroneous reference point wasn’t directly surveyed during the measurement of their respective lines, those reference measurements and the arithmetic reductions will need to be reviewed. In addition to the office error-sheet, there should be a field error-sheet for each book and triangle, which should include the book, the page, the line in error, and some indication of the error's source. This sheet will be sent along with the field-book to the surveyor for correction. Below are examples of a common and effective error-sheet format, although it can be modified in various ways if desired:—

Office Error-sheet.

Office Error Report.

Plotter’s Name   Date  
Book. Lines. Scale
Measurement.
Reference Points
of Lines.
Apparent
Corrections.
Triangles. Observations.
Page.
200 1953 1907 1118 1551 1651 triangle Examine reference point and line.
23 2094 4020 4020
200 3000 3056 2814 1308 3056 Examine line.
28 4020 3082
200 1314 1323 1551 85 1651 Examine reference point and line.
42 4020 3028 4020

Field Error-sheet.

Field Error Sheet.

To A. B., Surveyor. Date  
Book. Lines. Triangles. Observations.
Page.
    triangle Examine reference points and line.
200 1953 1651 Reference point (August 10th, 1874).
23 4020
200 3000 Examine line. Line 3056 (August 10th, 1874).
28
    Examine reference points and line.
200 1314 1651 (August 12th, 1874).
42 4020
    Corrected in the field, A. B.

To Plot Vertical Sections.

—In plotting a vertical section, a fine and firm horizontal line is first drawn to represent the datum line. The reference points are then plotted upon this line from the level-book by[93] means of a linear scale, in the manner already described for plotting such points. The reference points to be plotted upon the datum line are the chain lengths entered in the field-book in the column headed Distances. These distances are the points at which the levels were taken, and between them, unless otherwise stated in the field-book, the ground is supposed to slope uniformly. Moreover, these distances are assumed to be measured horizontally, and therefore care must be taken to ascertain whether or not they were so measured in the field; if not, they must be reduced before plotting, or the section will be too long. Having plotted the reference points on the datum line, a perpendicular must be erected from each of them, and a length laid off upon this perpendicular equal to the vertical height above the datum line indicated by the entry in the column of the level-book headed Reduced Levels against the distance to which the perpendicular corresponds. To render the differences of altitude more apparent, these vertical distances are plotted to a much larger scale than the horizontal, as explained in a preceding Section. To erect the perpendiculars, the T and set square furnish the most convenient means. The detail points thus determined upon the perpendiculars represent[94] the points in the surface of the ground at which the levels were taken, and by joining these points we obtain the surface line. An example will clearly show the method pursued. Let it be required to lay down the section from the following level-book:—

—To create a vertical section, start by drawing a clear and solid horizontal line to represent the datum line. Next, plot the reference points on this line using a linear scale from the level-book, just like we described for plotting such points earlier. The reference points you plot on the datum line are the chain lengths recorded in the field-book under the column titled Distances. These distances are where the levels were measured, and unless stated otherwise in the field-book, the ground is assumed to slope evenly between them. Additionally, these distances are assumed to be measured horizontally, so it's important to double-check whether they were measured that way in the field; if not, you'll need to adjust them before plotting to avoid making the section too long. After plotting the reference points on the datum line, you need to draw a vertical line from each point and measure a distance up this vertical line that matches the vertical height above the datum line noted in the Reduced Levels column of the level-book, corresponding to the distance for that vertical line. To make the differences in height more noticeable, these vertical distances are plotted on a much larger scale than the horizontal distances, as explained in a previous section. For drawing the vertical lines, the T and set square are the easiest tools to use. The specific points marked on the vertical lines indicate the locations on the ground surface where the levels were taken, and by connecting these points, we create the surface line. An example will clarify the method used. Let's say we need to lay down the section from the following level-book:—

Back
Sights.
Fore
Sights.
Rise. Fall. Re-
duced
Levels.
Dis-
tances.
Remarks.
feet. feet. feet. feet. feet. chains.  
        100·00 .. B.M. north-west corner of church tower.
16·41 9·37 7·04 .. 107·04 230  
19·36 10·43 8·93 .. 115·97 465
16·42 19·36 .. 2·94 113·03 640
8·36 14·36 .. 6·00 107·03 794
9·37 12·49 .. 3·12 103·91 1030
11·64 19·76 .. 8·12 95·79 1200
19·46 9·32 10·14 .. 105·93 1564
17·64 13·62 4·02 .. 109·95 .. Centre of road at 123 links.
18·76 12·64 6·12 .. 116·07 1823  
19·84 16·92 2·92 .. 118·99 1964
19·76 11·64 8·12 .. 127·11 2100 Forward station ☉ at corner of wood.
17·64 19·72 .. 2·08 125·03 2250  
9·73 18·64 .. 8·91 116·12 2376
8·64 17·64 .. 9·00 107·12 2590
18·76 16·24 2·52 .. 109·64 2700
231·79 222·15 49·81 40·17    
222·15   40·17   100·00  
9·64   9·64   9·64 Difference between datum and last reduced level, or height of B above A.

Fig. 86.

Fig. 86.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (54 kB).

Draw the datum line D L, Fig. 86, and set off along it the distances 230, 465, 640, 794, &c., links; these points will be the reference points for the perpendiculars. Erect a perpendicular from each of these points, and lay off, to a suitable scale, upon these lines successively the vertical heights 100, 107·04, 115·97, 113·03, 107·03, &c. The points thus determined will be the surface detail points, and by joining these we shall obtain the surface line. Then will A D L B represent a section of the ground between A and B. A description of objects on the surface worthy of notice should be written over such objects.

Draw the datum line D L, Fig. 86, and mark off the distances 230, 465, 640, 794, etc., in links; these points will serve as reference points for the vertical lines. From each of these points, create a vertical line and, using an appropriate scale, mark the vertical heights 100, 107.04, 115.97, 113.03, 107.03, etc. The points established this way will represent the details of the surface, and by connecting them, we will create the surface line. Therefore, A D L B will represent a cross-section of the ground between A and B. A description of notable objects on the surface should be written above such objects.

In working sections, where great accuracy is required, larger scales are employed, and the levels are taken at more frequent intervals.[95] Thus, in a railway working section, for example, the levels are taken at every chain’s length, and also over every little undulation in the surface of the ground. In preparing such sections, vertical lines are drawn in blue at every chain’s length up to the surface of the ground from the datum line, and on each vertical is written the reduced height above datum from the column of reduced levels in the level-book.

In working sections where precision is crucial, larger scales are used, and levels are recorded more frequently.[95] For instance, in a railway working section, levels are taken at every chain's length, as well as over every small bump in the ground. When creating these sections, vertical lines are drawn in blue at every chain's length extending up from the datum line to the ground surface, and the reduced height above the datum is noted on each vertical line, based on the column of reduced levels in the level-book.

Sections, especially working sections, are usually drawn upon ruled, or, as it is called, “section” paper, the nature of which we have already described. This method, which was introduced by Mr. Brunel, possesses many practical advantages, inasmuch as it obviates the necessity of plotting the “distances” and erecting perpendiculars, the latter already existing. It also greatly facilitates the computation of the contents of a given section. Its chief defect lies in the difficulty of making the horizontal lines coincide when joining the sheets end to end. Of course scales are not required upon section paper.

Sections, especially working sections, are usually created on ruled, or what we call “section” paper, which we have already described. This method, introduced by Mr. Brunel, offers many practical benefits, as it eliminates the need to plot the “distances” and draw perpendiculars, which are already built in. It also makes it much easier to calculate the area of a given section. Its main downside is the challenge of aligning the horizontal lines when connecting the sheets end to end. Naturally, scales are not needed on section paper.

To lay down Gradients.

—The method of laying down the gradients of railways and roads usually adopted in practice consists in applying one end of an extended silken thread to the section at the point in which the road commences, and the other end in such a position that the thread may cut the profile of the earth’s surface so as to leave equal portions of space above and below the thread, as nearly as can be judged by the eye. The cuttings from the parts above the thread will then furnish sufficient materials to form the embankments in the spaces below. This is called “balancing” the cuttings and embankments. When the first gradient has been determined in this way, it may be found unfavourable to the second in respect to the extent of cuttings and embankments; in such a case it must be modified to suit the requirements of the latter. In this way the gradients must be modified successively until the compound result evidently gives a minimum of cuttings and embankments, due regard, of course, being had to the limits imposed by the nature of the case, both with respect to the ruling gradient and the proper heights for bridges.

—The method of setting the gradients for railways and roads typically used in practice involves attaching one end of a long silk thread to the starting point of the road and positioning the other end so that the thread intersects the earth's surface profile, creating equal amounts of space above and below the thread as accurately as possible with the eye. The soil removed from the areas above the thread will provide enough material to build up the embankments in the spaces below. This process is called “balancing” the cuttings and embankments. Once the first gradient is established this way, it might not work well for the second one concerning the amounts of cuttings and embankments; in that case, it needs adjustment to meet the requirements of the latter. Gradients must then be gradually adjusted until the overall outcome clearly results in a minimum of cuttings and embankments, while still considering the constraints dictated by the specific situation, including the maximum gradient and appropriate bridge heights.

[96]

[96]

To Plot a Section from a Contour Map.

—The mode of plotting a section from a contoured plan was explained when treating of contour lines. The contour map used for this purpose should give the features of the surface configuration in sufficient detail without serious error. Having drawn a line of section on the map and a datum line upon the fair paper for the vertical section, the points in which the section line intersects the contours should be measured on the scale of the map from a zero point in that line, and the measurements plotted upon the datum line. Perpendiculars should then be drawn through these plotted points, and on these perpendiculars the reduced altitudes of their respective contour points should be plotted. A line drawn through these surface plotted points will be the surface line. When the horizontal scales of the map and the section are the same, the contour plane lines may be drawn on the paper for the section parallel to the section line on the map, and perpendiculars raised to intersect them from the points on the map in which the section line intersects the contours, in the manner previously described. The points of intersection with the parallel lines will be the surface contour points in the vertical section. For practical purposes, the parallel lines and the perpendiculars are only temporarily drawn in pencil until the surface trace shall have been obtained and drawn in ink, with the datum line.

—The way to plot a section from a contoured map was explained when discussing contour lines. The contour map used for this purpose should clearly show the details of the surface features without significant errors. After drawing a section line on the map and a baseline on the drawing paper for the vertical section, measure the points where the section line intersects the contours using the map's scale from a starting point on that line, and then plot these measurements on the baseline. Next, draw vertical lines through these plotted points, and on these verticals, plot the adjusted elevations of their corresponding contour points. A line drawn through these surface-plotted points will represent the surface line. When the horizontal scales of the map and the section match, the contour lines can be drawn on the paper for the section parallel to the section line on the map, with vertical lines extended to intersect them from the points on the map where the section line meets the contours, as described earlier. The intersection points with the parallel lines will be the surface contour points in the vertical section. For practical purposes, the parallel lines and verticals are only lightly sketched in pencil until the surface trace is finalized and inked, along with the baseline.


Section IV.—Plans by Civil Engineers and Surveyors.

In the preceding Sections the manner of laying down plans has been fully described and the principles involved in the operations minutely explained. It now only remains, therefore, to direct attention to certain matters relating to the preparation of plans, which are necessitated by the circumstances of particular cases.

In the previous sections, we thoroughly described how to create plans and explained the principles behind the operations in detail. Now, we just need to focus on specific issues related to plan preparation that arise from the unique circumstances of each case.

Civil engineers’ plans usually consist, if we except harbour surveys, of a representation, to a rather large scale, of long and[97] narrow tracts of country through which it is proposed to construct a means of communication, such as a railway, a road, or a canal. They do not differ essentially from other plans, the survey being taken in the ordinary way, and the plan laid down according to one or other of the methods described in the preceding Section. The width of railway surveys varies from five to twenty chains, at the option of the engineer. An important matter demanding careful attention is to survey, plot, and number all fields and other enclosures, houses and other buildings situate within the limits of deviation, that is, the boundaries of the space beyond which it is not proposed to deviate the line of railway. The object of numbering every separate enclosure, road, building, or other object on the plan, is that they may be the more readily described in a book prepared for that purpose and called the Reference Book. Parish and county boundaries are shown by dotted lines, as explained in a former Section. Frequently it is necessary, in consequence of the smallness of the scale adopted for the plan, to give enlarged drawings of certain portions. In these cases, whenever practicable, the enlarged plan should be placed directly under or over the small plan to which it refers, as such an arrangement is not only more pleasing to the eye, but is far more convenient for reference than one in which there is no relation of position between the two plans. The proposed railway should be represented by a full and heavy line, and the limits of deviation shown by strong dotted lines. The names of the different parishes through which the line passes should be conspicuously written, and the name of the county placed at the top of each sheet; the sheets also should be distinctly numbered. It is not usual to distinguish different kinds of fences on plans of engineering projects, as on estate plans to a large scale; on the former it is sufficient to distinguish between fenced and unfenced lines of division of land, marking the former by plain, and the latter by dotted lines. It is almost needless to remark that a scale of distances should accompany every plan.

Civil engineers' plans generally consist, except for harbor surveys, of a large-scale representation of long and narrow areas of land where they intend to build a means of transportation, like a railway, road, or canal. These plans are basically the same as other plans, with surveys conducted in the usual way and the layout following one of the methods described in the previous section. The width of railway surveys ranges from five to twenty chains, depending on the engineer's choice. An important detail requiring close attention is the need to survey, plot, and number all fields, enclosures, houses, and other buildings located within the limits of deviation, which are the boundaries beyond which the railway line is not expected to change. The purpose of numbering each individual enclosure, road, building, or object on the plan is to provide clear descriptions in a book made for that purpose, known as the Reference Book. Parish and county boundaries are indicated by dotted lines, as explained earlier. Often, due to the small scale used for the plan, it becomes necessary to include enlarged drawings of certain areas. In such cases, whenever possible, the enlarged plan should be placed directly above or below the small plan it references, as this layout is not only more visually appealing but also much more convenient for reference than a layout where the two plans are unrelated in position. The proposed railway should be shown with a thick solid line, and the limits of deviation indicated by strong dotted lines. The names of the different parishes the line passes through should be clearly labeled, and the name of the county should be placed at the top of each sheet; the sheets should also be clearly numbered. It is not common to differentiate between types of fences on engineering plans like it is on larger estate plans; for engineering projects, it's enough to show fenced and unfenced land divisions, marking fenced sections with solid lines and unfenced ones with dotted lines. It’s almost unnecessary to say that every plan should include a scale of distances.

The section should be drawn to the same horizontal scale as the plan, and the exaggeration of the vertical scale should be such as to[98] show distinctly the irregularities of the surface. The horizontal datum line of the section should have marked on it a scale of distances corresponding with those marked along the centre line of the plan, in order that corresponding points on the plan and the section may be readily found, and great care should be taken that horizontal distances on the plan and on the section exactly agree. Cross sections are longitudinal sections of existing lines of communication which the proposed work will cross; they may cross the centre line of the proposed work either at right angles or obliquely. Cross sections may also be required where the ground slopes sideways; in general they should be ranged accurately at right angles to the centre line, and they should be plotted without exaggeration, that is, their vertical and horizontal scales should be the same as the vertical scale of the longitudinal section. All cross sections should be plotted as seen by looking forward towards them along the centre line.

The section should be drawn to the same horizontal scale as the plan, and the exaggeration of the vertical scale should be enough to[98] clearly show the surface irregularities. The horizontal datum line of the section should include a distance scale that matches the markings along the center line of the plan, so that corresponding points on both the plan and the section can be easily identified. It's important to ensure that the horizontal distances on both the plan and the section align perfectly. Cross sections are longitudinal sections of existing transportation routes that the proposed work will intersect; they may cross the center line of the proposed work either at right angles or at an angle. Cross sections may also be needed where the ground slopes sideways; generally, they should be positioned accurately at right angles to the center line, and they should be plotted without distortion, meaning their vertical and horizontal scales should be the same as the vertical scale of the longitudinal section. All cross sections should be plotted as viewed when looking forward along the center line.

To distinguish the nature of the soils passed through, sections are frequently coloured, as shown in Plate 21. The information given by this means concerning the character of the strata is of very great value to the engineer or to the contractor, inasmuch as it enables them to predicate with some degree of certainty the amount of labour that will be required in executing the proposed work. It is, therefore, highly important that the draughtsman correctly represent the character of the strata. The conventional modes of representing these features are shown on Plate 20, which should be carefully studied and copied.

To identify the types of soils encountered, sections are often colored, as shown in Plate 21. This information about the nature of the layers is extremely valuable to the engineer or contractor, as it allows them to reasonably predict the amount of work needed to complete the project. Therefore, it’s crucial that the draftsman accurately represents the nature of the layers. The standard ways of illustrating these features are shown on Plate 20, which should be studied and replicated carefully.

It is necessary that the engineering draughtsman should be acquainted with the “Standing Orders” of Parliament relating to the preparation of plans and sections, in order that he may fulfil the conditions therein laid down. And as most of the important details involved by the exigencies of practice in the preparation of such plans and sections are prescribed by these Standing Orders, we will give so much of them as relates directly to the matters under consideration; by so doing, the details will be clearly and fully described, and the requirements of the law concerning them authoritatively made known.

It’s essential for the engineering draftsman to be familiar with the “Standing Orders” of Parliament regarding the creation of plans and sections to meet the specified requirements. Since most important details required for the practical preparation of these plans and sections are outlined in these Standing Orders, we will provide the relevant portions that directly relate to the topics at hand; this will ensure the details are clearly and thoroughly explained, and the legal requirements concerning them are communicated authoritatively.

[99]

[99]

Nature of the Documents required.

—“In cases of bills relating to engineering works, a plan and also a duplicate thereof, together with a book of reference thereto, and a section and also a duplicate thereof, as hereinafter described, shall be deposited for public inspection at the office of the clerk of the peace for every county, riding or division in England or Ireland, or in the office of the principal sheriff clerk of every county in Scotland, and where any county in Scotland is divided into districts or divisions, then also in the office of the principal sheriff clerk in or for each district or division in or through which the work is proposed to be made, maintained, varied, extended or enlarged, or in which such lands or houses are situate, on or before the 30th day of November immediately preceding the application for the bill.”

—“For bills relating to engineering projects, a plan and a duplicate of it, along with a reference book and a section and its duplicate, as described below, must be filed for public viewing at the office of the clerk of the peace in every county, riding, or division in England or Ireland, or at the office of the principal sheriff clerk in each county in Scotland. If a county in Scotland is divided into districts or divisions, then it must also be filed at the office of the principal sheriff clerk for each district or division where the work is planned, maintained, modified, extended, or enlarged, or where the lands or houses are located, no later than the 30th day of November before the application for the bill.”

“In the case of railway bills, the ordnance map, on the scale of one inch to a mile, or where there is no ordnance map, a published map, to a scale of not less than half an inch to a mile, or in Ireland, to a scale of not less than a quarter of an inch to a mile, with the line of railway delineated thereon, so as to show its general course and direction, shall, on or before the 30th day of November, be deposited at the office of the clerk of the peace, or sheriff clerk, together with the plans, sections, and book of reference.”

“In the case of railway bills, the ordnance map, at a scale of one inch to a mile, or if there is no ordnance map, a published map at a scale of at least half an inch to a mile, or in Ireland, at a scale of at least a quarter of an inch to a mile, with the railway line marked on it to show its general course and direction, must be submitted by the 30th day of November to the office of the clerk of the peace or sheriff clerk, along with the plans, sections, and book of reference.”

“In cases where the work shall be situate on tidal lands within the ordinary spring tides, a copy of the plans and sections shall, on or before the 30th day of November, be deposited at the office of the Harbour Department, Board of Trade, marked ‘Tidal Waters,’ and on such copy all tidal waters shall be coloured blue, and if the plans include any bridge across tidal waters the dimensions as regards span and headway of the nearest bridge, if any, above and below the proposed new bridge, shall be marked thereon, and in all such cases such plans and sections shall be accompanied by a published map or ordnance sheet of the country, over which the works are proposed to extend, or are to be carried, with their position and extent, or route accurately laid down thereon.”

“In cases where the work is located on tidal lands within the usual spring tides, a copy of the plans and sections must be submitted to the Harbour Department, Board of Trade, by the 30th day of November. This copy should be labeled ‘Tidal Waters,’ and all tidal waters on it must be colored blue. If the plans include any bridge over tidal waters, the dimensions, including the span and clearance height of the nearest bridge, if any, above and below the proposed new bridge, should be indicated on it. Additionally, these plans and sections must be accompanied by a published map or ordnance sheet of the area where the work is proposed, clearly showing their position, extent, or route."

“In the case of railway bills, a copy of all plans, sections, and books of reference, and the aforementioned published map with the line[100] of railway delineated thereon so as to show its general course and direction, is required to be deposited at the office of the Board of Trade, and at the Private Bill Office of the Houses of Parliament; and in cases where any portion of the work is situate within the limits of the Metropolis, a copy of so much of the plans and sections as relates to such portion of the work is required to be deposited at the office of the Metropolitan Board of Works. Also a copy of so much of the plans and sections as relates to each parish in or through which the work is intended to be made, or in which any lands or houses intended to be taken are situate, together with a copy of so much of the book of reference as relates to such parish, is required to be deposited with the parish clerk of each such parish in England, with the school-master of each such parish in Scotland, and with the clerk of the union within which such parish is included in Ireland.”

“In the case of railway projects, a copy of all plans, sections, and reference books, along with the previously mentioned published map showing the railway line's general course and direction, needs to be filed at the Board of Trade office and the Private Bill Office of the Houses of Parliament. If any part of the work is located within the Metropolis, a copy of the relevant plans and sections for that part must be submitted to the Metropolitan Board of Works. Additionally, a copy of the plans and sections related to each parish impacted by the project, or where any properties intended to be acquired are located, along with a copy of the relevant part of the reference book, must be deposited with the parish clerk of each parish in England, the schoolmaster of each parish in Scotland, and the clerk of the union covering that parish in Ireland.”

Plans.

—“Every plan required to be deposited shall be drawn to a scale of not less than four inches to a mile, and shall describe the line or situation of the whole of the work (no alternative line or work being in any case permitted), and the lands in or through which it is to be made, maintained, varied, extended or enlarged, or through which every communication to or from the work shall be made; and where it is the intention of the parties to apply for powers to make any lateral deviation from the line of the proposed work, the limits of such deviation shall be defined upon the plan, and all lands included within such limits shall be marked thereon; and unless the whole of such plan shall be upon a scale of not less than a quarter of an inch to every one hundred feet, an enlarged plan shall be added of any buildings, yard, courtyard or land within the curtilage of any building, or of any ground cultivated as a garden, either in the line of the proposed work or included within the limits of the said deviation, upon a scale of not less than a quarter of an inch to every one hundred feet.”

—“Every plan that needs to be submitted must be drawn to a scale of no less than four inches to a mile and must outline the entire scope of the work (no alternate lines or projects are allowed), as well as the lands where it’s to be constructed, maintained, altered, extended, or expanded, or where any access to or from the work will occur. If the parties intend to seek permission for any side adjustment from the proposed line of work, the boundaries of that adjustment must be shown on the plan, and all lands within those boundaries must be indicated. Additionally, unless the entire plan is drawn to a scale of at least a quarter of an inch to every one hundred feet, a detailed plan must also be included for any buildings, yards, courtyards, or land associated with any building, or for any land used as a garden, whether it lies along the proposed work or within the defined limits of the adjustment, drawn to a scale of no less than a quarter of an inch to every one hundred feet.”

“In all cases where it is proposed to make, vary, extend or enlarge any cut, canal, reservoir, aqueduct or navigation, the plan shall describe the brooks and streams to be directly diverted into such intended cut, canal, reservoir, aqueduct or navigation, or into any[101] variation, extension or enlargement thereof respectively, for supplying the same with water.”

“In all situations where there is a plan to create, modify, expand, or increase any cut, canal, reservoir, aqueduct, or navigation, the plan must detail the brooks and streams that will be directly redirected into the proposed cut, canal, reservoir, aqueduct, or navigation, or into any[101] changes, expansions, or enlargements of them, to provide water for those structures.”

“In all cases where it is proposed to make, vary, extend or enlarge any railway, the plan shall exhibit thereon the distances in miles and furlongs from one of the termini; and a memorandum of the radius of every curve not exceeding one mile in length shall be noted on the plan in furlongs and chains; and where tunnelling as a substitute for open cutting is intended, such tunnelling shall be marked by a dotted line on the plan.”

“In all situations where there’s a proposal to create, change, extend, or expand any railway, the plan must display the distances in miles and furlongs from one of the endpoints. Additionally, a note of the radius for every curve not exceeding one mile in length should be included on the plan in furlongs and chains. If tunneling is planned instead of open cutting, that tunneling must be indicated by a dotted line on the plan.”

“If it is intended to divert, widen or narrow any turnpike road, public carriage road, navigable river, canal or railway, the course of such diversion, and the extent of such widening or narrowing shall be marked upon the plan.”

“If it’s meant to change, widen, or narrow any toll road, public road, navigable river, canal, or railway, the path of that change, and how much it will be widened or narrowed, must be shown on the plan.”

“When a railway is intended to form a junction with an existing or authorized line of railway, the course of such existing or authorized line of railway shall be shown on the deposited plan for a distance of eight hundred yards on either side of the proposed junction, on a scale of not less than four inches to a mile.”

“When a railway is set to connect with an existing or approved railway line, the route of that existing or approved railway line must be indicated on the submitted plan for a distance of eight hundred yards on either side of the proposed junction, at a scale of at least four inches to a mile.”

Book of Reference.

—“The book of reference to every such plan shall contain the names of the owners or reputed owners, lessees or reputed lessees, and occupiers of all lands and houses in the line of the proposed work, or within the limits of deviation as defined upon the plan, and shall describe such lands and houses respectively.”

—“The reference book for each plan shall include the names of the actual or supposed owners, tenants or presumed tenants, and occupants of all land and properties along the proposed project, or within the boundaries of deviation outlined in the plan, and shall detail those lands and properties accordingly.”

Sections.

—“The section shall be drawn to the same horizontal scale as the plan, and to a vertical scale of not less than one inch to every one hundred feet, and shall show the surface of the ground marked on the plan, the intended level of the proposed work, the height of every embankment and the depth of every cutting, and a datum horizontal line, which shall be the same throughout the whole length of the work, or any branch thereof respectively, and shall be referred to some fixed point (stated in writing on the section), near some portion of such work, and in the case of a canal, cut, navigation, turnpike or other carriage road or railway, near either of the termini.”

—“The section must be drawn to match the same horizontal scale as the plan, with a vertical scale of at least one inch for every one hundred feet. It should show the ground surface marked on the plan, the intended level of the proposed work, the height of all embankments, the depth of all cuttings, and a consistent datum horizontal line throughout the entire length of the work or any branch of it. This line must refer to a specific fixed point (noted in writing on the section) located close to some part of the work, and in cases involving a canal, cut, navigation, turnpike, or another type of carriage road or railway, it should be near one of the endpoints.”

“In cases of bills for improving the navigation of any river,[102] there shall be a section which shall specify the levels of both banks of such river; and where any alteration is intended to be made therein, it shall describe the same by feet and inches, or decimal parts of a foot.”

“In cases of bills for improving the navigation of any river,[102] there should be a section that specifies the heights of both banks of that river; and if any changes are planned, it should describe them in feet and inches, or decimal parts of a foot.”

“In every section of a railway, the line of the railway marked thereon shall correspond with the upper surface of the rails.”

“In every section of a railway, the railway line shown on it must align with the top surface of the rails.”

“Distances on the datum line shall be marked in miles and furlongs, to correspond with those on the plan; a vertical measure from the datum line to the line of the railway shall be marked in feet and inches, or decimal parts of a foot, at each change of the gradient or inclination; and the proportion or rate of inclination between each such change shall also be marked.”

“Distances on the reference line will be marked in miles and furlongs to match those on the plan; a vertical measurement from the reference line to the railway line will be indicated in feet and inches, or decimal parts of a foot, at each change in gradient or slope; and the ratio or rate of incline between each of these changes will also be noted.”

“Wherever the line of the railway is intended to cross any turnpike road, public carriage road, navigable river, canal or railway, the height of the railway over or depth under the surface thereof, and the height and span of every arch of all bridges and viaducts by which the railway will be carried over the same, shall be marked in figures at every crossing thereof; and where the roadway will be carried across any such turnpike road, public carriage road or railway, on the level thereof, such crossing shall be so described on the section; and it shall also be stated if such level will be unaltered.”

“Wherever the railway crosses any toll road, public road, navigable river, canal, or railway, the height of the railway above or the depth below the surface, along with the height and span of every arch of all bridges and viaducts supporting the railway, will be indicated in numbers at each crossing. If the roadway goes across any toll road, public road, or railway at the same level, that crossing will be noted on the section; it will also be stated whether that level will remain unchanged.”

“If any alterations be intended in the water level of any canal, or in the level or rate of inclination of any turnpike road, public carriage road or railway, which will be crossed by the line of railway, then the same shall be stated on the said section, and each alteration shall be numbered; and cross sections in reference to the said numbers, on a horizontal scale of not less than one inch to every three hundred and thirty feet, and on a vertical scale of not less than one inch to every forty feet, shall be added, which shall show the present surface of such canal, road or railway, and the intended surface thereof when altered; and the greatest of the present and intended rates of inclination of such road or railway shall also be marked in figures thereon; and where any public carriage road is crossed on the level, a cross section of such road shall also be added; and all such[103] cross sections shall extend for two hundred yards on each side of the centre line of the railway.”

“If any changes are planned for the water level of any canal, or for the level or slope of any toll road, public road, or railway that will intersect with the railway line, those changes must be clearly indicated on the relevant section. Each alteration will be numbered; cross sections related to these numbers, on a horizontal scale of at least one inch to every three hundred and thirty feet, and on a vertical scale of at least one inch to every forty feet, must be included. These will show the current surface of the canal, road, or railway, and the proposed surface after the alterations. The highest current and proposed slopes of the road or railway will also be marked in figures on these sections. Additionally, if a public road is crossed at the same level, a cross-section of that road must also be provided. All of these cross sections should extend for two hundred yards on either side of the center line of the railway.”

“Wherever the extreme height of any embankment, or the extreme depth of any cutting, shall exceed five feet, the extreme height over or depth under the surface of the ground shall be marked in figures upon the section; and if any bridge or viaduct of more than three arches shall intervene in any embankment, or if any tunnel shall intervene in any cutting, the extreme height or depth shall be marked in figures on each of the parts into which such embankment or cutting shall be divided by such bridge, viaduct or tunnel.”

“Wherever the height of any embankment exceeds five feet, or the depth of any cutting goes beyond five feet, the maximum height above or depth below the ground surface must be indicated in numbers on the section. Additionally, if there’s a bridge or viaduct with more than three arches within any embankment, or if a tunnel exists within any cutting, the maximum height or depth must be noted in numbers on each part that the embankment or cutting is divided into by the bridge, viaduct, or tunnel.”

“Where tunnelling, as a substitute for open cutting, or a viaduct as a substitute for solid embankment, is intended, the same shall be marked on the section.”

“Where tunneling is used instead of open cutting, or a viaduct is used instead of a solid embankment, it should be clearly marked on the section.”

“When a railway is intended to form a junction with an existing or authorized line of railway, the gradient of such existing or authorized line of railway shall be shown on the deposited section, and in connection therewith, and on the same scale as the general section, for a distance of eight hundred yards on either side of the point of junction.”

“When a railway is meant to connect with an existing or approved railway line, the slope of that existing or approved railway line must be displayed on the submitted section, and in connection with it, on the same scale as the general section, for a distance of eight hundred yards on either side of the junction point.”

Besides the information thus written on the plan, it is useful to the engineer, though not prescribed, to have the levels of important points either written or shown by means of contour lines, especially when the plan is to be used in selecting a line of railway. The results of trial pits and borings may also be written on the plan, and the estimated cost of each part of the work placed opposite to its position on the paper.

Besides the information noted on the plan, it’s helpful for the engineer, although not required, to have the levels of important points either written down or represented by contour lines, especially when the plan will be used for choosing a railway line. The results from trial pits and borings can also be included on the plan, and the estimated cost of each part of the project can be listed next to its location on the paper.

Working Sections.

—For working sections the horizontal scale adopted is usually three or four chains to the inch, and the vertical scale 30 or 40 feet to the inch. A working section should show the level of the ground, the level of the proposed work, and the height of embankment or depth of cutting at every point of the ground where the level has been taken, these quantities being found by calculation, not by measurement on the paper. The position and levels of all “bench marks” should also be clearly indicated. At every crossing[104] of road, river or stream of any kind, should be inserted some remark respecting the work to be constructed, with a reference to the number of the working drawing prepared. The latter may be a special drawing, as for a bridge, or a general drawing, as for a level crossing and gates. The results of boring should also be shown on the working section. As soon as the works of construction have been determined upon, notes should be inserted from the working drawings, or other sources, of the angles of skew at which the line crosses roads or streams, the spans of arches on the square and on the skew, the rise of the arch, the depth of the arch stones, and of the puddle, if any be used, and, if the works be on an inclined plane, the rise or fall from centre to centre of the piers. Similar memoranda should also be made of girder bridges, culverts, and other works occurring along the line. To all working drawings the acting engineer always affixes his signature.

—For working sections, the horizontal scale is typically three or four chains to the inch, while the vertical scale is 30 or 40 feet to the inch. A working section should display the ground level, the level of the proposed work, and the height of embankments or depth of cuts at each point where the level has been recorded, with these measurements calculated rather than taken from the paper. The location and levels of all “bench marks” should also be clearly indicated. At every intersection of roads, rivers, or streams, a note should be added about the work to be done, referencing the number of the prepared working drawing. This can either be a specific drawing, like for a bridge, or a general drawing for a level crossing and gates. The results of boring should also be included in the working section. Once the construction works have been decided, notes should be taken from the working drawings or other sources regarding the angles at which the line intersects roads or streams, the spans of arches both on the square and at an angle, the rise of the arch, the thickness of the arch stones, and the puddle, if used. Additionally, if the work is on an inclined plane, the rise or fall from center to center of the piers should be noted. Similar records should be kept for girder bridges, culverts, and other structures along the line. All working drawings should be signed by the acting engineer.

Besides an acquaintance with the “Standing Orders,” the engineering and surveyor’s draughtsman should possess a knowledge of the Regulations of the Local Government Board, for these have to be complied with in the preparation of plans relative to main sewerage, drainage, and water-supply. These Regulations are as follows.

Besides being familiar with the “Standing Orders,” the engineering and surveyor’s draughtsman should also know the Regulations of the Local Government Board, as these must be followed when preparing plans related to main sewerage, drainage, and water supply. These Regulations are as follows.

Boundary Maps.

—In cases in which a special district is proposed to be formed for the adoption of the Local Government Act, a map must be submitted, accompanied by a written description of the proposed boundary, designated by letters from point to point, commencing from a fully and clearly defined point on the north side of the map marked by the letter A and a written description, then proceeding eastward by natural or other well-defined features, until the description closes upon the point started from. The name of the proposed district must be printed on the map, with the area in acres. The population and the number of houses, with the rate of increase as ascertained at the two last decennial periods upon which the census was taken, must be given, and a duplicate or tracing of the map furnished.

—In cases where a special district is suggested for the adoption of the Local Government Act, a map needs to be submitted, along with a written description of the proposed boundary, marked with letters from point to point, starting from a clearly defined point on the north side of the map labeled as A and accompanied by a written description. It should then move eastward using natural or other well-defined features until the description concludes at the starting point. The name of the proposed district must be printed on the map, along with the area in acres. The population and the number of houses, along with the rate of increase determined from the last two census periods, must be provided, and a duplicate or tracing of the map should be included.

Maps for Division into Wards.

—A map of the entire district must, in this case, be submitted, with the main boundary distinctly defined,[105] and the name of the district clearly printed thereon. The proposed division into wards must be by lines, clearly defined on the map of the district; brooks, roads, footwalks, streets, fences, or other easily recognizable lines of division may be adopted. Such lines must be defined on the map by a margin of colour. The proposed boundary-lines must be described in the same manner as in the boundary map, and the name or number of the ward, with the relative areas, population, and rateable value must be given. A duplicate map or a tracing must be deposited at the Local Government Act Office for future reference.

—A map of the entire district must be submitted in this case, with the main boundary clearly defined,[105] and the name of the district printed on it. The proposed division into wards must be represented by clearly defined lines on the district map; easily recognizable features like brooks, roads, sidewalks, streets, fences, or other landmarks can be used as division lines. These lines should be highlighted on the map with a margin of color. The proposed boundary lines must be described in the same way as they are shown on the boundary map, and the name or number of each ward, along with the relevant areas, population, and rateable value, must be included. A duplicate map or a tracing has to be filed at the Local Government Act Office for future reference.

Plans of Proposed Works.

—It is in all cases necessary, upon application being made by Local Boards for the Secretary of State’s sanction to a loan for the execution of works, that plans, sections, detailed estimates, and specifications be submitted with the application, accompanied with the information relative to area, population, number of houses, and rateable value of the district required for boundary maps. Tracings of such plans and sections, and copies of the estimates and specifications must be sent in for filing at the Local Government Act Office.

—In every case, when Local Boards apply for the Secretary of State’s approval for a loan to carry out projects, they must submit plans, sections, detailed cost estimates, and specifications along with the application. This should also include information about the area, population, number of houses, and the assessed value of the district needed for boundary maps. Tracings of these plans and sections, as well as copies of the estimates and specifications, must be sent in for filing at the Local Government Act Office.

General Plan.

—A general plan exhibiting the area which will be affected by the proposed works must be laid down to a scale of not less than two feet to a mile. It should have figured upon it the levels of the centres of all the streets and roads at their intersections and angles, and at every change of inclination; also, where a district is near the sea, it should show the high and the low tide level of the sea, and where there is a river, the summer and the flood-water levels should be recorded. Permanent bench marks having reference to the surface levels should be cut on public buildings, or other permanent and suitable objects, throughout the district, and clearly marked on the plan. Sections should accompany this plan, upon which the levels of the cellars should be shown. Such a plan may be used for showing the lines of main-sewers and drains, lines of water-pipes, and gas-mains. The lines of main-sewers and drains should have the cross-sectional dimensions and the gradients distinctly marked upon them.[106] The dimensions of water and gas pipes should also be shown in figures or in writing.

—A general plan showing the area that will be impacted by the proposed work must be drawn to a scale of at least two feet to a mile. It should indicate the levels of the centers of all streets and roads at their intersections and angles, as well as at every change in slope; additionally, when a district is close to the sea, it should display the high and low tide levels, and when there is a river, it should record the summer and flood water levels. Permanent bench marks related to the surface levels should be carved into public buildings or other permanent, suitable objects throughout the district and clearly marked on the plan. Sections should accompany this plan, showing the levels of the cellars. This plan can be used to indicate the lines of main sewers and drains, water pipes, and gas mains. The lines of main sewers and drains should have the cross-sectional dimensions and gradients clearly marked. The dimensions of water and gas pipes should also be represented in numbers or written out.[106]

Detailed Plan.

—A detailed plan for the purposes of house-drainage, paving, the sale and purchase of property, or other purposes of a like character, must be constructed to a scale of not less than ten feet to a mile. Upon this plan must be exhibited all houses and other buildings, bench marks, the levels of streets and roads, of cellars, of the sea at high and low tide level, and the summer and the flood level of rivers. Three feet by two feet will be a convenient size for the sheets of this plan, and by representing the marginal lines of the sheets upon the general plan, and numbering the sheets to correspond, the general plan will become a very useful index.

—A detailed plan for house drainage, paving, buying and selling property, or similar purposes must be made to a scale of no less than ten feet to a mile. This plan must include all houses and other buildings, benchmark locations, street and road levels, cellar levels, sea levels at high and low tide, and the summer and flood levels of rivers. A convenient size for the sheets of this plan will be three feet by two feet, and by showing the margins of the sheets on the overall plan and numbering the sheets accordingly, the overall plan will serve as a very useful index.

As it may occasionally be desired to carry out works piecemeal, with a view to save the time which would be occupied in the preparation of a complete plan from actual survey, it is sufficient in the first instance to furnish a general plan of streets and roads only, with the surface levels and those of the deepest cellars, and the proposed scheme of works shown thereon, after which the works can proceed in sections. But with each separate application for sanction to a loan, a correct plan and section or sections should be submitted, accompanied by detailed estimates and specifications. It must, however, be understood that the complete plan of the entire district must be proceeded with, so that, when the works are finished, the Local Board and the office of the Local Government Act may possess a proper record.

As it may sometimes be necessary to carry out projects in phases to save time on creating a complete plan from an actual survey, it's sufficient at first to provide a general layout of streets and roads, including surface levels and the depths of the lowest basements, along with the proposed work plan. After this, the work can be done in sections. However, for each separate request for loan approval, a detailed plan and associated sections should be submitted, along with detailed estimates and specifications. It should be noted that the comprehensive plan for the entire area must still be developed, so that when the work is complete, the Local Board and the Local Government Act office have an accurate record.

Mining Plans.

—The plotting of mining surveys is performed in the same manner as the surface traverse surveys already described. Before proceeding to lay down the plan, it is well to divide the paper into squares of 10 chains side, or 10 acres area, by two sets of lines crossing each other at right angles, one of which sets should represent meridians. This operation should be performed with scrupulous care; and to ensure accuracy, beam compasses should be used to lay off the divisions. The lines should be finely drawn in colour to distinguish them from other lines to be put upon the drawing. Care must be taken to get the plan fairly upon the paper, so that the conformation[107] of the outline or boundary to the edges of the paper may have a pleasing effect to the eye; and the direction of the meridians must be determined according to this condition. By having the plan thus divided into squares of 10 acres each, the quantity of ground worked out may be approximatively estimated at any time by inspection, and the total quantity may be readily computed in the same manner. Besides dividing the plan itself in this way, it will be found extremely useful to have a sheet of tracing paper, or better, tracing cloth, divided into squares of 316·228 links side, or 1 acre area, in black lines; each of such squares being subdivided into 4 by lines in colour, to show quarters of an acre. To find the area of any portion of exhausted or of unworked ground, it is only necessary to lay this divided sheet over such portion and to count the squares and quarters included in it.

—The plotting of mining surveys is done in the same way as the surface traverse surveys described earlier. Before starting the layout, it’s a good idea to divide the paper into squares of 10 chains on each side, or a 10-acre area, using two sets of lines crossing at right angles, one of which should represent meridians. This task should be done very carefully; to ensure precision, beam compasses should be used to mark the divisions. The lines should be finely drawn in color to distinguish them from other lines on the drawing. It's important to position the plan well on the paper so that the outline or boundary conforms to the edges of the paper in a visually appealing way, and the direction of the meridians must be determined accordingly. By dividing the plan into squares of 10 acres each, you can estimate the amount of ground worked out at any time just by looking, and you can easily calculate the total amount in the same way. In addition to dividing the plan this way, it’s very useful to have a sheet of tracing paper, or even better, tracing cloth, divided into squares of 316.228 links on each side, or a 1-acre area, marked with black lines; each square can be subdivided into 4 with colored lines to indicate quarters of an acre. To determine the area of any portion of exhausted or unworked ground, you just need to lay this divided sheet over that portion and count the squares and quarters it covers.

By reason of the variations of the magnetic meridian, the date of a survey should always be written on the plan; and as the plan of underground workings is laid down piecemeal as the workings progress, often extending over a period of many years, care must be taken to reduce all bearings to the original meridian. Unless these matters are strictly observed, serious errors may result.

Due to the changes in the magnetic meridian, the date of a survey should always be included on the plan. Since the plan of underground work is created gradually as the work continues, often spanning many years, it’s important to convert all bearings back to the original meridian. If these details aren’t meticulously followed, significant errors could occur.

When two or more veins of mineral are being worked one above the other, and are placed upon the same plan, they are distinguished by means of colour. It matters not what colours are employed for the several separate workings so long as they are distinct from each other. Also the mode of applying the colour, whether with the brush or with the pen, is entirely a question of taste. It may, however, be observed that as mining plans are constantly being added to, it is very difficult to avoid a patchy appearance when the colour is laid on with the brush. Plate 33 shows the manner in which mining plans are got up.

When two or more mineral veins are being worked one above the other and are laid out in the same way, they're identified by color. It doesn't matter which colors are used for each section, as long as they're different from each other. The method of applying the color, whether with a brush or a pen, is purely a matter of personal preference. However, it's worth noting that since mining plans are always being updated, it can be very challenging to avoid a patchy look when the color is applied with a brush. Plate 33 shows how mining plans are created.

Estate and Town Plans.

—Plans of estates and towns, including as they do only a limited area and requiring great distinctness of detail, are laid down to a large scale; for the form and character of the detail are, on such plans, of equal importance with its position. With such a scale as is required in these cases, it is possible, not only to clearly distinguish natural and artificial features, but to introduce means of[108] producing pictorial effect into their representation. The nature of these means may be seen in the examples of plans appended to this work.

—Plans of estates and towns, which cover a limited area and require a high level of detail, are drawn to a large scale; the shape and character of the details are just as important as their location. With the scale needed in these instances, it’s possible to clearly differentiate between natural and man-made features and to incorporate ways to create a visual impact in their representation. You can see examples of these methods in the plans attached to this work.[108]

The manner of showing the various kinds of fences has been already described. Trees are usually shown in elevation for the sake of artistic effect; but care must be taken to give them such dimensions as will accord with the scale of the drawing. Houses and other buildings are shown in plan of the correct form, and washed for distinction in light red for dwelling-houses, dark grey for outhouses, and light grey for public buildings. Dark grey is also used for all wooden and iron buildings to distinguish them from those constructed of the ordinary materials, brick and stone. But besides such distinctions, others are needed to indicate the character of natural features and artificial constructions. These are obtained either by showing the object roughly in elevation, or by some purely conventional means. The signs of this character that are likely to be frequently required on estate plans are shown on Plate 15. The manner of representing water, which has been described in a preceding Section, will be found illustrated in detail on Plate 11. Plates 10 and 14 show various kinds of trees; in this form they may be introduced very effectively into plans of estates.

The different types of fences have already been explained. Trees are typically represented in elevation for artistic effect; however, it's important to use dimensions that match the scale of the drawing. Houses and other buildings are depicted in plan with the correct shapes and are color-coded for clarity: light red for residential houses, dark grey for outbuildings, and light grey for public buildings. Dark grey is also used for all wooden and metal structures to set them apart from those made of common materials like brick and stone. Additionally, other distinctions are needed to indicate the nature of natural features and man-made constructions. These can be shown either by illustrating the object roughly in elevation or by using conventional symbols. The symbols that are likely to be often needed on estate plans are shown on Plate 15. The way to represent water, which was detailed in a previous section, will be illustrated on Plate 11. Plates 10 and 14 display various types of trees; they can be effectively incorporated into estate plans in this format.

The several stages which a plan passes through in the office are shown on Plate 2. If the plan is to be coloured, the colouring must be done before the lettering is put on. Plate 3 shows a plan lightly coloured, as used by surveyors, solicitors, and others; and Plate 17 shows a finished plan in colour. The methods of laying on the colours and the principles involved in the operations have been fully described and explained in a former Section. In Plate 13 is given a town plan showing a proposed street improvement. Such a plan must be laid down to a large scale, and the details in and near the part affected must be drawn in clearly and accurately. The uncoloured portion represents the plan as prepared for lithographing. When pink colour is used to show the proposed street, the buildings should be coloured in black by a light wash of Indian ink. Yellow or[109] any other bright tint may be used for the proposed street, the object being merely to distinguish it clearly. Existing streets should be coloured in yellow ochre, except when that colour is used for the proposed street, in which case burnt sienna may be used.

The different stages that a plan goes through in the office are shown on Plate 2. If the plan needs color, it has to be colored before the text is added. Plate 3 shows a lightly colored plan, which is typically used by surveyors, lawyers, and others; and Plate 17 shows a finished plan in color. The techniques for applying colors and the concepts involved in the processes have been thoroughly described in a previous section. In Plate 13, there is a town plan illustrating a proposed street improvement. This plan must be drawn to a large scale, with the details in and around the affected area clearly and accurately represented. The uncolored part represents the plan as it is prepared for lithographing. When using pink to indicate the proposed street, buildings should be colored in black with a light wash of Indian ink. Yellow or any other bright color may be used for the proposed street, with the goal of making it distinctly recognizable. Existing streets should be colored in yellow ochre, unless that color is used for the proposed street; in that case, burnt sienna can be used.

The Plates relating to this Section are Nos. 2, 3, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 19, 20, 21, and 33.

The plates connected to this section are Nos. 2, 3, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 19, 20, 21, and 33.


Section V.—Map Creation.

The principles and practice of map drawing, being in the main identical with those of ordinary plan drawing, have been generally explained and described in the preceding Sections. In the present Section, therefore, we have only to direct attention to such details as belong especially to the former class of topographical representations. These details relate chiefly to the selecting of objects and features on the surface of the ground whose character entitles them to special notice, and therefore to distinct delineation; to the practical methods of sketching such objects and features in the field, and to the means and the manner of reproducing them on the finished map. The first and the last of these questions have been treated by Mr. James in his Handbook of Topography, and the second by Lieut. R. S. Smith of the United States’ Army, in so concise and yet so complete a manner that we have not hesitated to avail ourselves of their labours rather than attempt to offer any instructions of our own. The following is, therefore, worthy of respectful attention.

The principles and practices of map drawing are largely the same as those of regular plan drawing, which have already been explained in the previous sections. In this section, we will focus on the specific details that apply particularly to topographical representations. These details mainly involve choosing objects and features on the ground that are significant enough to deserve special attention and clear illustration; the practical methods for sketching these objects and features in the field; and the ways and techniques for reproducing them on the final map. The first and last topics have been covered by Mr. James in his Handbook of Topography, while the second has been addressed by Lieut. R. S. Smith of the United States Army in a way that is both concise and comprehensive, so we have chosen to reference their work rather than provide our own instructions. The following information is therefore deserving of careful consideration.

Single Stroke Streams.

—In inking in streams, begin at the source and draw downwards towards yourself, increasing the pressure on the pen as you descend. The use of the steel pen in drawing single stroke streams is very objectionable. Even soft steel pens are apt to cut the surface of the paper, and in sharp bends it is quite impossible to ensure an even width of line with the best yet made; by re-inking, much time is lost, and frequently a rough jagged line is the result. The common quill pen finely pointed will work well on any sort of paper.

—When inking in streams, start at the source and pull down towards yourself, applying more pressure on the pen as you go down. Using a steel pen for drawing single-stroke streams is really not a good idea. Even soft steel pens can damage the paper surface, and in sharp turns, it’s hard to keep an even line width even with the best ones out there; re-inking takes a lot of time, and often results in a rough, jagged line. A common fine-tipped quill pen works well on any type of paper.

[110]

[110]

Double Line Streams and Rivers.

—In maps of a small scale from 8 to 32 miles to the inch, it is usual to darken the north-western bank, supposing the light to fall from the N.W. corner of the map; but on maps of a large scale it is usual to attend strictly to the height of the banks, and the draughtsman should carefully represent the exact nature of each bank on his field-sketch or plane-table sheet.

—in maps at a small scale of 8 to 32 miles per inch, it's common to shade the north-western bank, assuming the light comes from the northwest corner of the map; however, in large-scale maps, it's important to focus on the actual height of the banks, and the draftsman should accurately depict the specific characteristics of each bank on their field sketch or plane-table sheet.

Colouring Streams or Rivers.

—Single stroke streams may be inked in with either a dark line of Prussian blue, or a light line in Indian ink may first be drawn and a streak of Prussian blue or cobalt run neatly along it. Cobalt is much used both in single and double stroke streams—it is certainly the prettiest and most lasting blue we have, and the preference should be given it, as it imparts a high finish to MS. maps.

—Single stroke streams can be filled in with either a dark line of Prussian blue, or a light line in Indian ink can be drawn first, followed by a neat streak of Prussian blue or cobalt along it. Cobalt is commonly used for both single and double stroke streams—it’s definitely the prettiest and most durable blue we have, and it should be favored because it gives a high-quality finish to hand-drawn maps.

In maps which contain much hilly ground, the streams should be drawn in with light ink and a very fine pen at first, and be re-drawn with dark ink or dark blue after the shading of the hills. Large rivers on all maps published in England are now coloured with a flat-wash of cobalt or Prussian blue. Some draughtsmen prefer shading rivers according to bends, and keeping the shade as falling from the N.W., but this system cannot be carried out on maps of a large scale, where the height of the bank is correctly represented.

In maps that have a lot of hills, the streams should be drawn lightly with fine ink at first, and then redrawn with darker ink or dark blue after shading the hills. Large rivers on all maps published in England are now colored with flat washes of cobalt or Prussian blue. Some mapmakers prefer shading rivers based on their bends and keeping the shade coming from the northwest, but this method doesn't work well on large-scale maps where the height of the bank is accurately shown.

Islands and Sand-banks, Sandy and Pebbly Beds of Rivers.

—Islands which are only visible at low water, on well-coloured maps, are usually first washed over with a light shade of burnt or raw sienna, or a mixture of raw sienna and light red; the last-mentioned colour does not easily mix with water, and should not be used if any other can be substituted. After the tint is dry, dot finely with light Indian ink or dark burnt sienna. Sand-banks are coloured in the same way. Sandy beds may be similarly treated, omitting the dotting if pressed for time. Pebbly beds should first be tinted with a mixture of burnt or raw sienna, then dip into a dark shade of burnt sienna any coarse camel-hair brush, and splitting the brush by drawing it between the forefinger and thumb, dot in the tinted portions. Care must be taken to avoid having[111] too much colour in the brush, or the dots will run into each other and make ugly daubs.

—Islands which are only seen at low tide, on well-colored maps, are typically first brushed over with a light shade of burnt or raw sienna, or a mix of raw sienna and light red; the latter color doesn’t mix well with water, so it’s best to avoid it if you can choose another. Once the base color is dry, use light Indian ink or dark burnt sienna to add fine dots. Sandbanks are colored the same way. Sandy areas can be treated similarly, skipping the dotting if you're short on time. For pebbly areas, first tint with a mix of burnt or raw sienna, then take a coarse camel-hair brush dipped in a dark shade of burnt sienna, and split the brush by pulling it apart with your thumb and forefinger to dot the tinted parts. Be careful not to have too much paint on the brush, or the dots will blur into each other, creating messy spots.

Another very easy and successful method of dotting in sand or pebbly beds is with a tooth-brush. First, on tracing or any other thin paper, trace out exactly the limit of the tinted portion requiring dotting, cut out these portions from the trace and place it correctly over the original, dip a tooth-brush lightly into a saucer of colour of the required depth of tint, and holding it in the left hand over the uncovered portions, with the forefinger of the right hand or the blade of a pen-knife, gently splutter the colour from the brush; when it is necessary to cover a large space with dots, this will be found the simplest and most speedy way of doing it.

Another very easy and effective method for dotting in sand or pebbly areas is to use a toothbrush. First, on some tracing paper or any thin paper, exactly trace the outline of the area that needs dotting, cut out these sections from the trace, and place it accurately over the original. Lightly dip a toothbrush into a saucer of paint with the desired depth of color. Holding it with your left hand over the uncovered areas, use your right index finger or the edge of a pen knife to gently flick the color from the brush. When you need to cover a large area with dots, this is the simplest and quickest way to do it.

Roads and Pathways.

—The main or trunk roads in any country should be very distinctly represented by double and perfectly parallel ink lines, coloured between the lines with lake or carmine. District roads metalled, or those made between chief towns, should be shown by a single line coloured with lake or carmine. Unmetalled roads and paths by only a single line in burnt sienna.

—The main roads in any country should be clearly marked with double, perfectly parallel lines in ink, filled in with a reddish color like lake or carmine. The paved district roads, or those connecting major towns, should be represented by a single line in the same reddish color. Unpaved roads and paths should be shown with a single line in burnt sienna.

The same system should be carried out in roads in a mountainous country, and the draughtsman should give, either on the map or in the column of remarks, such information regarding roads as is likely to be useful to travellers or military authorities.

The same system should be applied to roads in a mountainous area, and the mapmaker should provide, either on the map or in the notes section, any information about the roads that would be helpful for travelers or military officials.

Mountain Passes.

—On large scale maps these should be distinctly marked, and the windings of the road correctly shown. Along the Pass, write the name in small lettering, and state whether it is practicable for horses, or fit only for men on foot. On maps of a small scale, it will be sufficient to show the pass by a zigzag line across the hollow, with a note as above.

—On large scale maps, these should be clearly marked, and the twists of the road should be accurately represented. Along the Pass, write the name in small font, and indicate whether it's suitable for horses or just for pedestrians. On small scale maps, it’s enough to show the pass with a zigzag line across the valley, along with a note as mentioned above.

Fords and Ferries, Toll-gates.

—Fords should be carefully noted and the name and depth of water during the rainy and dry seasons given, if possible. The number of boats at every ferry should be correctly ascertained, and noted on the map. Toll-gates may be shown on roads with a light line drawn across the road, and the words “Toll-gate” be clearly written on the side of the road.

—Fords should be properly documented, including the name and water depth during both rainy and dry seasons, if possible. The number of boats at each ferry should be accurately counted and marked on the map. Tollgates can be indicated on roads with a light line drawn across the road, and the words “Toll-gate” should be clearly written along the side of the road.

[112]

[112]

Encamping Grounds, Mile Stones, Wells, Springs and Tanks

, should be correctly shown and named on all maps.

, should be accurately displayed and labeled on all maps.

Telegraph Lines and Stations

 must be shown on all maps drawn to a scale of four miles to an inch and upwards, by the usual symbol. On maps of a small scale, show by dots or a thin line of yellow, giving a reference under the title. The Stations are of the first importance, and should be represented by the symbol.

must be shown on all maps made to a scale of four miles to an inch and above, using the standard symbol. On smaller-scale maps, indicate with dots or a thin yellow line, providing a reference below the title. The Stations are highly important and should be represented by the symbol.

Railways, Stations, and Termini.

—Railways are represented by a strong black line, with or without thin lines drawn at right angles to the main line. They should of course be very carefully and accurately laid down, as they form the chief feature in any country.

—Railways are shown by a bold black line, with or without thin lines crossing the main line at right angles. They should definitely be laid out very carefully and accurately, as they are the main feature in any country.

Stations are shown by well-defined circles, and the name given in plain lettering. Termini are best shown by blocks representing the size of the buildings according to the scale of the map.

Stations are indicated by clear circles, and the names appear in simple lettering. Terminals are best represented by blocks that reflect the size of the buildings based on the map's scale.

Except on maps of a very large scale, jungle should not be shown over hilly ground. Representing such objects as trees, jungle or brushwood, over plains or flat lands, on all ordinary scale maps, is very necessary, and the exact limits of the jungle or waste should be surveyed and correctly given by a dotted line, but over hilly ground it would be impossible to do so without impairing the beauty and hiding the features of the hill drawing. If it is actually necessary to make it known that the hills have jungle on them, let a foot-note to the effect be inserted amongst the remarks or under the title of the map. Under the head of remarks or notes, it is always very necessary to state the kind of jungle which exists in the surveyed tracts, for the information of speculators and timber merchants, and for the guidance of the lithographer or engraver. Notes on maps, whether statistical or geographical, can never be too full; they are useful in supplying at once information which could be obtained only from reading reports, and frequently they render topographical details intelligible where there might otherwise be doubt or misconception. They can be recorded in any spare corner or blank space on the map.

Except on very large scale maps, jungle should not be shown over hilly terrain. It's essential to represent features like trees, jungle, or brush over plains or flat areas on standard scale maps. The exact boundaries of the jungle or wasteland should be surveyed and accurately marked with a dotted line; however, over hilly ground, this would impair the visual appeal and obscure the features of the hill illustration. If it’s necessary to indicate that the hills have jungle, a footnote should be added in the remarks section or under the map title. In the remarks or notes section, it's also important to specify the type of jungle present in the surveyed areas for the benefit of investors and timber merchants, as well as to help the lithographer or engraver. Notes on maps, whether they are statistical or geographical, should be as detailed as possible; they provide information that would otherwise require reading reports, and they often clarify topographical details that might otherwise lead to confusion. These notes can be written in any available space on the map.

Size of Cities, Towns and Villages, and the different ways of representing them.

—It is of the utmost importance that all maps of a large[113] scale should show the size accurately of cities, towns and villages. If the scale admits of it, the several blocks or groups of houses with the roads between them should be correctly drawn.

—It is extremely important that all large-scale maps accurately represent the size of cities, towns, and villages. If the scale allows, individual blocks or groups of houses along with the roads between them should be clearly drawn.

Sketching, Shading, and Copying Hills.

—In sketching hills, always begin by fixing—1st. The drainage; 2nd. Those features which are most prominent, such as peaks, rocks, ledges of rock running with the strata of the hills, trees remarkable for some peculiarity in shape or size so as to be recognized from various positions, and any other objects likely to help the eye in filling in the details; and lastly, sketch the details, beginning always with the ground nearest yourself.

—When drawing hills, always start by establishing—1st. The drainage; 2nd. The most noticeable features like peaks, rocks, ledges of rock that align with the hills' layers, trees that stand out due to unique shapes or sizes so they can be identified from different angles, and any other elements that might assist in completing the details; finally, draw the finer details, starting with the ground closest to you.

Endeavour to portray your ground faithfully—1st. By preserving the direction and bend of streams as in nature; 2nd. By giving the run of the ridges correctly; 3rd. By fixing the peaks, ledges of rock, precipitous falls and flats carefully; 4th. By showing the saddles or depressions between peaks, which can only be done by giving the peaks on either side sufficient relief in shading; 5th. By attending strictly to the true breadth of valleys; 6th. By suppressing all hollows with a suitable depth of tint; 7th. By careful representation of the banks of streams in the valleys; and lastly, by finishing shades and touches, in which is comprehended the retouching with brush or pen work the entire piece, strengthening the shade of the higher ridges and peaks to show their relative heights, and suppressing the white tint along the ridges.

Make sure to accurately represent your landscape—1st. By keeping the direction and curve of streams like they are in nature; 2nd. By accurately showing the flow of the ridges; 3rd. By clearly marking the peaks, rock ledges, steep drops, and flat areas; 4th. By illustrating the saddles or dips between peaks, which can only be achieved by giving the peaks on either side the right shading; 5th. By paying close attention to the actual width of valleys; 6th. By shading all hollows with an appropriate depth of color; 7th. By carefully depicting the banks of streams in the valleys; and finally, by adding finishing touches, which includes retouching the entire piece with a brush or pen to enhance the shading of the higher ridges and peaks to highlight their relative heights, and minimizing the white color along the ridges.

Many excellent draughtsmen are in the habit of leaving the ridge of mountain ranges quite white; this is evidently a mistake, for, unless the ridge of any range of hills is of one uniform height from end to end, it cannot correctly be left white. Thus a wrong impression is conveyed of the surface of the ridge, the white streaks look harsh and are displeasing to the eye, and a stiff and unartistic look is given to the finish of the drawing.

Many skilled artists often leave the tops of mountain ranges completely white; this is clearly a mistake, because unless the top of a mountain range is the same height all the way across, it shouldn't be left white. This creates an inaccurate impression of the ridge's surface, the white lines look harsh and are unappealing, making the overall drawing appear stiff and unartistic.

The means of communication, whether by roads or minor tracks, are important, both for civil and military purposes, and should be carefully inserted in the map. This can generally be done with facility in a hilly country, as the fixed marks will be visible in sufficient[114] number along the road, so that the latter may be drawn in at once by plane-table operations along the line of communication to be surveyed. In flat countries, or where the view is circumscribed, it may be necessary to resort to measurements and plotting; but should any case occur where the fixed points of reference are far apart, the traverse system must be resorted to, and the road should be plotted from computed co-ordinates.

The ways of getting around, whether on major roads or smaller paths, are crucial for both civilian and military needs, and should be accurately marked on the map. This is usually straightforward in hilly areas since the landmarks will be clearly visible along the route, allowing for the immediate drawing of the road through surveying with a plane table. In flat areas, or where visibility is limited, it may be necessary to take measurements and create plots; however, if there are situations where the reference points are far apart, the traverse system should be used, and the road should be plotted from calculated coordinates.

Field Sketching.

—Field sketches are made with the lead pencil, and may be drawn upon every page of the compass-book, or upon the alternate pages, at the option of the topographer. In the former case, the bearings and distances are recorded upon the drawing; in the latter, the record occupies the left-hand page, and the sketch the opposite one. The page for sketching should be ruled in squares, with blue or red ink, forming thus an indeterminate scale, the length of the sides of the squares being assumed at pleasure, according to the nature of the ground. Both the record and the sketch are read from the bottom of the page upward. Suppose the stations of the survey to be 100 feet apart; then, assuming the side of the square to be 100 feet, commence the sketch at the bottom of the page—in the centre, if the survey promises to be tolerably straight; if otherwise, at some point to the right or left of the centre, the reason for which will be explained directly. Let the bearing from the first station, the starting point or zero, be N. 10° E. Draw a line from the bottom of the page upward; the side of the square being assumed 100 feet, number the stations upon the squares as far as the line is run, say 325 feet, and write the compass angle down along this line. Let the bearing from the second station, or No. 1, be N. 1° W.; draw a line, making, as nearly as can be judged by the eye, the proper angle with the last bearing, and proceed as before. When the page is exhausted, commence with a vertical line at the bottom of the next one, marking upon it the remainder of the old bearing, and making, by the eye, a new series of approximate protractions as before. If it can be foreseen, as in most cases it can, that the line of survey will be very crooked, bending, for example, from left to right, then commence the bearing at[115] the bottom of the page accordingly, beginning at a point on the extreme right, and running it diagonally to the left, so as to make due allowance for the great deflection anticipated in the next bearing. Such cases may be foreseen in running around an inclosure, or in following a curving stream or ridge. The advantages of the system of squares in sketch books completely overbalance the one disadvantage, which is, that the diagonal bearings will not make exact distances upon the squares, while the vertical and horizontal ones will. It will be remembered that the surveying book is designed to be exact only in its record and the general features of the ground, and that a slight change of scale is not material, as it can be made exact when the survey is protracted upon the map. By these approximate protractions, any page of the book of survey conveys a very just notion of the bearings and distances, and of the relative positions of the general features of the ground. The first station being at the bottom of the page, note down, in the space between it and the second one, all the features of the ground passed over by the line of survey; as to whether it is cultivated, forest, marsh, &c.; whether it is crossed by streams, ditches, &c., and their width; if it rises or falls; about what degree of slope, &c. On both sides of the line introduce, according to the scale, and their distances, as judged by the eye, all topographical objects within sight, such as buildings, roads, streams, hills, &c., &c., drawing them to the scale if possible, and if they cannot be got upon the page, describing briefly their nature and position. In sketching hills endeavour to project as many horizontal curves as possible, which should be lightly put in, and then the shading lines may be drawn over them. The degree of slope should be frequently written down in numbers upon the sketch. The names of localities, streams, hills, farms, &c., should also be entered.

—Field sketches are created using a pencil and can be drawn on every page of the compass book or on alternate pages, depending on the preference of the topographer. In the first case, the bearings and distances are noted on the drawing; in the second, the record fills the left-hand page, and the sketch occupies the opposite one. The sketching page should be ruled into squares with blue or red ink, forming an indeterminate scale, where the length of the squares’ sides can be chosen based on the terrain. Both the record and the sketch are read from the bottom of the page upwards. If the survey stations are 100 feet apart, and assuming the side of the square is 100 feet, start the sketch at the bottom of the page—in the center for a fairly straight survey; otherwise, begin slightly to the right or left of the center, the reason for which will be explained shortly. Let the bearing from the first station, the starting point, be N. 10° E. Draw a line from the bottom of the page upwards; if each square represents 100 feet, number the stations on the squares along the line, for example, up to 325 feet, noting the compass angle alongside this line. If the bearing from the second station (No. 1) is N. 1° W., draw a line, estimating the angle with the previous bearing, and continue as before. When the page is full, start with a vertical line at the bottom of the next page, marking the remainder of the old bearing, and visually create a new series of approximate protractions as before. If it’s likely, as it usually is, that the survey line will be very curved—bending from left to right, for instance—start the bearing at the bottom of the page from a point on the far right, running it diagonally to the left to account for the significant deflection expected in the next bearing. Such situations can be anticipated when surveying around an enclosure or following a winding stream or ridge. The benefits of using squares in sketchbooks far outweigh the single drawback that diagonal bearings won’t correspond exactly to distances on the squares, while vertical and horizontal ones will. It's important to remember that the surveying book is meant to be precise only in its record and the general layout of the ground, and a slight scale change isn’t a problem since exactness can be achieved when the survey is mapped. Through these rough protractions, any page of the surveying book gives a good idea of the bearings and distances, as well as the relative positions of the major features of the landscape. With the first station at the bottom of the page, note all the features of the terrain crossed by the survey line in the space between it and the second station, such as whether it’s cultivated land, forest, marsh, etc.; whether it is intersected by streams, ditches, etc., and their widths; if the land rises or falls; about how steep the slope is, etc. On both sides of the line, add, based on the scale and distances as estimated visually, all visible topographical features, like buildings, roads, streams, hills, etc., drawing them to scale if possible, and if there isn’t enough space on the page, briefly describe their nature and location. When sketching hills, try to outline as many horizontal curves as possible, which should be lightly sketched first, and then the shading lines can be added over them. The slope degree should be frequently noted in numbers on the sketch. Also, include the names of places, streams, hills, farms, etc.

Thus far we have supposed a measured line upon the ground, to which the situation and dimensions of objects might be referred. It is much more difficult to embody the relative positions and dimensions, where all is left to the eye. Here a cultivated judgment is of the greatest value. Practice alone can make a good sketcher under such[116] circumstances. Rules must, from the nature of the case, be few and general. In the first place, all objects within the field of vision are presented to the eye in perspective, whereas the sketch is to be a plan. The apparent diminution of dimensions in distant objects must therefore be corrected on the plan. For example, the windings of a crooked stream, or a road, in perspective, are much exaggerated in retiring into the distance; they must therefore be straightened out in the sketch more and more, as they are more removed. 2nd. In looking at variously placed hills from a somewhat elevated station, the eye will in some cases look directly, or perpendicularly, at the face of some slopes, while in others, the surface of the slope, if prolonged, will pass through the eye, and will not be seen in its true dimensions, though its inclination may be judged. In sketching the shapes of hills, bodies of water, masses of forest, &c., these facts must be taken into consideration, and to ensure skill, eye sketches of a small portion of ground having well-marked features must be frequently made, and compared with measurements of the same features. In sketching a single hill, the best station is at the summit. First endeavour to represent the lowest horizontal curve of its surface; then a medial one; then the form of the level space at the summit, or the highest horizontal curve. Others may then be introduced between these, until the ground is sufficiently expressed. The angles of inclination should be frequently noted down in numbers; all accidents of ground, such as ravines, rocks, &c., should be carefully placed, and all other objects, such as houses, fences, trees, &c., should be put down in their proper relative positions and dimensions. Having thus prepared a skeleton of horizontal curves, numbered as to inclination and heights, the sketch will always serve a useful purpose without any lines of greatest descent. After sufficient practice in this method, the eye will become so cultivated as to enable the draughtsman to express the form of ground by lines of descent at once, the mind conceiving the position of the horizontal curves, and thus supplying the necessary data for the shading lines, the relative thickness and length of which for the different slopes is a matter very easy of acquirement. But this should[117] not be attempted until the method by horizontal sections is thoroughly mastered.

So far, we've assumed there's a measured line on the ground to refer to when determining the location and size of objects. It's a lot more challenging to capture relative positions and sizes when everything relies on the eye. A trained eye is incredibly valuable here. Only practice can develop a good sketcher in these situations. The rules, by nature, must be few and broad. Firstly, everything within the field of vision appears to the eye in perspective, while the sketch will be a plan. Therefore, the apparent size reduction in distant objects has to be corrected on the plan. For instance, the twists of a winding river or road appear much more pronounced as they recede into the distance; hence, they need to be straightened out in the sketch as they move farther away. Secondly, when viewing hills from a higher vantage point, sometimes the eye looks directly at the slope's face, while other times, the slope continues beyond the eye's line of sight, making it hard to see its true size, although its slope can be assessed. When sketching hills, bodies of water, forests, etc., these aspects must be considered. To improve skills, it’s essential to frequently sketch small areas with distinct features and compare them with actual measurements of those features. When sketching a single hill, the best viewpoint is from the top. Start by representing the lowest horizontal curve of its surface, then a middle curve, and finally, the shape of the flat area at the summit or the highest horizontal curve. You can then add additional curves in between until the ground is well represented. Regularly note the angles of incline in numbers; accurately place the terrain features like ravines and rocks, and position other objects like houses, fences, and trees correctly in relation to each other regarding their sizes and positions. With this framework of horizontal curves labeled with inclination and height, the sketch will be useful without needing lines of greatest descent. After practicing this method enough, the eye will become trained enough for the artist to express the terrain shape through descent lines immediately, with the mind visualizing where the horizontal curves are, thus providing the necessary information for shading lines. The relative thickness and length for different slopes are straightforward to learn. However, this should not be attempted until you have thoroughly mastered the horizontal sections method.

It is easy thus to make a sketch of a single hill, but when there are many, and the general face of the country is sloping also, the difficulties of representing the connection of the different hills at their bases are considerable. In such cases the direction and lengths of the valleys, or water-courses if there are any, must first be noted, bearing in mind the illusions of perspective in both its effects, previously mentioned. Then establish the positions of the different summits, marking down their relative heights, after which put in the other objects to be represented, such as roads, trees, buildings, &c., referring their positions to each other, and correcting them where they are found to disagree. Horizontal curves present the readiest means to the beginner in sketching declivities. When, after some practice, the form of a body suggests, as it always will, its horizontal sections, then it will be time to resort at once to the lines of greatest descent. The greatest difficulties to be overcome in the practice of eye-sketching are, 1st, that of converting a perspective view into a plan, in all its true proportions; and 2nd, in forming a just conception of the intersections of different slopes at their bases. Hence the rule, to project first upon the sketch, all the lowest lines, or water-courses, and then the highest parts or summits. Then the middle lines and objects may be placed, and the sketch filled up by referring all others to those three groups which may be regarded as determined.

It’s easy to sketch a single hill, but when there are many hills and the landscape is sloping, it becomes challenging to show how the different hills connect at their bases. In these cases, you need to first note the direction and lengths of any valleys or water courses, keeping in mind the perspective illusions previously mentioned. Then, establish the positions of the different peaks, noting their relative heights, followed by adding other elements like roads, trees, buildings, etc., checking their positions against each other and correcting any discrepancies. Horizontal curves are the easiest way for beginners to sketch slopes. After some practice, when the shape of an object suggests its horizontal sections, you can start using the lines of steepest descent. The biggest challenges in sketching from observation are: 1) converting a perspective view into a plan with accurate proportions; and 2) properly understanding how different slopes intersect at their bases. Therefore, the rule is to first project all the lowest lines or water courses onto the sketch, followed by the highest points or peaks. Then, you can place the middle lines and objects, filling in the sketch by referencing all other elements to those three groups, which can be considered established.

The lead pencil for field drawing should be moderately hard, and the general tone of the drawing should be rather light. The shading of slopes ought not to overpower by its depth the distinctness of other objects, and the pencil should be so used and of such a quality as not to be easily defaced by rubbing.

The lead pencil for outdoor drawing should be moderately hard, and the overall tone of the drawing should be fairly light. The shading of slopes shouldn't be so deep that it distracts from the clarity of other objects, and the pencil should be used in a way and be of a quality that it doesn’t get easily smudged by rubbing.

We have already described some of the duties of the “examiner” in verifying and supplying detail in the field. The following fuller exposition of those duties and the methods of performing them is taken from an excellent little treatise on Land Surveying, by John A. Smith, C.E.

We have already outlined some of the responsibilities of the “examiner” in checking and providing details in the field. The following detailed explanation of those duties and how to carry them out is taken from an excellent little book on Land Surveying by John A. Smith, C.E.

[118]

[118]

Examination of Maps in the Field.

—For the purpose of the examination, the “examiner” should be furnished with an elegant and accurate trace, ink copy, of the plotted detail of the district, and he should be provided with a suitable sketch case, lined with prepared ass skin, pencil, linear scale, chain, &c., and labourers. The trace copy, in one sheet, should be in extent not more than can be conveniently secured in the sketch case. It is desirable that the marginal detail on the trace copy shall be common to the adjoining sheets for examination. If the district be extensive, and if there be no more than one examiner engaged on the examination, adjoining sheets should not be given to the same examiner, that the character of the examiner’s work may be ascertained by independent examinations of the same marginal detail. In the examination of the detail representation on a map the “examiner” should be mainly guided by a few leading considerations; these are:—

—For the examination, the “examiner” should receive a clear and precise ink copy of the plotted details of the area, along with an appropriate sketch case lined with prepared leather, a pencil, a scale, a measuring chain, etc., and laborers. The trace copy, on a single sheet, should be small enough to fit easily in the sketch case. It’s important that the margin details on the trace copy match those of the adjacent sheets for review. If the area is large and only one examiner is working on it, neighboring sheets shouldn’t be assigned to the same examiner, so the quality of their work can be evaluated through independent assessments of the same margin details. When reviewing the details on a map, the “examiner” should primarily be guided by a few key considerations; these are:—

1. The position of a straight line, or detail, on the map will be correct when its actual and plotted position on the ground and map makes equal angles with another known line and intersects it in a known point, the position of which line and point on the ground has been previously ascertained to be correctly represented on the map.

1. The location of a straight line or detail on the map will be accurate when its real and plotted position on the ground and map forms equal angles with another known line and intersects it at a known point, the location of which line and point on the ground has already been confirmed to be correctly shown on the map.

2. The line, or detail, will be correctly laid down—given in magnitude and position—when its position and length on the ground and map are ascertained to correspond accurately.

2. The line, or detail, will be accurately drawn—specified in size and location—when its position and length on the ground and map are confirmed to match precisely.

From 1 and 2 it will be seen—

From 1 and 2, it will be clear—

a. That the point of intersection of two given straight lines on the ground, and the corresponding point on the map, will be a given point on the map, if the corresponding lines on the map be ascertained to be correctly laid down in position. And,

a. The point where two straight lines meet on the ground, along with the corresponding point on the map, will be a specific point on the map, as long as the lines on the map are confirmed to be accurately positioned. And,

b. That any two points being given or correctly determined, the straight line terminating in them will be a given line. Further,

b. Given any two points that are specified or accurately determined, the straight line connecting them will be a defined line. Additionally,

c. That a straight line traced or drawn through given points, is given in position. It should be kept in view that lines may be more accurately traced, and to a greater distance, with the naked eye, when the party tracing is rather above than below the level of the field on which the trace shall be made.

c. A straight line drawn through specified points is established in position. It's important to remember that lines can be traced more accurately and over greater distances with the naked eye when the person tracing is positioned a bit above rather than below the level of the field where the tracing is being done.

[119]

[119]

It may be also seen that a point on the map which is the common point of intersection of three straight lines drawn through well-defined points in the detail will be a given point, if lines traced through the corresponding detail points on the ground be found to have a common point of intersection. And further, that the correct determination of two such points on the map determines, as already stated, the position of a straight line through these points. The determination, in the above manner, of three such common points of intersection correctly determines the representation of a given triangle. In the examination the sides of the triangle determined by intersections, as above, should be measured on the ground, to ascertain and verify the accuracy of the determinations of the angular points on the trace or map. The production of detail lines, and lines traced through plotted points, should be taken up in the chain measurements of the sides of this triangle. Through these verified points straight lines should be traced, and drawn in pencil, to well-defined points in the detail, such as the buttals of fences, the corners of houses and walls, gate piers, &c. On these lines the intersected and neighbouring detail should be examined by chain and scale measurements. In the measurement of the lines the internal and adjacent external detail should be very carefully examined, and corrected on the map where found in error. The examination of the detail should be carried forward by the production and intersection of given lines, and also by chain measurements from given points, to verify the position of the detail or other points on the map. This examination should be continued to the limits of the trace sheet. In remote parts of the trace and district, lines of verification should be drawn, traced on the ground and measured with the chain to verify the scale measurements by the examination. These lines should be long, and in situations affording few facilities for the accurate determination on the map of the position of the plotted detail by other modes of examination.

It can also be seen that a point on the map, where three straight lines drawn through well-defined points in the details intersect, will represent a specific location if the lines drawn through the corresponding detail points on the ground also intersect at a common point. Furthermore, accurately determining two such points on the map establishes the position of a straight line through those points. By determining three such common intersection points in this way, the representation of a given triangle is accurately established. In the examination, the sides of the triangle determined by the intersections should be measured on the ground to check and confirm the accuracy of the angles marked on the trace or map. The construction of detail lines and lines drawn through plotted points should be included in the chain measurements of the triangle's sides. Lines should be drawn with a pencil through these verified points to clear reference points in the details, such as fence posts, corners of buildings and walls, gate piers, etc. On these lines, both the intersected and nearby details should be checked with chain and scale measurements. During the measurement of the lines, both the internal details and adjacent external details should be carefully inspected and corrected on the map if errors are found. The examination of the details should continue by extending and intersecting given lines, as well as by chain measurements from known points, to verify the position of the details or other points on the map. This examination should extend to the edges of the trace sheet. In remote areas of the trace and district, verification lines should be drawn, checked on the ground, and measured with a chain to confirm the scale measurements through examination. These lines should be long and placed in areas that offer few opportunities for accurately determining the position of the plotted details through other examination methods.

The straight line passing through the extremities, or other well-defined points in curved detail, should be regarded as a detail line, and the position of the intermediate curved detail verified by ordinates[120] or tangents. Buildings and adjacent detail should be carefully examined by productions, &c., because of the greater difficulties these details usually present to the surveyor and plotter, and the consequent liability to small errors in the position of some of the plotted points, which affect the direction of lines determined on them.

The straight line connecting the endpoints or other clear points in curved details should be seen as a detail line, and the location of the intermediate curved details should be checked using ordinates[120] or tangents. Buildings and nearby details need to be carefully analyzed through productions, etc., due to the additional challenges these details often pose to the surveyor and plotter, along with the resulting potential for minor errors in the placement of some plotted points, which can impact the direction of lines based on them.

Among the Plates appended to this work will be found several examples of map drawing suitable for reference. Plate 16 shows the signs used on ordinary maps and charts. Plates 29 and 30 contain signs used chiefly upon Indian and colonial maps; and Plates 31 and 32 give the signs employed upon military maps, with a section and a plan of fortifications. These signs should be neatly drawn and their dimensions suited to the scale of the map, the same remark applying to these as to trees in elevation. Plate 1 is a plan showing the principal characters of work used in mapping. This plan has been very carefully compiled and drawn to render it suitable as a plan of reference. Plate 12 illustrates the construction and colouring of hills according to the several methods described in the preceding Sections. Other examples, with rocky cliffs, will be found on Plate 14. Plate 18 contains a piece of the Ordnance map drawn to a scale of one inch to the mile, and furnishes an example of finished work. Upon the same Plate will be found a piece of chart showing soundings, intended as a reference for hydrographers and others engaged in marine surveys. And Plate 28 shows the manner in which geological maps are prepared. The whole of these examples will be found worthy of careful study as specimens of the draughtsman’s art.

Among the Plates added to this work, you'll find several examples of map drawing that are useful for reference. Plate 16 displays the symbols used on standard maps and charts. Plates 29 and 30 include symbols mainly found on Indian and colonial maps, while Plates 31 and 32 show the symbols used on military maps, along with a section and a plan of fortifications. These symbols should be drawn neatly, and their sizes should match the scale of the map, just like with trees in elevation. Plate 1 is a plan that illustrates the main features used in mapping. This plan has been carefully compiled and drawn to serve as a useful reference. Plate 12 demonstrates how to construct and color hills according to the methods described in the previous sections. More examples, including rocky cliffs, can be found on Plate 14. Plate 18 includes a section of the Ordnance map drawn to a scale of one inch to the mile and serves as an example of polished work. On the same Plate, you'll find a section of a chart showing soundings, meant as a reference for hydrographers and others involved in marine surveys. Lastly, Plate 28 explains how geological maps are created. All of these examples are worth studying closely as representations of the draughtsman's craft.

The Plates relating to this Section are Nos. 1, 10, 12, 14, 18, 28, 29, 30, 31, and 32.

The Plates related to this Section are Nos. 1, 10, 12, 14, 18, 28, 29, 30, 31, and 32.

[121]

[121]


Section VI.—Mechanical and Architectural Designs.

It is not within the scope of the present work to explain and to illustrate the principles according to which mechanical drawings are executed. These must be studied in special treatises on Projection. The several methods of giving expression and embellishment to this class of drawings have, however, been fully described, and the principles upon which these methods are founded carefully explained. It now remains for us to add a few general remarks and some detailed instructions on the practical application of these principles and methods.

It’s not the purpose of this work to explain and illustrate the principles behind mechanical drawings. Those should be studied in specialized texts on Projection. However, the various ways to express and enhance this type of drawing have been thoroughly described, and the principles behind these techniques have been clearly explained. Now we just need to include a few general comments and some detailed guidance on how to practically apply these principles and methods.

Before commencing the delineation of any machine, the draughtsman should make himself thoroughly acquainted with its character; that is, he should ascertain the nature of the work it is designed to perform, the means by which it performs that work, and the manner of its construction. This preliminary study is necessary to enable him to obtain a good general idea of the more important parts, which he will have to give prominence to in the drawing, and to understand the nature of the various connections between the numerous pieces of which the machine is composed. The dimensions of the several parts must be carefully taken, and when drawing from actual machinery, rough sketches should be made to serve as a guide in getting out the complete drawing. The dimensions should be clearly marked upon such sketches. As a general rule, it is best to begin with the ground line and position of main driving shafts, from which dimensions may be taken in every direction. The manner of writing the dimensions, whether upon the rough sketch or upon the complete drawing, should always be thus dimension for lateral, and thus dimension for vertical dimensions. To enable the draughtsman to take these with accuracy, he should be provided with a pair of callipers for measuring the diameters of shafts, a plumb-line for obtaining lateral distances when the objects are not in the same horizontal plane, and a two-foot rule.

Before starting to sketch any machine, the designer should familiarize themselves with its features; that is, they should find out the type of work it's meant to do, how it does that work, and how it's built. This initial research is important to help them get a solid understanding of the key parts they need to focus on in the drawing, as well as to grasp the various connections between the many components that make up the machine. The measurements of the different parts must be taken carefully, and when drawing from real machinery, quick sketches should be made as a reference for creating the final drawing. The dimensions should be clearly indicated on these sketches. Generally, it's best to start with the ground line and the position of the main driving shafts, from which measurements can be taken in all directions. Dimensions should be written as follows: dimension for horizontal dimensions, and as follows dimension for vertical dimensions. To help the designer measure accurately, they should have a pair of calipers for measuring shaft diameters, a plumb line for measuring lateral distances when the objects aren’t on the same horizontal plane, and a two-foot ruler.

[122]

[122]

The chief point to be attended to in commencing the drawing of a machine is to obtain the correct positions of the centre lines of its principal component parts, especial regard being had to the centres of motion. These centre lines have been explained in a former Section. Having laid down these lines accurately in their relative positions, separate sketches may be made on a large scale of each part of the machine, and the details of each part constructed upon each corresponding centre line in succession, until the whole machine is built up. The centre lines should be drawn in red, and the dimensions should be laid off on each side of them. It will frequently be necessary to take a careful section, to obtain sufficient information from which to draw the plan and the elevation.

The main thing to focus on when starting to draw a machine is getting the center lines of its main parts in the right positions, especially paying attention to the centers of motion. These center lines were explained in an earlier section. Once these lines are accurately laid out in their relative positions, separate large-scale sketches can be made for each part of the machine, and the details for each part can be designed along each corresponding center line in order, until the entire machine is assembled. The center lines should be drawn in red, and dimensions should be marked on each side of them. It will often be necessary to take a careful section to gather enough information to create the plan and elevation.

With respect to the written dimensions on a drawing, it may be remarked that they cannot be too full or too numerous. Indeed, without complete written dimensions a drawing is almost useless; for though a scale may and should in all cases be attached, great labour would be required to make use of the drawing by means of the scale only. Every dimension which an engineer is likely to require to know should, therefore, be plainly written. Nor is it sufficient to give a dimension once only, as on the plan, for example, and to omit it on the elevation or on the section. It should never be necessary to refer to another drawing to find a dimension. The lettering should be clearly executed, and the direction of the lettering should be the same as that of the figuring, an example of which has been given; that is, it should read from the front or from the right-hand side of the drawing.

Regarding the written dimensions on a drawing, it's worth noting that they can’t be too detailed or excessive. In fact, without complete written dimensions, a drawing is nearly useless; even though a scale will and should always be included, it would take a lot of effort to use the drawing based solely on the scale. Every dimension an engineer might need to know should be clearly written out. It's also not enough to list a dimension just once, like on the plan, and skip it on the elevation or section. You should never have to look at another drawing to find a dimension. The lettering should be neat, and the direction of the lettering should match the direction of the numbers; for example, it should be readable from the front or the right-hand side of the drawing.

If a drawing is to be coloured, the lettering, and all dark lines, such as shade lines, must be left till after the colour has been applied. On all coloured drawings the draughtsman should endeavour to obtain a bright, clear tint by repeating the washes a sufficient number of times. In preparing a flat-wash the tint should be mixed up slightly darker than is required, and the solid colouring matter allowed to settle before using. The solution, being poured off without disturbing the sediment, will give a perfectly clear and pure tint. Tints for colouring perspective drawings should always be prepared in this[123] manner. The methods of laying on flat-washes and of shading by colours have been described in former Sections. The following additional remarks on colour shading are taken from Worthen’s ‘Cyclopædia of Drawing.’

If a drawing is going to be colored, the lettering and all dark lines, like shading lines, should be saved until after the color has been applied. In all colored drawings, the artist should aim for a bright, clear tint by applying multiple washes as needed. When preparing a flat wash, the tint should be mixed slightly darker than required, and the solid coloring material should be allowed to settle before use. Carefully pouring off the solution without disturbing the sediment will result in a perfectly clear and pure tint. Tints for coloring perspective drawings should always be prepared this way. The methods for applying flat washes and shading with colors have been discussed in earlier sections. The following additional notes on color shading are taken from Worthen’s ‘Cyclopædia of Drawing.’

A means of adding considerably to the definiteness of a coloured mechanical drawing, and of promoting, in a remarkable degree, its effective appearance, is obtained by leaving a very narrow margin of light on the edges of all surfaces, no matter what may be the angles they form with the surfaces that join them. This should be done invariably; we do not even except those edges which happen to have shadows falling upon them. In such cases, however, this margin, instead of being left quite white, should be slightly subdued. The difficulty of achieving this effect of imparting a clear, regular, unbroken appearance to these lines of light seems very formidable, and, indeed, almost insuperable. The hand of the colourist may be as steady and confident as a hand can be, and yet fail to guide the brush, at an almost inappreciable distance from a straight or a circular line, with that precision and sharpness so requisite for the production of this beautiful effect. We shall, however, explain a novel and an effective method of arriving at this most desirable result.

A great way to add clarity to a colored mechanical drawing and significantly enhance its overall appearance is by leaving a very narrow margin of light along the edges of all surfaces, regardless of the angles they create with the adjoining surfaces. This should always be done, even on edges that have shadows. In those cases, though, the margin should be slightly toned down instead of being left completely white. Achieving this clear, consistent, and unbroken look for these lines of light can seem very challenging, almost impossible. Even if the colorist has a steady hand, they may struggle to keep the brush an almost imperceptible distance from a straight or circular line with the precision needed to create this beautiful effect. However, we will outline a new and effective method to achieve this highly sought-after result.

Suppose the object about to receive the colour to be the elevation of a long flat rod or lever, on the edge of which a line of light is to be left. Fill the drawing pen, as full as it will conveniently hold, with tint, and draw a broad line just within, but not touching, the edge of the lever exposed to the light. As it is essential to the successful accomplishment of the operation that this line of colour should not dry, even partially, before the tint on the whole side of the lever has been laid on, it will be well to draw the pen a second time very lightly along the line, so as to deposit as much tint as possible. Immediately this has been done, the brush, filled with the same tint, should be passed along so as to join the inner edge of this line of colour and the whole surface of the lever to be filled in. By this means a distinct and regular line of light is obtained without sacrifice of time. A still more expeditious way of colouring such[124] surfaces is to draw a second line of colour along and in contact with the opposite edge of the lever or other object, and to fill in the intermediate space between the two wet lines with the brush. In this way a clear, uniform outline to the tint is obtained. The blades of the drawing pen must not be sharp, and care must be taken not to press heavily upon it, as otherwise the blades will leave their course visible—an unsightly betrayal of mechanical means to obtain such regularity in the colouring. Flat circular surfaces may be treated in the same way, by using the pen compass instead of the drawing pen. When such surfaces are large it will be judicious to colour them in halves or in quadrantal spaces, but great care must be taken to join the parts neatly. The lines of junction may be obliterated by slightly washing them, or by laying a very light tint over the whole surface, taking care in crossing the lines of junction to rub them lightly with the brush.

Imagine that the object you're about to color is the raised part of a long, flat rod or lever, with a line of light left on its edge. Fill the drawing pen as much as you can with color, and draw a thick line just inside, but not touching, the edge of the lever that's exposed to the light. It's important for this line of color to not dry, even a little, before you've applied color to the entire side of the lever. So it's best to go over the line again lightly with the pen to deposit as much color as possible. Once that's done, take a brush filled with the same color and run it along to connect the inner edge of this color line to the entire surface of the lever. This method gives you a clear line of light quickly. A faster way to color such surfaces is to draw a second line of color right along the opposite edge of the lever or object, then fill in the space between the two wet lines with the brush. This creates a neat, even outline for the color. Make sure the blades of the drawing pen aren't sharp, and be careful not to press down too hard, or the blades will leave a visible mark—an obvious sign of the mechanical technique used to achieve that regularity in coloring. You can use the same approach for flat circular surfaces, just swap the drawing pen for a pen compass. For larger surfaces, it's wise to color them in halves or in quadrants, but you need to be careful to join the parts neatly. Any lines where the parts meet can be smoothed out by lightly washing them, or by applying a very light color over the whole surface, being careful to gently mix the areas where the lines meet with the brush.

The line of light upon cylindrical objects may be beautifully produced by the same means. To indicate this line with perfect regularity is highly important, for if strict uniformity be not maintained throughout its length, the object will appear crooked or distorted. Having marked in pencil the position of the light, and filled the drawing pen with a just perceptible tint, draw a line of colour on one side of the line of light. Then, with the brush filled with the same tint, fill up the space unoccupied by the shade tint, within which the very light colour in the brush will disappear. The portion of the surface on the other side of the line of light being treated in the same way, the desired effect, of a stream of light, clear and mathematically regular, will be obtained. The effectiveness and expeditiousness of this method will be most noticeable on long circular rods of small diameter, where a want of accuracy is more immediately perceptible. The extreme depth of shade, as well as the line of light, may, on such rods, be marked by filling the pen with dark shade tint, and drawing it exactly over the line representing the deepest part of the shade. On either side, and joining this strip of dark colour, another, composed of lighter tint, is to be drawn. Others successively[125] lighter should follow, until, on one side, the line of the rod is joined, and, on the other, the lightest part of the rod is nearly reached. The line of light is then to be shown, and the faint tint used at this part of the operation spread with the brush lightly over the whole of that portion of the rod situate on either side of this line, thus blending into smooth rotundity the graduated strips of tint drawn with the pen.

The line of light on cylindrical objects can be beautifully created in the same way. It’s crucial to show this line consistently, as any lack of uniformity along its length can make the object look crooked or distorted. After marking the position of the light with a pencil and loading the drawing pen with a barely noticeable tint, draw a line of color on one side of the light line. Then, using a brush filled with the same tint, fill in the area not covered by the shade tint, where the light color in the brush will blend in. Repeat this process for the portion of the surface on the other side of the light line, and you’ll achieve the desired effect of a clear and mathematically precise stream of light. This method is particularly effective and efficient on long, thin circular rods, where any inaccuracies are more obvious. The deepest shade and the light line can be marked on these rods by loading the pen with a dark shade tint and drawing it directly over where the shade is deepest. On either side of this dark strip, draw another one with a lighter tint. Continue adding successively lighter tints until one side meets the line of the rod and the other side nearly reaches the lightest part of the rod. Finally, show the line of light and use a light tint at this stage to brush lightly over the whole area on either side of this line, blending the graduated strips of tint drawn with the pen into a smooth rounded appearance.

For the correct representation of a building, plans, sections, and elevations are required. The plan is usually a horizontal section of the building close above the ground floor. The position and the dimensions of the walls and the rooms of a house are shown by this means. As the walls are shown in section in the plan, sections of the various walls must, of course, be supplied before the plan can be drawn. It is usual to colour the section of the walls in a ground plan; but not unfrequently a dark wash of Indian ink is preferred to colour. The number of sections required will depend upon the regularity of the building; but generally it will be found that two half-sections are sufficient. These two half-sections are usually placed side by side, separated by a single line. The lines on which they are constructed must be drawn distinctly on the plan, and lettered. The section is then described as “Section” or “Half-section” on A B, &c. Usually the line of section is broken in plan, and the section is then said to be on A B, C D, one half being on A B and the other half on C D. Separate sections to larger scales are required for the details of construction, such as joints of rafters, mouldings to windows, and other parts needing distinct representation. Elevations generally represent the whole of one side of the building, and every side that differs from the rest must have its own elevation. Such elevations are termed Front, Back, and End Elevations, or North, South, East, and West Elevations. In order to show the foundations, a section of the ground is sometimes given with an elevation; in such a case the level of the ground should be shown by a distinct line. Sometimes the portions of the structure below the ground are shown by dotted lines. Such portions should not be coloured. In getting out the drawings the plan should first be drawn, then the sections, and finally[126] the elevations. The colouring of elevations will afford the student an opportunity of applying the knowledge he may have acquired from a former Section of this work, and of displaying his artistic taste.

For an accurate representation of a building, you need plans, sections, and elevations. The plan is typically a horizontal slice of the building just above the ground floor, showing the layout and dimensions of the walls and rooms. Since the walls are represented in section on the plan, you need to provide sections of the various walls before the plan can be created. It's common to color the section of the walls in a ground plan, but sometimes a dark wash of Indian ink is preferred. The number of sections needed depends on how regular the building is, but generally, two half-sections are enough. These two half-sections are usually placed side by side, separated by a single line. The lines used for construction must be clearly drawn on the plan and labeled. The section is then labeled as “Section” or “Half-section” on A B, etc. Typically, the section line is broken in the plan, indicating that the section is on A B, C D, with one half on A B and the other half on C D. Separate sections at larger scales are needed for construction details, like rafter joints, window moldings, and other parts requiring clear representation. Elevations usually show one complete side of the building, and any side that differs must have its own elevation. These are called Front, Back, and End Elevations, or North, South, East, and West Elevations. To show the foundations, a section of the ground may be provided with an elevation; in this case, the ground level should be indicated with a distinct line. Sometimes, parts of the structure below ground are shown with dotted lines and should not be colored. When creating the drawings, the plan should be made first, then the sections, and finally the elevations. Coloring the elevations gives students a chance to apply what they've learned from previous sections of this work and show their artistic flair.

In the accompanying Plates will be found examples of colouring mechanical and architectural drawings. These should be studied in conjunction with the Section on colouring in the first part of this work. Plate 22 shows a piece of marine engine carefully coloured to indicate the material of which the several parts are made, and Plate 23 contains a piece of permanent way, consisting of wrought-iron rail and bolt, cast-iron chair and wooden sleeper and block, and an elevation of a skew bridge, accurately coloured and shaded in accordance with the principles already explained. It is not within the scope of this work to treat the subject of projection, whether orthographic, isometrical, or perspective; but we have given examples of each of these for the purpose of illustrating the remarks and instructions on colouring given in the Section referred to above. Thus Plate 24 is a perspective drawing, such as are frequently made by architects, requiring a high degree of skill and taste on the part of the colourist. And Plate 27 contains two isometrical views of a building. These examples are intended to serve as models of finished colouring.

In the accompanying plates, you'll find examples of colored mechanical and architectural drawings. These should be studied alongside the section on coloring in the first part of this work. Plate 22 shows a marine engine that’s been carefully colored to indicate the materials used for its various parts, and Plate 23 features a section of permanent way, which includes wrought-iron rail and bolt, cast-iron chair, wooden sleeper, and block, as well as an elevation of a skew bridge, accurately colored and shaded based on the principles explained earlier. This work does not cover the subject of projection—whether orthographic, isometric, or perspective—but we’ve included examples of each to illustrate the comments and instructions on coloring provided in the previously mentioned section. Thus, Plate 24 is a perspective drawing, often created by architects, which requires a high level of skill and taste from the colorist. Additionally, Plate 27 includes two isometric views of a building. These examples are meant to serve as models of finished coloring.

The Plates relating to this Section are Nos. 22, 23, 24, and 27.

The Plates related to this Section are Nos. 22, 23, 24, and 27.


Section VII.—Copying and Downsizing.

Duplicates of drawings are very frequently required; so frequently, indeed, and in such numbers, that their production constitutes a large portion of the work executed in every drawing office. Generally, these duplicates are required to the same scale as the original drawing; but often it becomes necessary to reduce or to enlarge the scale to render the drawing suitable to the purpose for which it is intended. The various means and methods by which such duplicates are produced are, therefore, important matters to the draughtsman,[127] and especially to the young draughtsman, whose labours in the drawing office will for a long time be confined almost exclusively to their employment. These means and methods will now be described.

Duplicates of drawings are often needed; in fact, so often and in such large quantities that making them is a significant part of the work done in every drawing office. Usually, these duplicates are made to the same scale as the original drawing, but there are times when it’s necessary to either reduce or enlarge the scale to make the drawing fit its intended purpose. The different ways and techniques for producing these duplicates are, therefore, crucial for the draughtsman,[127] especially for the young draughtsman, whose work in the drawing office will mostly focus on this task for quite some time. We will now describe these methods and techniques.

Drawing from Copy.

—Drawing from copy is rarely resorted to for the purpose of obtaining duplicates, the process being too slow for practical requirements. But it constitutes the principal means, after the study of projection, by which pupils in the office are initiated into the art of producing drawings. A few hints concerning the best modes of proceeding in these operations will, therefore, be serviceable, both to the instructor and the instructed.

—Copying drawings is rarely used to make duplicates, as the process is too slow for practical needs. However, it is the main method, after learning about projection, by which trainees in the office are introduced to the art of making drawings. A few tips on the best ways to approach these tasks will, therefore, be helpful for both the teacher and the students.

First draw a horizontal and a vertical line through the middle, each way, of the sheet upon which the copy is to be made; draw also similar lines upon the copy. As these lines divide the paper equally, they may, for the sake of distinction, be called “divisional lines.” If the centre lines are not shown on the copy, these must next be drawn in lightly with the pencil, great care being taken to place them correctly. The position of these centre lines relatively to the divisional lines may then be transferred by means of the dividers from the copy to the fair sheet, upon which they must be drawn finely but distinctly. Sometimes it will be necessary to draw other lines upon the copy, and to transfer them in like manner to the fair sheet. The details may then be drawn in upon these centre lines, by transferring to them the measurements taken from the centre lines of the copy. In taking measurements from a centre line through an object that has both sides alike, the dividers should be turned over to ascertain whether the distance on the other side of the centre line is the same, so as to prove the accuracy of the drawing with respect to the centre line. All measurements must be taken in the exact direction of the distance to be measured, and be transferred in the same direction, or an obviously incorrect distance will be the result. In making the mark, the point of the dividers should not be pushed into the paper, a just visible mark being all that is required; care must also be taken, when using the compasses, not to press the leg into the paper, as the holes thus made render circles and arcs inaccurate, are unsightly at all times, and[128] completely destroy the unbroken appearance of a tint on a coloured drawing by retaining the colour. When drawing in circular details with the pencil, it will be well to place a small hand-drawn circle around the centre for reference when inking in; also, when a curve is struck from several centres, a temporary pencil line to represent the radii should be drawn from the centres to their respective arcs.

First, draw a horizontal and a vertical line through the middle of the sheet where the copy will be made; also draw similar lines on the copy. Since these lines divide the paper equally, we can call them “divisional lines” for clarity. If the center lines aren’t shown on the copy, lightly draw them in with a pencil, making sure to place them correctly. Next, transfer the positions of these center lines relative to the divisional lines from the copy to the final sheet using dividers, where they should be drawn finely but clearly. Sometimes, it may be necessary to draw other lines on the copy and transfer them the same way to the final sheet. After that, you can sketch details on these center lines by transferring the measurements taken from the center lines of the copy. When measuring from a center line through an object that has identical sides, the dividers should be flipped to check if the distance on the other side of the center line matches, ensuring the accuracy of the drawing in relation to the center line. All measurements must be taken in the exact direction of the distance to be measured and transferred in the same direction; otherwise, you’ll end up with an obviously incorrect distance. When making a mark, the point of the dividers should not be pressed hard into the paper; a barely visible mark is all that's needed. Care must also be taken with the compasses, as pressing the leg into the paper will create holes that make circles and arcs inaccurate, look unsightly, and damage the smooth appearance of a tint on a colored drawing by retaining the color. When drawing circular details with a pencil, it’s helpful to sketch a small hand-drawn circle around the center as a reference for inking; also, when creating a curve from several centers, a temporary pencil line to represent the radii should be drawn from the centers to their respective arcs.[128]

When two or more views of the same objects are given, they should be worked upon simultaneously; because, having once drawn in the centre lines, one measurement may be applied to the corresponding part in each view, and so time and trouble saved.

When two or more views of the same objects are provided, they should be worked on at the same time; because once you've drawn in the center lines, you can use one measurement for the corresponding part in each view, saving time and effort.

In copying maps and plans by this method of drawing from copy, both the copy and the fair sheets are divided up into small squares, by drawing a number of other lines parallel to the divisional lines described above. The intersection of detail with these lines may then be readily and correctly transferred from the copy to the fair sheet.

In copying maps and plans using this drawing method, both the original and the final sheets are divided into small squares by drawing several additional lines parallel to the previously mentioned division lines. The details can then be easily and accurately transferred from the original to the final sheet by locating their positions at the intersections of these lines.

Copying by Tracing.

—Tracing furnishes the most expeditious means of multiplying drawings. When a tracing is required in outline only, the usual way is to fasten the sheet of tracing paper with ordinary drawing pins over the drawing to be traced; the sheet of tracing paper should be sufficiently large to allow the pins to be clear of the drawing. If the sheet is not large enough for this, strips of thin paper, with one edge gummed to the tracing paper and the other to the board, may be used. When this method is not practicable, the pin holes may be effaced to some extent by turning the drawing upside down, and pressing back the edges of the holes with the flat end of a pencil, after the tracing has been removed. If the tracing is to be coloured, it must be stretched on the board, or it will never lie flat after being moistened; and if the colouring is to be applied before the tracing is removed from the drawing, it is essential that the tracing paper be larger than the drawing, so that it may be cut off without injury to the latter. When there is not sufficient time to stretch the tracing paper, the tendency to buckle up when drying may be greatly lessened by placing weights around any part immediately after the colouring has been laid on. If the tracing is to be mounted, the[129] colouring should be applied after mounting. When tracing cloth is used, a much better appearance will be produced by applying the colour to the back of the tracing.

—Tracing provides the quickest way to make copies of drawings. When you only need an outline, the typical method is to secure a sheet of tracing paper with regular drawing pins over the drawing you want to copy; the tracing paper should be large enough so that the pins don't touch the drawing. If the sheet is too small, you can use strips of thin paper, with one edge glued to the tracing paper and the other to the board. If this method isn't possible, you can slightly reduce the visibility of the pinholes by flipping the drawing upside down and pressing the edges of the holes with the flat end of a pencil after removing the tracing. If you plan to color the tracing, you need to stretch it on the board, or it won't lie flat after getting wet; also, if you're applying color before taking the tracing off the drawing, it's crucial that the tracing paper is bigger than the drawing so you can trim it without damaging the original. If there's not enough time to stretch the tracing paper, you can significantly minimize buckling while it dries by placing weights around the edges immediately after coloring. If the tracing will be mounted, apply the color after it's mounted. When using tracing cloth, better results can be achieved by coloring the back of the tracing.

In performing the stretching process, the sponge must not be applied directly to the tracing paper, but to a piece of clean white paper laid over it; sufficient moisture will pass through to the tracing paper in a few seconds. Sometimes, when the sheet is small, merely breathing upon it will be found sufficiently effective. As tracing paper is thus greatly affected by the breath, it has been recommended to entirely finish both circles and lines within a small area at a time, when copying a drawing, as if all the circles were put in first, as on a drawing, many of them might be out of position before the lines could be drawn. This recommendation is, however, of doubtful value. When tracing from another tracing, a piece of white paper should be placed beneath the copy to render the lines distinct.

In the stretching process, the sponge shouldn't be applied directly to the tracing paper but on a clean piece of white paper laid over it; enough moisture will seep through to the tracing paper in just a few seconds. Sometimes, if the sheet is small, simply breathing on it can be effective. Since tracing paper is easily affected by breath, it's advised to complete both circles and lines within a small area at a time when copying a drawing. If all the circles are done first, many might end up out of position before the lines can be drawn. However, this advice is of questionable value. When tracing from another tracing, a piece of white paper should be placed under the copy to make the lines clearer.

A tracing may be made upon ordinary drawing paper by means of the glass drawing board. This consists of a sheet of plate glass let into a wooden frame about 3 inches wide flush with the face, the inner edges of the frame being rebated for this purpose. This copying board is placed on a table in front of a window, and supported at an angle of about 25°, so as to get a strong light beneath, which light may be increased by placing a sheet of white paper upon the table to reflect upwards. The original drawing being pinned down to this board with a sheet of drawing paper or parchment over it, the finest lines will be plainly visible, and the drawing may be traced in the same manner as upon tracing paper. To alter the light, the angle of the board may be changed. This method, which is coming extensively into use, is a very convenient one for copying plans and maps.

A tracing can be done on regular drawing paper using a glass drawing board. This consists of a sheet of plate glass set into a wooden frame about 3 inches wide, flush with the surface, and the inner edges of the frame are shaped accordingly. This copying board is placed on a table in front of a window, tilted at about a 25° angle to allow strong light from underneath, which can be enhanced by putting a sheet of white paper on the table to reflect the light upward. The original drawing is pinned down to this board with a sheet of drawing paper or parchment over it, making even the finest lines clearly visible, and the drawing can be traced in the same way as on tracing paper. To adjust the light, you can change the angle of the board. This method, which is increasingly popular, is a very convenient way to copy plans and maps.

Copying by Transfer.

—Copying by transfer has superseded the method already described as “drawing from copy.” Transfer paper, as employed for this purpose, may be made in the following manner. Take half an imperial sheet of very thin paper, such as tissue paper, and having stretched it upon a board, rub some common blacklead[130] powder well into it. Then, having removed the dust and superfluous blacklead, well rub the sheet with a cotton rag to prevent its soiling the paper when used for transferring a drawing. A sheet of transferring paper prepared in this way will last for years. Red transfer paper, which is principally used by lithographers, is prepared in the same manner with red ochre.

—Copying by transfer has replaced the method previously described as “drawing from copy.” Transfer paper, used for this purpose, can be made as follows. Take half an imperial sheet of very thin paper, like tissue paper, and stretch it on a board. Then, rub some regular black lead powder into it. After removing the dust and excess black lead, thoroughly rub the sheet with a cotton cloth to prevent it from soiling the paper when used for transferring a drawing. A sheet of transfer paper prepared this way will last for years. Red transfer paper, mainly used by lithographers, is prepared in the same way with red ochre.

To transfer a drawing, the sheet of transfer paper is laid with its prepared face upon the paper which is to receive the drawing, and over this is placed a tracing of the drawing to be copied, carefully pinned down. The straight lines of the tracing may then be transferred to the drawing paper below by going over them with a style or other pointed instrument that will not cut the tracing. For the regular curves and circles, it will be sufficient to mark the centres by a small cross, thus, ×, and the radii by short lines. Other curves may be transferred by means of the French curve. By this means a copy of the original drawing is obtained in black or red lines, which may be afterwards inked in. Though three distinct operations are required in this process, making the tracing, transferring, and inking in, a drawing can be much more rapidly copied by means of it, than by measuring off with the dividers, as in drawing from copy.

To transfer a drawing, place the sheet of transfer paper with its prepared side on the paper that will receive the drawing, and then position a tracing of the drawing to be copied, securing it with pins. You can then transfer the straight lines of the tracing to the drawing paper below by tracing over them with a stylus or any pointed tool that won't cut through the tracing. For regular curves and circles, simply mark the centers with a small cross, like this, ×, and indicate the radii with short lines. Other curves can be copied using a French curve. This way, you'll create a copy of the original drawing in black or red lines, which can later be inked in. Despite the process involving three distinct steps—making the tracing, transferring, and inking in—this method allows for much faster copying of a drawing than measuring off with dividers, as done when drawing from a copy.

Reducing and Enlarging.

—It is evident that in drawing from copy, the drawing may be reduced or enlarged at pleasure, since it is only necessary to take half or twice the dimensions as required. Usually proportional compasses are employed for this purpose. When reducing by scales, it is obviously not essential to use the same scale as that to which the original is made; the dimensions on one scale may be readily transferred to any other, and the student will do well to make himself familiar with the operation.

—It’s clear that when copying a drawing, you can make it smaller or larger as needed, since you just have to take half or double the measurements. Typically, proportional compasses are used for this. When resizing with scales, it’s not necessary to use the same scale as the original; the measurements from one scale can easily be transferred to another, and it’s a good idea for the student to become familiar with this process.

For reducing or enlarging plans, several means are employed: one of these is known as the method of squares, and is illustrated on Plate 26. In the preceding remarks on drawing from copy, it was shown how in copying to the same scale, both the copy and the fair sheet were divided into squares of equal size, and how the intersections of the detail with the lines forming these squares on the copy were[131] transferred by measurement to corresponding points on the fair sheet. It is obvious, therefore, that if the squares on the latter be larger or smaller than those on the former, as the intersections will be transferred to the same relative positions on the fair sheet as they occupy on the copy, the plan, or other drawing, will be enlarged or reduced accordingly. This is the principle upon which drawings are reduced by this method. Proportional compasses are required in the operations.

To reduce or enlarge plans, various methods are used: one of these is called the method of squares, which is demonstrated on Plate 26. In the earlier discussion about copying, it was shown how both the copy and the final sheet were divided into equally sized squares when copying at the same scale. The points where the details intersect the lines of these squares on the copy were then measured and transferred to the corresponding points on the final sheet. It’s clear that if the squares on the final sheet are larger or smaller than those on the copy, the points will still be transferred to the same relative positions, resulting in the plan or drawing being enlarged or reduced as needed. This is the principle behind reducing drawings using this method. Proportional compasses are needed for these operations.

Drawings may also be rapidly reduced or enlarged by means of instruments called the Pantograph and the Eidograph. Both of these instruments are shown on Plate 26. The following very complete description of the pantograph and the eidograph is given in an excellent work on ‘Mathematical Drawing Instruments,’ by W. F. Stouley, of Holborn, London.

Drawings can also be quickly resized, either smaller or larger, using tools called the Pantograph and the Eidograph. Both of these tools are shown on Plate 26. The following thorough description of the pantograph and the eidograph comes from a great book on ‘Mathematical Drawing Instruments’ by W. F. Stouley from Holborn, London.

“The pantograph, as represented on the plate, consists of four rules of stout brass, which are jointed together in pairs, one pair of rules being about double the length of the other. The free ends of the shorter pair are again jointed to the longer in about the centre. It is important that the distance of the joints on each of the short rules should exactly correspond with the distance of the joints on the opposite longer rules, so that the inscribed space should be a true parallelogram. To enable the instrument to work freely and correctly, all the joints should be perfectly vertical, and with double axes. Under the joints casters are placed to support the instrument, and to allow it to move lightly over the paper. One of the long rules has a socket fixed near the end, which carries a tracing point when the instrument is used for reducing. The other long rule, and one of the shorter rules, have each a sliding head fitted upon it, which is similar to one of the heads of a pair of beam compasses. Each head has a screw to clamp it in any part of the rule, and carries a perpendicular socket, which is placed over the edge of the rule in a true line with the joints. Each socket is adapted to hold either a pencil holder, tracing point, or fulcrum pin, as may be required. The rules upon which the heads slide are divided with a scale of proportions:[132] 1—2, 11—12, 9—10, &c., which indicate as one is to two, as eleven are to twelve, as nine are to ten, &c.

“The pantograph, as shown on the plate, is made up of four sturdy brass arms that are connected in pairs, with one pair about twice the length of the other. The free ends of the shorter pair are connected to the longer ones roughly in the center. It's important that the distance between the joints on each of the shorter arms exactly matches the distance between the joints on the corresponding longer arms so that the space formed is a true parallelogram. To ensure the instrument operates smoothly and accurately, all joints should be perfectly vertical and have double axes. Casters are placed under the joints to support the instrument and allow it to glide easily over the paper. One of the long arms has a socket attached near the end, which holds a tracing point when the instrument is used for scaling down. The other long arm and one of the shorter arms each have a sliding head similar to one of the heads of a beam compass. Each head has a screw to secure it anywhere along the arm and includes a vertical socket that aligns with the edge of the arm in a straight line with the joints. Each socket is designed to hold either a pencil holder, tracing point, or fulcrum pin, as needed. The arms that the heads slide on are marked with a scale of proportions: [132] 1—2, 11—12, 9—10, etc., which indicate ratios like one to two, eleven to twelve, nine to ten, etc.

“A loaded brass weight, which firmly supports a pin that fits exactly into either of the sockets, forms the fulcrum upon which the whole instrument moves when in use.

“A heavy brass weight, which securely holds a pin that fits perfectly into either of the sockets, serves as the fulcrum upon which the entire instrument operates when in use.

“The pencil holder is constructed with a small cup at the top, which may be loaded with coin or shot to cause the pencil to mark with the required distinctness.

“The pencil holder has a small cup at the top, which can be filled with coins or small weights to ensure the pencil makes marks clearly.”

“Arrangement is made to raise the pencil holder off the drawing. This is effected by a groove down one side of the pencil holder, in which a cord is fixed, passing from the pencil along the rules, turning the angles over small pulleys, and reaching the tracing point, where it may be readily pulled by the hand to raise the pencil. This will be found especially convenient when the pencil is required to pass over any part of the copy not intended to be reproduced.

“An arrangement is made to lift the pencil holder off the drawing. This is done by creating a groove along one side of the pencil holder, where a cord is attached. The cord runs from the pencil along the rulers, turns the corners over small pulleys, and reaches the tracing point, where it can be easily pulled by hand to lift the pencil. This will be particularly helpful when the pencil needs to go over any part of the copy that isn’t meant to be reproduced.”

“The pantograph is set to reduce drawings in two ways, termed technically the erect manner and the reverse manner. It will be necessary to give full details of each manner, particularly in relation to the scales engraved upon the instrument, which are not very intelligible; indeed comparatively few professional men are sufficiently acquainted with them to avail themselves of their full value.

“The pantograph is designed to reduce drawings in two ways, known as the erect manner and the reverse manner. It’s essential to provide complete details about each method, especially concerning the scales engraved on the instrument, which are not very clear; in fact, relatively few professionals are familiar enough with them to make the most of their full potential.”

“By the erect manner of setting the pantograph, the reduced copy will appear erect; that is, the same way as in the original. The general position of the parts of the instrument set in this manner is shown in the plate, where it will be seen that the fulcrum pin is placed in the socket of the sliding head upon the outside long rule, and the pencil holder in the socket upon the short central rule. By this method of setting the instrument, it will reduce in any of the given proportions not exceeding half-size, technically from 1—2. The scales engraved upon the rules that accord with the erect manner of setting are those which have 1 for the first proportion; as 1—2,[133] 1—3, 1—4, &c. The other scales may be used, but will not accord with the reading, except through arithmetical deductions, the results of which may be given more clearly by the following complete Table than by rules with exceptions.

“By setting the pantograph in an upright way, the reduced copy will appear upright as well, just like the original. The general layout of the parts of the instrument configured this way is shown in the plate, which shows that the fulcrum pin is placed in the socket of the sliding head on the outer long rule, and the pencil holder is in the socket on the short central rule. This method allows the instrument to reduce any of the specified proportions not exceeding half-size, technically from 1—2. The scales engraved on the rules that match the upright setup are those with 1 as the first proportion; like 1—2, 1—3, 1—4, etc. Other scales can be used, but they won’t align with the readings without some mathematical adjustments, which can be more clearly presented in the following complete Table than through rules that come with exceptions.”

Table of Reductions by the Pantograph in the Erect Manner, the Fulcrum being placed in the Socket upon the Outside Rule, and the Pencil upon the Central Rule.

Table of Reductions by the Pantograph in the Upright Position, with the Fulcrum placed in the Socket on the Outer Rule, and the Pencil on the Central Rule.

  Reading
given
upon the
Scales.
Reduces
in the
Proportion
of
 
1 2 1 to  2
1 3 1  3
1 4 1  4
1 5 1  5
1 6 1  6
1 7 1  7
1 8 1  8
1 9 1  9
1 10 1 10
1 11 1 11
2 3 2  5
3 4 3  7
4 5 4  9
5 6 5 11
6 7 6 13
7 8 7 15
8 9 8 17
9 10 9 19
10 11 10 21
11 12 11 23

“In the above Table the readings which are given with the proportions are given to show clearly which proportions agree with the erect scales; many of those that do not agree with the reading are very useful, as 2—3, which is often required to reduce a drawing from a scale of 20 to one of 50.

“In the above table, the readings provided with the proportions are meant to clearly show which proportions match the upright scales; many of those that don’t match the reading are still very useful, like 2—3, which is often needed to scale down a drawing from 20 to 50.”

“In the reverse manner of setting the pantograph, the reduced copy appears reversed, or upside down, to the original. The fulcrum pin is placed in the socket upon the short central rule, and the pencil holder is placed in the socket upon the outside rule. This is generally the most convenient way of using the pantograph for large drawings, as the original and copy come edge to edge, and need not overlap each other, which is often compulsory in the erect manner; the range of scale is also much greater, as the proportions include the unit proportions of the erect scale, and continue in ratios up to full size.

“In the reverse way of setting up the pantograph, the smaller copy appears flipped or upside down compared to the original. The fulcrum pin is inserted in the socket on the short central arm, and the pencil holder is placed in the socket on the outer arm. This is usually the easiest way to use the pantograph for larger drawings, as the original and the copy align perfectly without overlapping, which is often required in the upright position; the scaling range is also much broader, as it includes the unit sizes of the upright scale and extends in ratios up to full size.”

“The following Table will give the readings of the instrument[134] which accord with the reverse setting, and those which may be used to this setting, obtained by calculation.

“The following Table will provide the instrument's readings[134] that match the reverse setting, along with those that can be used for this setting, obtained through calculations.

Table of Reductions by the Pantograph in the Reverse manner, the Fulcrum being placed in the Socket on the Central Rule, and the Pencil in the Socket upon the Outside Rule.

Table of Reductions by the Pantograph in reverse, with the fulcrum positioned in the socket on the central rule and the pencil in the socket on the outside rule.

  Reading
given upon
the Scales.
Reduces
in the
Proportion
of
 
1 2 1 to  1 full size
1 3 1  2
1 4 1  3
1 5 1  4
1 6 1  5
1 7 1  6
1 8 1  7
1 9 1  8
1 10 1  9
1 11 1 10
2 3 2  3
3 4 3  4
4 5 4  5
5 6 5  6
6 7 6  7
7 8 7  8
8 9 8  9
9 10 9 10
10 11 10 11
11 12 11 12

“The above Table and the previous one give the proportions for reductions, the tracing point being in every instance considered upon the outside rule. If it were required to produce an enlarged copy, which the pantograph will do but very imperfectly, the pencil and tracer would have to change places; the proportions of course would read the same.

“The above Table and the previous one show the proportions for reductions, with the tracing point always considered on the outside rule. If an enlarged copy were needed, which the pantograph can produce but not very well, the pencil and tracer would need to swap places; the proportions, of course, would still be the same."

“In using the pantograph some care is required in setting the fulcrum weight in the best position to allow easy action of the instrument over the space required. It should always be roughly tried over the boundary before commencing the copy.

“In using the pantograph, some care is needed to position the fulcrum weight correctly for smooth operation of the instrument over the designated area. It should always be roughly tested along the boundary before starting the copy.”

“The ordinary pantograph will in no instance work over a large drawing at one operation, but it may be shifted about as required, using care, and testing the copy after the fulcrum is moved, to see that the tracer and pencil correspond in those parts already produced, that the pantograph will reach in its shifted position. The fulcrum weight being generally made with needle points to attach it to the drawing will be found very difficult to shift so short a distance as is frequently required. This may be easily remedied by attaching with gum a piece of indiarubber over each of the sharp points, when it is[135] required to be used for large drawings. The rubber will hold the paper sufficiently if the pantograph work freely in the joints and casters, as it should do.

The regular pantograph can't manage a large drawing all at once, but you can move it around as needed, being careful and checking the copy after relocating the fulcrum to make sure the tracer and pencil align with the parts already created that the pantograph can reach in its new position. The fulcrum weight usually has needle points to attach to the drawing, which can be quite tricky to move such a short distance as is often necessary. This issue can be easily fixed by gluing a piece of rubber over each of the sharp points when it's needed for larger drawings. The rubber will hold the paper well if the pantograph operates smoothly at the joints and wheels, as it should do.

“In copying the buildings which frequently occur in plans of estates, &c., a straight slip of transparent horn will be found very convenient to guide the tracing point. Some draughtsmen have the horn cut with an internal angle, by which one side and one end of a building may be traced without shifting the horn.

“In copying the buildings that often appear in estate plans, a straight strip of clear horn is really useful for guiding the tracing point. Some draftsmen have the horn shaped with an internal angle, allowing one side and one end of a building to be traced without moving the horn.”

“Architects and mechanical engineers seldom use the pantograph; however, it may perhaps be sometimes used with advantage for tracing in the most difficult and tedious parts of a drawing with a precision impossible by hand. This applies particularly to such parts as are frequently repeated, as capitals, trusses, bosses, tracery, &c., upon drawings to very small scales. In these instances it is only necessary to make a detail sketch, say six times the size required, and to place the fulcrum weight in such position that the pencil will pass over the parts required to be filled in, the tracer at the same time resting on a corresponding part of the detail sketch, which may be placed in position under the tracing point, and be held sufficiently by two lead weights. For a second ornament on the same drawing, the detail may be shifted without moving the fulcrum.

“Architects and mechanical engineers rarely use the pantograph; however, it can sometimes be useful for tracing the most challenging and tedious parts of a drawing with precision that’s impossible to achieve by hand. This is especially true for elements that are often repeated, like capitals, trusses, bosses, tracery, etc., in drawings at very small scales. In these cases, you just need to make a detail sketch, say six times the size needed, and position the fulcrum weight so that the pencil can cover the parts that need to be filled in. At the same time, the tracer should rest on the corresponding part of the detail sketch, which can be placed underneath the tracing point and held securely in place with two lead weights. For a second ornament on the same drawing, the detail sketch can be moved without adjusting the fulcrum.”

“To follow the outline of any object of the ornamental class, or for the reduction of mechanical drawings to a size suitable for wood or other engravings, the strip of horn will be found particularly useful; indeed, to obtain any degree of precision, it will be better, generally, to let the tracer follow a guiding edge placed over the original for that purpose. French curves are particularly useful, although perhaps only a small piece may be available at once. The tracer may rest on the surface until another part of the curve is found to correspond with the continuation of the line.

“To outline any decorative object or to resize mechanical drawings for wood or other engravings, a strip of horn is especially useful; in fact, to achieve any level of precision, it's usually better to let the tracer follow a guiding edge placed over the original for that purpose. French curves are particularly helpful, although you might only have a small piece available at a time. The tracer can rest on the surface until another part of the curve aligns with the continuation of the line.”

“In some old pantographs a guide is fixed to the tracing point. The guide is a kind of handle similar to a drawing pencil, the point of which is hinged to the point of the tracer. This gives a convenient and firm hold of the point, and appears to the author a useful appendage.

“In some old pantographs, a guide is attached to the tracing point. The guide resembles a handle similar to a drawing pencil, with its tip connected to the point of the tracer. This setup provides a comfortable and secure grip on the point, and the author finds it to be a helpful addition.”

[136]

[136]

“Pantographs have been made in many shapes unnecessary to describe, as they are all of one principle—that of a parallelogram jointed at the four corners; the principal difference being in the position of the points and fulcrum in relation to the parallelogram. One thing is essential in every construction,—that is, that the fulcrum, tracer, and pencil should always be in a true line when the instrument is set for use. The parallelogram may be in any position on the instrument, to the fancy of the maker.

“Pantographs come in various shapes that don't need detailed description, as they all operate on the same principle—a parallelogram connected at four corners. The main difference lies in the arrangement of the points and the fulcrum concerning the parallelogram. One crucial aspect in any design is that the fulcrum, tracer, and pencil must always align properly when the instrument is ready for use. The parallelogram can be positioned anywhere on the instrument, depending on the maker's preference.”

“The Eidograph was invented by Professor Willis in 1821. It is a most ingenious and exact instrument, for many purposes superior to the pantograph, within the range of its working powers, which, however, may be considered to be limited to reducing or copying off, between the full size of the original and one-third of the size; for greater reductions, the balance of the various parts is thrown so far out that it appears clumsy to use, and is really inferior to the pantograph. The great merit of the eidograph is, that within its range it reduces conveniently and exactly in all proportions; for instance, we may reduce in the proportion of 9 to 25 as readily as 1 to 2. It is also in every way superior to the pantograph in freedom of action, there being no sensible friction on the single fulcrum of support, and in its movement it covers a greater surface of reduction.

The Eidograph was created by Professor Willis in 1821. It's a highly clever and precise tool, for many tasks better than the pantograph, though its working range is somewhat limited to scaling down or copying between the original size and one-third of that size. For larger reductions, the balance of the various parts gets so distorted that it feels clumsy to handle and is actually less effective than the pantograph. The main advantage of the eidograph is that within its range, it can conveniently and accurately reduce in any proportion; for example, we can scale down in the ratio of 9 to 25 just as easily as 1 to 2. It is also superior to the pantograph in terms of movement freedom, as there is minimal friction at the single support pivot, and it can cover a larger area for reduction.

“It is somewhat curious that an instrument of such great merit should be little known in the profession, where its uses would be so constantly convenient. This may partly be attributed to the very few published descriptions which are to be found in works treating on mathematical instruments. It is not intended, however, to infer that there are not many eidographs in use, but that the writer presumes they are comparatively little known, from his personal acquaintance with professional men, and from the number of large pantographs that are made and sold to perform work that could be done so much more exactly and conveniently by the eidograph. This remark will not apply to the small pantograph, which is less expensive than a small eidograph, and answers perfectly for the reduction of small plans—as, for instance, those frequently attached to leases and conveyances.

“It’s somewhat strange that such a valuable tool is not well known in the field, where its applications would be really useful. This might be partly because there are very few published descriptions of it in works about mathematical instruments. However, this does not mean that there aren't many eidographs in use; rather, the author assumes they are relatively unknown based on his personal experience with professionals and the number of large pantographs made and sold to do work that could be done much more accurately and conveniently with the eidograph. This observation doesn’t apply to the small pantograph, which is cheaper than a small eidograph and works perfectly for reducing small plans—like those often included with leases and conveyances."

[137]

[137]

“The details of the construction of the eidograph are as follows:—The point of support is a heavy, solid, leaden weight, which is entirely covered with brass; from the under side of the weight three or four needle points project, to keep it in firm contact with the drawing. Upon the upper side of the weight a pin, termed a fulcrum, is erected, upon which the whole instrument moves. A socket is ground accurately to fit the fulcrum, and attached to a sliding box, which fits and slides upon the centre beam of the instrument. The sliding box may be clamped to any part of the beam by a clamping screw attached. Under the ends of the beam are placed a pair of pulley wheels, which should be of exactly equal diameter; the centre pins of these revolve in deep socket fittings upon the ends of the beam. The action of the two wheels is so connected as to give them exact and simultaneous motion. This is effected by means of two steel bands, which are attached to the wheels. The bands have screw adjustment to shorten or lengthen them, or to bring them to any degree of tension. Upon the under side of each of the pulley wheels is fixed a box, through which one of the arms of the instrument slides, and is clamped where required. At the end of one of the arms a socket is fixed to carry a tracing point, at the end of the other arm a similar socket is fixed for a pencil. The pencil socket may be raised by a lever attached to a cord, which passes over the centres of the instrument to the tracing point. The two arms and beam are generally made of square brass tubes, and are divided exactly alike into 200 equal parts, which are figured so as to read 100 each way from the centre, or by the vernier cut in the boxes through which the arms and beam slide they may be read to 1000.

“The details of the construction of the eidograph are as follows: The support point is a heavy, solid lead weight that's completely covered in brass; from the underside of the weight, three or four needle points stick out to keep it firmly in contact with the drawing. On the upper side of the weight, there's a pin, called a fulcrum, which is where the whole instrument pivots. A socket is precisely shaped to fit the fulcrum and is attached to a sliding box that fits and slides along the center beam of the instrument. The sliding box can be locked in place at any part of the beam with a clamping screw attached to it. Under each end of the beam, there's a pair of pulley wheels that must be exactly the same size; the center pins of these wheels rotate in deep socket fittings at the ends of the beam. The two wheels are linked so that they move together perfectly and at the same time. This is done with two steel bands that connect the wheels. These bands can be adjusted in length or tension using screws. On the underside of each of the pulley wheels, there's a box that one of the arms of the instrument slides through and can be clamped as needed. At the end of one arm, a socket is attached for a tracing point, and at the end of the other arm, a similar socket is attached for a pencil. The pencil socket can be raised using a lever connected to a cord that goes over the centers of the instrument to the tracing point. The two arms and the beam are typically made from square brass tubes and are divided equally into 200 parts, which are marked to read 100 in both directions from the center, or, by the vernier cut in the boxes that the arms and beam slide through, they can be read to 1000.”

“There is a loose leaden weight which fits upon any part of the centre beam, packed in the box with the instrument. The weight is used to keep the instrument in pleasant balance when it is set to proportions which would otherwise tend to overbalance the fulcrum weight.

“There is a loose lead weight that can be placed on any part of the center beam, packed in the box with the instrument. The weight is used to keep the instrument nicely balanced when it's set to proportions that would otherwise tip the fulcrum weight.”

“In the above details it will be particularly observed that the pulley wheels must be of exactly equal diameters. It is upon this that[138] chiefly depends the accuracy of the instrument, the periphery of these wheels being the equivalent to the parallelogram, which has been already described as the essential feature of the pantograph. The adjustment of the wheels to size, by turning in the lathe, is, perhaps, the reason the results of the eidograph are more exact than those of the pantograph, which has no equivalent compensation for the always possible inaccuracy of workmanship.

“In the details above, it's important to note that the pulley wheels must be exactly the same size. The accuracy of the instrument primarily depends on this, as the edges of these wheels function like the parallelogram, which we've already discussed as a key feature of the pantograph. Adjusting the sizes of the wheels by turning them in the lathe might be why the results of the eidograph are more precise than those of the pantograph, which lacks a corresponding adjustment to account for potential workmanship inaccuracies.”

“From the details just given, the general principle of the eidograph may be easily comprehended. Thus, the wheels at each end of the beam being of equal size, the steel bands connecting them being adjustable, so as to bring the wheels into any required relative position, it follows, that if the arms fixed to the wheels be brought into exact parallelism, they will remain parallel through all the evolutions or movements of the wheels upon their centres; consequently, if the ends of the arms be set at similar distances from the centres of the wheels, any motion or figure traced by the end of one arm will be communicated to the end of the other, provided the fulcrum of support be placed also at a similar distance from the centre of one of the wheels.

“From the details just given, the basic idea of the eidograph can be easily understood. The wheels at each end of the beam are the same size, and the adjustable steel bands connecting them can be set to bring the wheels into any necessary relative position. This means that if the arms attached to the wheels are aligned perfectly parallel, they will stay parallel through all the movements of the wheels on their axes. Therefore, if the ends of the arms are set at equal distances from the centers of the wheels, any motion or shape traced by the end of one arm will be transferred to the end of the other, as long as the support fulcrum is also placed at an equal distance from the center of one of the wheels.”

“To adjust, or ascertain if the eidograph is in adjustment, is very simple, from the reason that when the arms are parallel the adjustment is perfect for all proportions. The manner of ascertaining this is as follows: place all the verniers at zero, which will bring them to the exact centres of the arms and the beam, place the arms at about right angles with the beam, then mark simultaneously with the tracer and pencil point, turn the instrument round upon its fulcrum, so that the pencil point be brought into the mark made by the tracer; then, if the tracer fall into the mark made by the pencil the instrument is in adjustment. If it should not fall into the same mark, the difference should be bisected, and the adjusting screws on the bands should be moved until the tracer fall exactly into the bisection, which will be perfect adjustment.

“To adjust, or check if the eidograph is properly aligned, is very simple because when the arms are parallel, the alignment is perfect for all proportions. To check this, do the following: set all the verniers to zero, which will align them exactly with the centers of the arms and the beam. Position the arms at about right angles to the beam, then mark at the same time with the tracer and pencil point. Rotate the instrument around its fulcrum so that the pencil point aligns with the mark made by the tracer; if the tracer hits the mark made by the pencil, the instrument is correctly aligned. If it does not, the difference should be halved, and the adjustment screws on the bands should be adjusted until the tracer aligns perfectly with the midpoint, which will indicate perfect alignment.”

“When the eidograph is in adjustment, if the three verniers be set to the same reading on any part of their scale, the pencil point,[139] fulcrum, and tracer will be in a true line. If it should not be so, it will show the dividing of the instrument to be inaccurate. Thus we have a simple way of testing the eidograph in every important particular.

“When the eidograph is adjusted, if the three verniers are set to the same reading on any part of their scale, the pencil point,[139] fulcrum, and tracer will be aligned. If they aren't, it will indicate that the instrument's division is inaccurate. This gives us a straightforward method for testing the eidograph in all significant aspects.

“The divisions upon the eidograph do not positively indicate the reductions required to be performed by the instrument, but merely give a scale, which, with the assistance of the vernier, divides the beam and arms into 1000 parts. To obtain the quantity to which the verniers are to be set, it is necessary either to apply to a table of proportions relative to divisions, or to simple arithmetic, as will be shown. A printed table is very generally placed inside the lid of the box in which the instrument is packed, which contains part of the following proportions:

“The divisions on the eidograph don’t clearly show the reductions the instrument needs to make, but they provide a scale that, with the help of the vernier, divides the beam and arms into 1000 parts. To find out where to set the verniers, you need to use a table of proportions related to the divisions or do some simple math, as will be explained. A printed table is commonly included inside the lid of the box that holds the instrument, which contains some of the following proportions:

Table for Reducing or Enlarging Proportions.

Size Adjustment Table.

Proportions. Divisions
on Bars.
As 1 is to 2 33 ·333
1 3 50  
1 4 60  
1 5 66 ·666
1 6 71 ·428
1 7 75  
1 8 77 ·777
1 9 80  
1 10 81 ·818
2 3 20  
2 5 42 ·857
3 4 14 ·285
3 5 25  
4 5 11 ·111
5 6 9 ·09

“The table here given answers for the general purposes of reducing, such as the bringing of a plan from one chain scale to another, the quantities of which are found by the following rule:

“The table provided here serves general purposes of reducing, such as converting a plan from one chain scale to another, with the quantities determined by the following rule:

To find the quantity equal to any given proportion for the setting of the eidograph.

—Subtract one sum of the proportion from the other, and multiply this difference by 100 for a dividend; add the two sums of the proportion together for a divisor: the quotient from the working of this will give the number to which the arms and beam are to be set.

—Subtract one total of the ratio from the other, and multiply this difference by 100 to get a dividend; add the two totals of the ratio together to get a divisor: the result from this calculation will give you the number to which the arms and beam should be adjusted.

[140]

[140]

“For instance, let it be required to reduce a drawing in the proportion of 3 to 5.

“For example, let's say you need to resize a drawing in a ratio of 3 to 5.

5 - 3 = 2  
  × 100  
5 + 3 = 8 ) 200 ( 25

“The centre beam is to be set to 25 on the side nearest the pencil point, the pencil arm is also set to the 25 nearest the pencil point, and the tracer arm is set to the 25 farthest from the trace. If it were required to enlarge in the same proportion, each side would have to be set at the opposite 25.

“The center beam should be set to 25 on the side closest to the pencil point, the pencil arm should also be set to 25 nearest the pencil point, and the tracer arm should be set to 25 farthest from the trace. If it’s necessary to enlarge in the same proportion, each side would need to be set to the opposite 25.”

“To clearly illustrate the subject, it may be well to give another example. Let it be required to reduce an ordnance plan of five feet to the mile to a scale of three chains to the inch. First, we must have like terms, therefore to reduce both proportions to feet to the inch will, in this instance, be the most simple way; thus:

“To clearly illustrate the subject, it may be helpful to give another example. Let’s say we need to reduce an ordnance plan of five feet to the mile to a scale of three chains to the inch. First, we need to have the same terms, so reducing both proportions to feet to the inch will, in this case, be the simplest way; thus:

5 feet to the mile = 88 feet to the inch.
3 chains to the inch = 198
198 - 88 = 110  
  100  
198 + 88 = 286 )  11000  ( 38·461

“If the slides of the instrument be set to 38·46, it will be, practically, sufficiently near.”

“If the slides of the instrument are set to 38.46, it will be practically close enough.”

Photography is also frequently resorted to for the purpose of reducing and enlarging drawings. The results are satisfactory within certain limits of size; for it is obvious that when the drawing is large, the parallel lines will converge in the photograph, for reasons which will be understood from the laws of perspective. For enlarging small and intricate drawings, photography is very useful. In preparing drawings for reduction by this process, all lines and shadows should be put in in Indian ink only. For optical reasons, colour cannot be reproduced by photography, and as certain colours produce an effect which might not be anticipated by the inexperienced, it will be well to warn such against these effects, to prevent disappointment at the results obtained. Thus blue, for instance, shows[141] very indistinctly, and yellow surfaces in coloured drawings come out very dark.

Photography is often used to shrink or enlarge drawings. The outcomes are good within certain size limits; it’s clear that when a drawing is large, the parallel lines will appear to converge in the photo, due to the principles of perspective. For enlarging small and detailed drawings, photography is really helpful. When preparing drawings for this reduction process, all lines and shadows should be done in Indian ink only. For optical reasons, colors can’t be captured by photography, and since certain colors can create effects that may surprise the untrained eye, it’s best to caution against these effects to avoid disappointment. For example, blue appears very faintly, and yellow surfaces in colored drawings appear very dark.[141]

Drawings for Lithographers and Engravers.

—The drawings required by the lithographic draughtsman are simply outline drawings or tracings, with the shaded drawing for reference when such is required. The shaded drawing should be traced when in outline only with a fine-pointed pencil, not too hard. The engraver prefers such a tracing to the drawing itself, unless he can have the latter before it is shaded. He will, however, require the shaded drawing as a guide in copying in the shadows. As the drawing always gets soiled under such circumstances, unless protected, it is prudent to place it upon a board of the exact size, with a glass over it to fit, the glass being kept in its place by a strip of paper pasted round the edge. The drawing will not be required at all if only an outline engraving is to be made. In that case, the lines that are to be shade lines must be indicated on the pencil tracing; a dot in red ink on each of such lines will be sufficient.

—The drawings needed by the lithographic draftsman are simply outline drawings or tracings, with the shaded drawing provided for reference when necessary. The shaded drawing should only be traced in outline with a fine-pointed pencil, not too hard. The engraver prefers this tracing over the drawing itself unless he can have the original before it’s shaded. However, he will need the shaded drawing as a guide for copying the shadows. Since the drawing often gets dirty under these conditions unless protected, it’s wise to place it on a board of the exact size, with glass covering it, secured by a strip of paper pasted around the edge. The drawing won’t be needed at all if only an outline engraving is to be made. In that case, the lines that should be shade lines must be indicated on the pencil tracing; a dot in red ink on each of those lines will be enough.

A scale should always be put upon lithographs and engravings, instead of merely stating that it is drawn to some particular scale, because the paper just before receiving the impression is damped, and consequently expands. For this reason, no engraving is of the same size as the original drawing; and as the degree of moisture varies, no two engravings from the same plate ever are exactly equal in size. Hence the necessity for drawing the scale is obvious.

A scale should always be included on lithographs and engravings instead of just saying that it’s drawn to a specific scale. This is because the paper is dampened right before it gets the impression, causing it to expand. As a result, no engraving is the same size as the original drawing, and since the level of moisture can change, no two engravings from the same plate are ever exactly the same size. Therefore, including a scale is clearly necessary.

The Plate relating to this Section is No. 26.

The Plate for this Section is No. 26.


[142]

[142]

Trigonometric Formulas.

To compute the Sides of Triangles.—Let A B C be the angles of a plane triangle, and a b c the sides opposite. Then, for right-angled triangles, we have

To calculate the sides of triangles.—Let A B C be the angles of a plane triangle, and a b c be the sides opposite. Then, for right-angled triangles, we have

b = a sin. B or  
b = c tan. B b = c cot. C
c = a cos. B c = b cot. B
c = b tan. C  

and for oblique-angled triangles we have

and for oblique triangles we have

b = a sin. Bsin. A,
c = a sin. Csin. A.

b = a sin. Bsin. A,
c = a sin. Csin. A.

To compute the Areas of Triangles.—When two sides and the included angle are known, a and b representing the two sides and θ the included angle,

To compute the Areas of Triangles.—When you know two sides and the angle between them, a and b represent the two sides and θ the angle in between,

A = a b sin. θ2.

A = a b sin. θ2.

To find by logarithms the area in acres and decimals of an acre,

To calculate the area in acres and tenths of an acre using logarithms,

Log. A = log. a + log. b + log. sin. θ - 15·30103.

Log. A = log. a + log. b + log. sin. θ - 15.30103.

When two angles and the included side are known, β and θ being the angles and a the included side,

When you know two angles and the side between them, with β and θ being the angles and a the side in between,

A = a2 sin. β sin. θ2 sin. (β + θ).

A = a2 sin. β sin. θ2 sin. (β + θ).

To find by logarithms the area in acres and decimals of an acre,

To use logarithms to find the area in acres and decimal portions of an acre,

Log. A = 2 log. a + log. sin. β + log. sin. θ - log. sin. (β + θ) - 15·30103.

Log. A = 2 log. a + log. sin. β + log. sin. θ - log. sin. (β + θ) - 15·30103.

When the three sides are known, a b c being the three sides and s their half sum,

When the three sides are known, a b c representing the three sides and s being their half sum,

A = √s(s - a)(s - b)(s - c).

A = √s(s - a)(s - b)(s - c).

To find by logarithms the area in acres and decimals of an acre,

To calculate the area in acres and decimal portions of an acre using logarithms,

Log. A = log. s + log. (s - a) + log. (s - b) + log. (s - c)2 - 5.

Log. A = log. s + log. (s - a) + log. (s - b) + log. (s - c)2 - 5.


[143]

[143]

Inclined Measurement.

Table showing the Reduction in Links and Decimals of a Link to be made per Chain for every Half Degree of Inclination from 3° to 30°.

Table displaying the reduction in links and decimals of a link to be created per chain for each half degree of inclination from 3° to 30°.

(100 × versed sine
of the inclination.)
Angle. Reduc-
tion.
°  
3 0 0·15
3 30 0·19
4 0 0·24
4 30 0·31
5 0 0·38
5 30 0·46
6 0 0·55
6 30 0·64
7 0 0·75
7 30 0·86
8 0 0·97
8 30 1·10
9 0 1·23
9 30 1·37
10 0 1·53
10 30 1·67
11 0 1·84
11 30 2·01
12 0 2·19
12 30 2·37
13 0 2·56
13 30 2·76
14 0 2·97
14 30 3·19
15 0 3·41
15 30 3·64
16 0 3·87
16 30 4·12
17 0 4·37
17 30 4·63
18 0 4·89
18 30 5·17
19 0 5·45
19 30 5·74
20 0 6·03
20 30 6·33
21 0 6·64
21 30 6·96
22 0 7·28
22 30 7·61
23 0 7·95
23 30 8·29
24 0 8·65
24 30 9·01
25 0 9·37
25 30 9·74
26 0 10·13
26 30 10·51
27 0 10·90
27 30 11·30
28 0 11·71
28 30 12·11
29 0 12·53
29 30 12·96
30 0 13·40

Curvature and Refraction.

Table of Corrections in Feet and Decimals of a Foot.

Table of Corrections in Feet and Decimal Feet.

Distance
In Miles.
Curvature. Refraction. Correction for
Curvature
and
Refraction.
  14   ·04   ·01   ·03
  12   ·17   ·02   ·15
  34   ·37   ·05   ·32
1     ·67   ·09   ·58
1 12 1 ·50   ·21 1 ·29
2   2 ·67   ·38 2 ·29
2 12 4 ·17   ·60 3 ·57
3   6 ·00   ·86 5 ·14
3 12 8 ·17 1 ·17 7 ·00
4   10 ·67 1 ·52 9 ·15
4 12 13 ·55 1 ·93 11 ·62
5   16 ·67 2 ·38 14 ·29
5 12 20 ·18 2 ·88 17 ·30
6   24 ·01 3 ·43 20 ·58
6 12 28 ·18 4 ·03 24 ·15
7   32 ·68 4 ·67 28 ·01
7 12 37 ·52 5 ·36 32 ·16
8   42 ·69 6 ·10 36 ·59
8 12 48 ·19 6 ·88 41 ·31
9   54 ·02 7 ·72 46 ·30
9 12 60 ·20 8 ·60 51 ·60
10   66 ·70 9 ·53 57 ·17

[144]

[144]

INDEX.

  • A.
  • Angle, to bisect, 16
  • ——, to construct, equal to a given angle, 17
  • ——, to draw a line making a given, 15
  • —— of light in mechanical drawings, 48
  • —— —— in topographical drawings, 54
  • Arch, Gothic, equilateral, to draw, 23
  • ——, —— lancet, to draw, 24
  • ——, —— obtuse, to draw, 24
  • ——, —— ogee, to draw, 25
  • ——, —— Tudor, to draw, 24
  • ——, Moorish horse-shoe, to draw, 24
  • ——, semi-elliptical, to construct, 23
  • Architectural drawings, 121
  • Arcs, centres of, to be marked, 10
  • Areas to triangles, to compute, 142
  • B.
  • Bisecting an angle, 16
  • Blacklead paper, 8
  • Book of reference, 97, 101
  • Books for field sketching, 115
  • Borders and corners, 69
  • Borings, 104
  • Bottle indiarubber, 9
  • Boundary maps, 104
  • Bows, 2
  • ——, spring, 2
  • Broken lines, 30
  • Brushes for tinting, 41
  • Buildings—plans, sections, and elevations, position of, on drawing, 125
  • C.
  • Carbonic paper, 8
  • Cartridge paper, 6
  • Centre lines, 10
  • —— ——, care to be taken in placing correctly, 10
  • Centre of circle, to find the, 18
  • Centres of arcs to be marked, 10
  • Cinquefoil, Gothic, to draw, 26
  • Circle, to describe, through three given points, 17
  • ——, to draw a tangent to, 17
  • ——, to draw radii of, the centre being inaccessible, 18
  • ——, to find the centre of, 18
  • Circles, concentric drawing, 10
  • Cities, to represent size of, 112
  • Civil engineers’ plans, 96
  • Cleaning drawing pen, 3
  • Cleaning off drawings, 9
  • Cleanliness, importance of, 9
  • ——, precautions to be taken to ensure, 9
  • Cloth, tracing, 7
  • ——, ——, Sager’s vellum, 7
  • ——, ——, sizes of, 7
  • Colour for buildings, 47
  • —— for cultivated land, 47
  • —— for fences, 47
  • —— for grass-land, 45
  • —— for gravel, 46
  • —— for marsh, 45
  • —— for mud, 46
  • —— for roads, 47
  • —— for sand, 46
  • —— for streets, 47
  • —— for water, 45
  • —— for woodland, 46
  • —— for uncultivated land, 47
  • Colouring cylindrical objects, 124
  • —— drawings, 11, 122
  • —— rivers and streams, 110
  • Colours, 39
  • ——, conventional, Table of, 44
  • —— for sections, 44
  • Compasses, 2
  • ——, manner of using, 2
  • ——, pencil leg of[145], 2
  • ——, points of, 2
  • ——, removing movable leg, 2
  • Competition drawings, paper for, 6
  • Concentric circles, drawing, 10
  • Construction of scales, 11
  • Continuous cartridge paper, 6
  • —— tracing paper, 7
  • Contour lines, 37
  • Contours, to plot, 90
  • Conventional colours, Table of, 44
  • Copying by tracing, 128
  • —— by transfer, 129
  • —— drawings, 11, 126
  • —— from tracing, 11
  • Corners and borders, 69
  • Cross sections, 98, 102
  • Cultivated land, to represent, 32
  • Curvature and refraction, Table for correction of, 143
  • Curved lines, 29
  • —— ——, to draw, 29
  • Cutting off drawings, 7, 11, 12
  • Cylinders, various methods of shading, 64
  • Cylindrical objects, to colour, 124
  • —— surfaces, shade lines, 50
  • —— ——, shading lines, 51
  • Cyma recta, to draw, 25
  • —— reversa, to draw, 25
  • D.
  • Dented drawing-board, to remedy, 14
  • Detail plotting, 89
  • Dimensions of drawing table, 2
  • —— to be written on drawings, 122
  • Distances, scales of, 70
  • Dividing a line into equal parts, 10
  • Dotted lines, 31
  • Dotting pen, 31
  • ——, regular, to produce, 111
  • Drawing, copying and reducing, 126
  • ——, inking in to commence from top of, 10
  • ——, stretching paper for, 6
  • Drawing concentric circles, 10
  • —— from copy, 127
  • —— lines, 10
  • Drawing board, dented, to remedy, 14
  • —— office, essentials of, 1
  • —— ——, gaslights, 2
  • —— ——, position of windows, 1
  • —— ——, skylights unsuitable, 1
  • —— paper, sectional, 8
  • —— ——, to join sheets of, 12
  • —— papers, 5
  • —— ——, sizes of, 5
  • —— pen, 3
  • —— ——, cleaning, 3
  • —— ——, more than one required, 3
  • —— ——, setting, 3
  • —— ——, supplying with ink, 3
  • —— table, dimensions of, 2
  • —— ——, position of, 2
  • Drawings, cleaning off, 9
  • ——, competition, paper for, 6
  • ——, colouring, 11
  • ——, cutting off, 7, 11, 12
  • ——, ink for, 8
  • ——, margin to be left, 11
  • ——, mechanical and architectural, 121
  • ——, parchment for, 8
  • ——, to colour, 122
  • ——, to preserve rolled, 12
  • ——, to reduce or enlarge, 130
  • ——, to remove grease spots from, 10
  • ——, to varnish, 14
  • —— for lithographers and engravers, 141
  • —— for specifications for letters patent, 8
  • Dusters, 2
  • E.
  • Eidograph, 136
  • ——, method of setting, 139
  • ——, table for setting, 139
  • ——, to adjust, 138
  • Elevation of trees, 36
  • Ellipse, to draw, 21
  • Elliptical arch, to construct a semi-, 23
  • Encamping grounds, 112
  • Engravers, drawings for, 141
  • Enlarging by instruments, 131
  • —— by scales, 130
  • —— by squares, 130
  • Equal parts, to divide a line into, 15
  • Equidistant and parallel lines, to draw, 28
  • Equilateral arch, to draw, 23
  • —— triangle, to construct, on a given base, 16
  • Erasure of ink lines, 11
  • —— of pencil marks, 9
  • Error-sheets, 91
  • ——, examples of, 92
  • Errors, 91
  • Essentials of drawing office[146], 1
  • Estate plans, 107
  • Examination of maps and plans, 117
  • F.
  • Ferries, 111
  • Field-book, example of, 80
  • Field sketching, 114
  • Fir-graining, 32
  • Flat-tints, 40
  • Formulæ, trigonometrical, 142
  • G.
  • Gaslights in drawing office, 2
  • Glass-paper to erase ink lines, 11
  • Glue for mounting paper, 6
  • Gothic cinquefoil, to draw, 26
  • —— equilateral arch, to draw, 23
  • —— lancet arch, to draw, 24
  • —— obtuse arch, to draw, 24
  • —— ogee arch, to draw, 25
  • —— quatrefoil, to draw, 26
  • —— trefoil, to draw, 25
  • —— Tudor arch, to draw, 24
  • Gradients, to lay down, 95
  • Graining, fir, 32
  • ——, oak, 32
  • ——, wood, 32
  • Grass-land, to represent, 34
  • Gravel, to represent, 35
  • Grease spot, to remove from drawing, 10
  • H.
  • Hexagon, to describe a regular, 21
  • Hills, representation of, 38
  • ——, sand, to represent, 36
  • ——, shading, horizontal system, 53
  • ——, ——, vertical system, 57
  • ——, sketching, shading, and copying, 113
  • Horizontal zones, 38
  • Horse-shoe arch, to draw, 24
  • I.
  • Importance of cleanliness, 9
  • Inclined measure, Table for correction of, 143
  • Indian ink, 8
  • —— ——, preparation of, for drawing, 9
  • —— ——, quality of, 9
  • Indiarubber, native or bottle, 9
  • ——, vulcanized, 9
  • Ink for drawings, 8
  • ——, Indian, 8
  • ——, preparation of, 9
  • ——, quality of, 9
  • —— lines, erasure of, 11
  • —— ——, to avoid smearing, 10
  • —— slab or saucer, position of, when in use, 10
  • Inking in to commence at top of the drawing, 10
  • Instruments, 2
  • ——, quality of, 2
  • Islands, 110
  • J.
  • Joining sheets of paper, 12, 13
  • Jungle, 112
  • L.
  • Lakes, outline of, 30
  • Lancet arch, to draw, 24
  • Land, cultivated, to represent, 32
  • ——, uncultivated, to represent, 37
  • Lead-pencil marks, erasure of, 9
  • Lettering, 66, 122
  • ——, position of, on plans and maps, 69
  • Letters, arrangement of, in titles, &c., 68
  • ——, kinds to employ, 67
  • ——, mechanical construction of, 66
  • ——, size of, 67
  • Level-book, example of, 94
  • Line, dividing into equal parts, 10
  • ——, regular pentagon on a given, 20
  • ——, to bisect a given straight, 15
  • ——, to construct a square on a given, 19
  • ——, to divide a, into equal parts, 15
  • ——, to draw a, making a given angle, 15
  • ——, to erect a perpendicular to, 15
  • Lines, drawing, 10
  • ——, broken, 30
  • ——, centre, 10, 122
  • ——, combinations of, 31
  • ——, curved, to draw, 29
  • ——, curved and straight, 27
  • ——, contour, 37
  • ——, dotted, 31
  • ——, ink, to avoid smearing, 10
  • ——, parallel and equidistant, to draw, 28
  • ——, reference[147], 78
  • ——, section, 29
  • ——, ——, to draw, 28
  • ——, shade, application of, 48
  • ——, shading, 50
  • ——, ——, in topographical drawings, 52
  • ——, straight, difficulties in ruling, 27
  • ——, ——, to draw, 27
  • ——, wavy, 33
  • —— of greatest descent, 57
  • —— of uneven thickness, 30
  • Lithographers, drawings for, 141
  • Local Government Board, regulations of, 104
  • M.
  • Machine-made paper, 6
  • Machinery, rough sketches of, 121
  • Manner of using compasses, 2
  • Map drawing, 109
  • Maps, boundary, 104
  • ——, field, examination of, 118
  • ——, signs used in, 120
  • —— for division into wards, 104
  • Margin to drawings, width of, 11
  • Marshy ground, to represent, 35
  • Mechanical drawings, 121
  • Mile stones, 112
  • Mining plans, 106
  • Moorish horse-shoe arch, to draw, 24
  • More than one drawing pen required, 3
  • Mountain passes, 111
  • Mounting paper, glue for, 6
  • —— —— on stretchers, 13
  • —— tracings, 129
  • Mud in rivers, to represent, 36
  • N.
  • Native indiarubber, 9
  • Needle to erase ink lines, 11
  • North points, 69
  • Northings and southings, 87
  • O.
  • Oak-graining, 32
  • Obtuse arch, to draw, 24
  • Ogee arch, to draw, 25
  • Orchards, to represent, 36
  • Outline of lakes, 30
  • —— of ponds, 30
  • —— of rivers, 30
  • Oval, to construct, the width being given, 18
  • P.
  • Pantograph, 131
  • ——, methods of setting, 132
  • ——, tables for setting, 133, 134
  • ——, to use, 134
  • Paper, blacklead, 8
  • ——, carbonic, 8
  • ——, cartridge, 6
  • ——, continuous cartridge, 6
  • ——, drawing, 5
  • ——, ——, to join, 12
  • ——, ——, sizes of, 5
  • ——, glue for mounting, 6
  • ——, machine-made, 6
  • ——, sectional, 8
  • ——, stretching for drawing, 6
  • ——, tracing, 7
  • ——, ——, continuous, 7
  • ——, ——, preparation of, 7
  • ——, ——, sizes of, 7
  • ——, ——, to join, 13
  • ——, transfer, 8
  • ——, ——, preparation of, 129
  • ——, to join sheets of, 12
  • ——, to mount on stretchers, 13
  • —— for competition drawings, 6
  • —— for large plans, 6
  • Parabola, to draw, base and height being given, 21
  • Parallel and equidistant lines, to draw, 28
  • Parchment for drawings, 8
  • Parliamentary plans and sections, 100
  • —— standing orders, 98
  • Paste, 14
  • Patent, drawings for specifications, 8
  • Pathways, 111
  • Pen, dotting or wheel, 31
  • Pencil marks, erasure of, 9
  • —— leg of compasses, 2
  • Pencils, 4
  • ——, pointing, 4
  • —— for field sketching, 115
  • Pentagon, to describe, on a given line, 20
  • Perpendicular, to erect a, 15
  • Plan of trees, 36
  • Plans, civil engineers’ and surveyors’, 96
  • ——, estate and town[148], 107
  • ——, large, paper for, 6
  • ——, mining, 106
  • ——, railway, 97
  • ——, parliamentary, 100
  • Plotting, 77
  • —— angular surveys, 81
  • —— contours, 90
  • —— detail, 89
  • —— sounded points in submerged districts, 90
  • —— traverse reference lines, 84
  • —— vertical sections, 92
  • Pointing pencils, 4
  • Points of compasses, 2
  • Ponds, outline of, 30
  • Position of drawing table, 2
  • —— of ink slab or saucer when in use, 10
  • —— of windows in drawing office, 1
  • Precautions to be taken to ensure cleanliness, 9
  • Preparation of colours for tinting, 40
  • —— of ink for drawing, 9
  • —— of stretchers, 13
  • —— of tracing paper, 7
  • —— of transfer paper, 129
  • Preserving drawings, rolled, 12
  • Q.
  • Quality of Indian ink, 9
  • —— of instruments, 2
  • Quatrefoil, Gothic, to draw, 26
  • R.
  • Radii of circle, to draw, the centre being inaccessible, 18
  • Railway plans, 97
  • —— sections, 102
  • —— stations and termini, 112
  • Railways, 112
  • Rectangle, to construct, similar to a given rectangle, 20
  • Rectangular co-ordinates, to plot by, 87
  • Reducing and enlarging drawings, 126, 130
  • —— by instruments, 131
  • —— by scales, 130
  • —— by squares, 130
  • Reference, book of, 97, 101
  • —— lines and points, 78
  • —— lines, secondary, 79
  • Refraction and curvature, Table for correction of, 143
  • Regulations of Local Government Board, 104
  • Removing movable leg of compasses, 2
  • Rivers, beds of, 110
  • ——, mud in, to represent, 36
  • ——, outline of, 30
  • —— and streams, colouring, 110
  • —— ——, inking in, 109
  • Roads, 111
  • Rolled drawings, to preserve, 12
  • Roman cyma recta and cyma reversa, to draw, 25
  • Roofs, to draw, 30
  • Rough sketches of machinery, 121
  • Ruling straight lines, difficulties in, 27
  • Running water, to represent, 33
  • S.
  • Sager’s vellum tracing cloth, 7
  • Sand, to represent, 35
  • —— banks, 110
  • —— hills, to represent, 36
  • Scales, 70
  • ——, choice of, 72
  • ——, construction of, 11, 70, 75, 76
  • ——, diagonal, 75
  • ——, vernier, 75
  • ——, Tables of, 73, 74
  • —— of construction, 74
  • —— of distances, 70
  • —— of shade, English, 59
  • —— ——, Lehmann’s, 57
  • —— ——, standard, 53
  • —— ——, United States’, 59
  • Sectional drawing paper, 8
  • Section lines, 29
  • —— of water, to represent, 30
  • Sections, colours for, 44
  • ——, cross, 98, 102
  • ——, parliamentary, 101
  • ——, railway, 102
  • ——, to plot, from contour map, 96
  • ——, working, 94, 103
  • —— of wood, 32
  • ——, vertical, to plot, 92
  • Semi-elliptical arch, to construct, 23
  • Setting drawing pen, 3
  • Shade lines, application of, 48
  • —— ——, cylindrical surfaces, 50
  • Shading, 48
  • —— cylinders, various methods, 64
  • —— hills, horizontal system, 53
  • —— ——, vertical system[149], 57
  • —— ——, rounding curves, 55
  • —— lines, 50
  • —— ——, cylindrical surfaces, 51
  • —— —— in topographical drawings, 52
  • —— in colours, 63
  • —— ——, cylindrical surfaces, 64
  • —— ——, hill slopes, 63
  • Sides of triangles, to compute, 142
  • Sizes of drawing papers, 5
  • —— of tracing cloth, 7
  • —— of tracing paper, 7
  • Sketches, rough, of machinery, 121
  • Sketching, field, 114
  • Skylights unsuitable for drawing office, 1
  • Sounded points, to plot, 90
  • Specifications for letters patent, drawings for, 8
  • Spring bows, 2
  • Springs, 112
  • Square, to construct, equal to 12, 14, &c., of a given square, 19
  • ——, to construct, in any proportion to a given square, 20
  • ——, to construct, on a given line, 19
  • ——, to construct, which shall be a multiple of a given square, 19
  • Standing orders of Parliament, 98
  • —— water, to represent, 29
  • Stations, railway, 112
  • ——, telegraph, 112
  • Straight-edge, thickness of, 5
  • Straight line, to bisect a, 15
  • —— lines, difficulties in ruling, 27
  • —— ——, to draw, 27
  • —— and curved lines, 27
  • Stretchers, mounting paper on, 13
  • ——, preparation of, 13
  • Stretching paper for drawing, 6
  • —— ——, glue for, 6
  • Supplying drawing pen with ink, 3
  • Surveyors’ plans, 96
  • Swamps, to represent, 35
  • T.
  • Table, drawing, position of, 1
  • ——, ——, size of, 1
  • Table for correction of curvature and refraction, 143
  • —— for correction of inclined measure, 143
  • —— for setting eidograph, 139
  • —— of conventional colours, 44
  • Tables for setting pantograph, 133, 134
  • Tangent, to draw, to a circle, 17
  • Telegraph lines and stations, 112
  • Thickness of straight-edge, 5
  • Tinting, 39
  • Tints, art of applying, 40, 41, 43
  • ——, brushes for applying, 41
  • ——, double or alternate, 42
  • ——, flat, 40
  • ——, preparation of, 40
  • Toll-gates, 111
  • Topographical drawings, shading lines in, 52
  • To remove grease spots from drawings, 10
  • Town plans, 107
  • Towns, to represent size of, 112
  • Tracing, copying from, 11
  • ——, to copy by, 128
  • —— cloth, 7
  • —— ——, Sager’s vellum, 7
  • —— ——, sizes of, 7
  • —-— paper, 7
  • —— ——, continuous, 7
  • —— ——, preparation of, 7
  • —— ——, sizes of, 7
  • —— ——, to join sheets of, 13
  • Tracings, to mount, 129
  • Transfer paper, 8
  • —— ——, preparation of, 129
  • Transferring, to copy by, 129
  • Traverse plotting by rectangular co-ordinates, 87
  • —— reference lines, to plot, 84
  • Trees in plan, 36
  • —— in elevation, 36
  • ——, to represent, 36
  • Trefoil, Gothic, to draw, 25
  • Triangle, equilateral, to construct, 16
  • ——, to construct, the length of base and angles at base being given, 17
  • ——, to construct, the lengths of the sides being given, 16
  • Triangles, primary and secondary, 78
  • ——, to compute the areas of, 142
  • ——, to compute the sides of, 142
  • Trigonometrical formulæ, 142
  • Tudor arch, to draw, 24
  • U.
  • Uncultivated land, to represent, 37
  • V.[150]
  • Varnishing drawings, 14
  • Vellum tracing cloth, Sager’s, 7
  • Vertical sections, to plot, 92
  • Villages, to represent size of, 112
  • Vulcanized indiarubber, 9
  • W.
  • Washes, art of applying, 40, 41, 43
  • ——, brushes for, 41
  • ——, double or alternate, 42
  • Water, running, to represent, 33
  • ——, standing, to represent, 29, 33
  • —— in section, to represent, 30
  • Wavy lines, 33
  • Wells, 112
  • Whatman’s drawing papers, 6
  • Wheel pen, 31
  • Width of margin to drawings, 11
  • Windows, position of, in drawing office, 1
  • Wood-graining, 32
  • Wood sections, 32
  • Woodland, to represent, 36
  • Working sections, 103
  • Z.
  • Zones, horizontal, 38

THE END.

THE END.

LONDON: PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, STAMFORD STREET AND CHARING CROSS.

LONDON: PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, STAMFORD STREET AND CHARING CROSS.


PLATES.

PLATE 2.

PLATE 2.

PLATE 2.

PLAN SENT TO BE COPIED

PLAN SENT TO BE COPIED

PLAN TRACED BY JUNIOR HAND

PLAN OUTLINED BY JUNIOR HAND

PLAN SHEWING WRITING GAUGED

Plan showing writing measured

PLAN FINISHED

Plan completed

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

PLATE 2.

PLATE 2.

PLAN SENT TO BE COPIED

PLAN SENT TO BE COPIED

PLAN TRACED BY JUNIOR HAND

PLAN OUTLINED BY JUNIOR HAND

PLAN SHEWING WRITING GAUGED

PLAN SHOWING WRITING SIZED

PLAN FINISHED

Plan complete.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

Page as large illustration (215 kB)

Page as __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (215 KB)


PLATE 3.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

PLAN OF ESTATE
AT
Haslington,
BUCKS.
1874.

Estate Plan
At
Haslington,
Bucks.
1874.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (370 kB)


PLATE 4.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lithographer.

E & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

Roman Capitals
ITALIC CAPITALS Angle 60 degrees
ROUND HAND Angle 53 degrees
MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION OF LETTERS &c.
8 Lines 6 Lines 4 Lines 3 Lines 2 Lines

Roman Numerals
ITALIC CAPITALS 60-degree Angle
ROUND HAND 53-degree Angle
MECHANICAL LETTER CONSTRUCTION & etc.
8 Lines 6 Lines 4 Lines 3 Lines 2 Lines

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (380 kB)


PLATE 5.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

Open Stone Letters
Do. Do. with Ornament
Ornamental Letters.
Egyptian with Ornament
Roman with Ornament
Do. small with Ornament
Old English with Ornament
Do. Small with Ornament
FIGURES with Ornament

Open Stone Messages
Do. Do. with Ornament
Decorative Letters.
Egyptian with Ornament
Roman with Ornament
Do. small with Ornament
Old English with Ornament
Do. Small with Ornament
FIGURES with Decor

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (260 kB)


PLATE 6.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

ALPHABETS.
Old English Capitals.
Do. Do. Small.
German Text Capitals.
Do. Do. Small.
Gothic Capitals.
Do. Small.
Church Text Capitals.
Do. Do. Small.

ALPHABETS.
Old English Capitals.
Same. Same. Small.
German Text Capitals.
Same. Same. Small.
Gothic style Capitals.
Same. Small.
Church Text Capitals.
Same. Same. Small.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (280 kB)


PLATE 7.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

PLAN of an ESTATE
CALLED
The Lower Cedars
NEAR the TOWN of
BIRMINGHAM
1874.

Estate Planning
NAMED
The Lower Cedars
Near the city of
BIRMINGHAM
1874.


Plan of Property
Situate in the Parish of
Hammersmith,
Middlesex.

Property Plan
Located in the Parish of
Hammersmith
Middlesex.


Plan of a Valuable Freehold Estate
known as
Frognal
NEAR
Hampstead Heath.

Plan of a Valuable Freehold Estate
known as
Frognal
NEAR
Hampstead Heath.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (240 kB)


PLATE 8.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

PLAN of LAND to be LAID OUT
IN BUILDING PLOTS
BELONGING TO THE LATE
Sir Joseph Paxton,
IN LEASES OF 99 YEARS,
SUBJECT TO THE ANNEXED CONDITION.
Scale of Chains.Scale 6 Chains to an Inch.Scale of Feet.

Plan for Land to be Developed
IN BUILDING PLOTS
BELONGING TO THE LATE
Sir Joseph Paxton,
IN 99-YEAR LEASES,
SUBJECT TO THE ATTACHED CONDITION.
Scale of Chains.Scale 6 chains to an inch.Scale of Feet.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (270 kB)


PLATE 9.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

Scale of Chains.
Scale of Feet.

Scale of Chains.
Scale of Feet.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (160 kB)


PLATE 10.

PLATE 10.

PLATE 10.

top frame

ORDINARY BEECH.

COMMON BEECH.

WOOD.

Wood.

FIRS.

FIRS.

LIGHT BRUSHWOOD.

Light brushwood.

FIRS & OTHER TREES.

Firs and other trees.

COCOA & PALM TREES
For Colonial Plans.

COCOA & PALM TREES
For Colonial Plans.

SWAMP.

SWAMP.

MARSH.

MARSH.

 

bottom frame

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

Plate 10.

Plate 10.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

Larger illustrations: ORDINARY BEECH. (60 kB)
WOOD. (60 kB)
FIRS. (70 kB)
LIGHT BRUSHWOOD. (40 kB)
FIRS & OTHER TREES. (60 kB)
COCOA & PALM TREES. (50 kB)
SWAMP. (60 kB)
MARSH. (40 kB)

Larger illustrations: ORDINARY BEECH. (60 kB)
WOOD. (60 kB)
FIRS. (70 kB)
LIGHT BRUSHWOOD. (40 kB)
FIRS & OTHER TREES. (60 kB)
COCOA & PALM TREES. (50 kB)
SWAMP. (60 kB)
MARSH. (40 kB)


PLATE 11.

PLATE 11.

PLATE 11.

 

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

A B
C D
E F
G H

A
C
E
G

Larger illustration: A (100 kB)
B (100 kB)
C (60 kB)
D (80 kB)
E (115 kB)
F (105 kB)
G (60 kB)
H (90 kB)

Larger illustration: A (100 kB)
B (100 kB)
C (60 kB)
D (80 kB)
E (115 kB)
F (105 kB)
G (60 kB)
H (90 kB)

PLATE 11.

PLATE 11.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.


PLATE 12.

PLATE 12.

PLATE 12.

CONSTRUCTION OF HILLS.

BUILDING HILLS.

FINISHED HILLS.

Finished Hills.

CONTOUR HILLS.

Contour Hills.

FINISHED HILLS IN COLOR.

FINISHED HILLS IN COLOR.

CONTOUR HILLS IN COLOR.

CONTOUR HILLS IN COLOR.

HILLS IN CHALK.

HILLS IN CHALK.

BROKEN HILLY COUNTRY.

Rugged hilly terrain.

HILLS IN COLOR.

Hills in Color

 

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

Larger illustrations: CONSTRUCTION OF HILLS. (80 kB)
FINISHED HILLS. (120 kB)
CONTOUR HILLS. (1400 kB)
FINISHED HILLS IN COLOR. (120 kB)
CONTOUR HILLS IN COLOR. (140 kB)
HILLS IN CHALK. (130 kB)
BROKEN HILLY COUNTRY. (130 kB)
HILLS IN COLOR. (130 kB)

Larger illustrations: CONSTRUCTION OF HILLS. (80 kB)
FINISHED HILLS. (120 kB)
CONTOUR HILLS. (1400 kB)
FINISHED HILLS IN COLOR. (120 kB)
CONTOUR HILLS IN COLOR. (140 kB)
HILLS IN CHALK. (130 kB)
BROKEN HILLY COUNTRY. (130 kB)
HILLS IN COLOR. (130 kB)

PLATE 12.

PLATE 12.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.


PLATE 13.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

PLAN SHEWING PROPOSED NEW STREET.
Half Black for Lithography
Half Color for Paper.

PLAN SHOWING PROPOSED NEW STREET.
Half Black for Lithography
Half Color for Paper.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (470 MB).


PLATE 14.

PLATE 14.

PLATE 14.

ASH

ASH

BEECH

BEECH

BIRCH

BIRCH

CEDAR

CEDAR

CYPRESS

Cypress

ELM

ELM

FIR

FIR

MOUNTAIN ASH

Mtn Ash

OAK

OAK

PLANTATION FOREST

Plantation forest

PINE

Pine

POPLAR

POPLAR

SYCAMORE

SYCAMORE

THORN

THORN

WEEPING WILLOW

Weeping Willow

YEW

Yew

MOUNTAINS

MOUNTAINS

ROCKY CLIFF

Rocky cliff

Do. IN COLOR

Do. In Color

Do. IN COLOR

Do. In Color

 

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

Larger images: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_12__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_13__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_14__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_15__
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_16__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_17__
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_18__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_19__

PLATE 14.

PLATE 14.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.


PLATE 15.

SIGNS USED IN PLANS.

Symbols Used in Plans.

Fence Farm Buildings
Fence with Bank Churches
Fence with Hedge Windmills
Footpath Water Mills
Bridle Paths Lime Kiln
Occupation Road Sunk Road
Public Road Raised Road
Wall Quarry
Parish Boundary Inn
Hamlet Boundary Sand Pits
County Boundary Rocks
Parish & County Boundary Mud
Railway Gas Works
Tramway Glass Works
Stream Iron Works
Brook Column
Ditch Old Castle
Mineral Waters Covered Passage
Canal Saw Mill
River Stone Windmill
Ponds Wooden Windmill
Lake Cotton factory
Wooden Fence Woollen Factory
Post and Rail
or so
Well
Chains & Post Dry Well
Hurdle Fence Salt Works
Gates Field Wall

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

Page as large illustration (190 kB)

Page as __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (190 KB)


PLATE 16.

SIGNS USED IN MAPS AND CHARTS.

SIGNS USED IN MAPS AND CHARTS.

               
Fortress Rocks { alwayscovered
Citadel Reef of Rocks
Fortified Castle Sand { nevercovered
Walled Town Sand { sometimeshidden
Open Town Shoals { alwayscovered
Country Town Mud Bank & Beach
dry at low tide
Little Town Rocky Ledges
which reveal and conceal
City Sandy Beach
dry at low tide
Episcopal City Lighthouses
(position of)
Borough or Corporation Can Buoys
Light Ship Nun Buoys
Light House Mooring Buoy
Anchorage for Ships Buoys with Beacons
Do for Coasters Coral Reefs
Wreck Kelp
Stopping Places Fish Weir
Head of Navigation Swampy Land
Floating Light Vessel Rocks
Harbour Rocks dry at low tide
Telegraph Viaduct
Signal House Tunnel
Buoys Railway Bridge
Channel Marks Bridge over Stream
No Current Pontoon Bridge
Direction of Current Bridge (Brick or Stone)
Rocks { sometimes covered Foot Bridge
Rocks { nevercovered Towns

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

Page as large illustration (190 kB)

Page as __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (190 KB)


PLATE 17.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

Plan
OF
Melton Hall Estate
Situate in the
COUNTY of LINCOLN,
1874.

Plan
OF
Melton Hall Estate
Located in the
Lincoln County,
1874.

Large plan (450 kB)

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (450 MB)


PLATE 18.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

PIECE OF ORDNANCE MAP.
PIECE OF CHART SHEWING SOUNDINGS, &c.

PIECE OF ORDNANCE MAP.
PIECE OF CHART SHOWING SOUNDINGS, etc.

Larger illustrations: Ordnance map (540 kB)
Soundings chart (430 kB)

Larger images: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (540 kB)
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ (430 kB)


PLATE 19.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ 170 MB)


PLATE 20.

SAND & GRAVEL. RED SANDSTONE. CLAY & GRAVEL.
LIMESTONE. BOG. CLAY SLATE.
MILLSTONE. GRANITE. SANDSTONE & COAL.
SPOIL BANK. PURE GRAVEL. CLAY CALCAREOUS.
PEAT & CLAY. SANDSTONE. SHELL MARL.
LIMESTONE WITH MINERAL VEINS. BOG WITH TIMBER. SANDSTONE WITH GYPSUM.
MUD. SANDSTONE COARSE & FINE. CLAY SLATE WITH MINERAL VEINS.
COMBINATION OF THE ABOVE.
Spoil Bank
Limestone
Bog
Clay
Sand
Gravel
Red Sandstone
Clay Calcareous
Yellow Clay
Rock

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.


PLATE 21.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

PARLIAMENTARY RAILWAY SECTION.
DITTO, shewing Geological Strata.

PARLIAMENTARY RAILWAY SECTION.
SAME, showing Geological Layers.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (350 KB)


PLATE 22.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

PIECE OF MARINE ENGINE OF H. M. S. S. “RESEARCH”.

PIECE OF MARINE ENGINE OF H. M. S. S. “RESEARCH”.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (450 KB)


PLATE 23.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

SKEW BRIDGE.
PERMANENT WAY.

Skew Bridge.
Permanent Way.


PLATE 24.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.


PLATE 25.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

Ornamental Writing.
London

Decorative Writing.
London


PLATE 26.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

METHODS of REDUCING or ENLARGING.
by SQUARES
by EIDOGRAPH
by ENGLISH PENTAGRAPH
by FRENCH PENTAGRAPH
and by Photography.

Methods for Reducing or Enlarging.
using SQUARES
using an Eidograph
using an English pentagraph
using a French pentagraph
and with Photography.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (150 kB)


PLATE 27.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

ISOMETRICAL view of building.
EXTERIOR.
INTERIOR.

ISOMETRIC view of building.
EXTERIOR.
INTERIOR.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (390 kB)


PLATE 28.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

Depositary Rocks. 1-18
Igneous Rocks. a-b

Depositary Rocks. 1-18
Igneous Rocks. A-B

Larger map (560 kB)

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (560 kB)


PLATE 29.

Signs used in Indian & Colonial Plans.

Signs used in Indian & Colonial Plans.

Telegraph Hills with Peaks
Trunk Road (Metalled)
District Do.
Do. Unmetalled Do. in Contour
Ford
Nullah or Khall
Bund or Embankment Scarped Face of Hill
Old Bank of River
Hedges with Trees Ravine
River with Islands
River with Sand Bank Garden
Stone Sluice Gate
Lake or Tank Paun Garden
Salt Pans Village
Cultivated Ground Ferry
Flying Bridge
Burial Ground Haut or Bazar
Mud Fort
Sand Hills Pucka Fort
Deserted Village
Ridge of Hills Principal Survey Stations
Secondary Do.
High Ground Flag for Surveying

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

Page as large illustration (200 kB)

Page as __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (200 KB)


PLATE 30.

Signs used in Indian & Colonial Plans.

Signs used in Indian & Colonial Plans.

Salt Golah Jhow Jungle
Salt Chowkey
Silk Factory Jheel
Indigo Factory Tamarind Trees
Sugar Factory Bamboo Jungle
Post Office Salt Waste
Dak Bungalow
Police or Thana Stan. Salt Waste with Jungle
Magistrate’s Kutcherry Mangoe Tope
Stone or Pucka Houses
Mahomedan Mosque Cocoa Nut Trees
Hindoo Temple
Telegraph Tower Betel Nut Trees
Signal Staff Trees generally
Boundary Pillar Date Trees
Wooden Boundary Post
Pucka Well Palm or Tar Trees
Kucha Well
Forest Jungles Mangrove
Low Jungles Brides
Grass Jungles Rail Road

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

Page as large illustration (180 kB)

Page as __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (180 KB)


PLATE 31.

Military Signs and Fortifications.

Military Signs and Fortifications.

Tête du Pont Passable for Troops
Infantry Engaged
Vedettes Cavalry Encamped
Village Inundated
Military Pits
Mines Sand Bags
Infantry Encamped Intrenchment
Village Burnt Cannon
Cavalry Engaged
Caltrop or Crows Feet Park
Trenches Palisades
Barrier
Mortar & Shells
Block House
Field Piece and Limber
Ammunition Waggon and Limber
SECTION of GLACIS, DITCH, RAMPART, etc.
       

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

Page as large illustration (180 kB)

Page as __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (180 KB)


PLATE 32.

Military Signs and Fortifications.

Military Signs and Fortifications.

Infantry Column Impassible for Artillery
Cavalry Line Abatis
Chevaux de frise
Redoubt
Mortar Battery
Impassible for Cavalry Cavalry Column
Earned Guns on March
Field of Battle Gun Battery
Missing Impassible for Infantry
Sentinel Baggage Waggons
Infantry Line
Guns in Position Boosted
Castles
Closed
Palisades
Rifle Pits Redan or Fleche
Wire basket walls Fascines
   
Plan of a bastioned fort with lunettes.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

Page as large illustration (240 kB)

Page as __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (240 KB)


PLATE 33.

B. Alexander, Lith.

B. Alexander, Lith.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

E. & F. N. Spon. London & New York.

PORTION of MINING PLAN shewing PILLAR WORKINGS.
as SHEWN by HAND on PAPER.
as SHEWN by ENGRAVING or LITHOGRAPHY.

SECTION OF THE MINING PLAN DISPLAYING PILLAR OPERATIONS.
AS SHOWN BY HAND ON PAPER.
AS DISPLAYED BY ENGRAVING OR LITHOGRAPHY.

Larger plan (530 kB)

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ (530 KB)


Transcriber’s Notes

Inconsistencies in spelling, hyphenation, lay-out, the use of quote marks, diacriticals and accents, etc. have been retained.

Inconsistencies in spelling, hyphenation, layout, the use of quotation marks, diacritics and accents, etc., have been kept.

The minor differences between the Table of Contents and the headings in the text have not been standardised.

The small differences between the Table of Contents and the headings in the text haven't been standardized.

Several plates have been printed with poor colour overlays, this has not been remedied.

Several plates have been printed with bad color overlays, and this hasn't been fixed.

Some double-page plates have been re-combined, but the area between the pages may not be exactly as printed in the original work.

Some double-page plates have been re-combined, but the space between the pages may not match exactly as it was printed in the original work.

Page 136, Professor Willis: should be Professor (William) Wallace; Professor (Robert) Willis invented other drawing tools.

Page 136, Professor Wallace: should be Professor (William) Wallace; Professor (Robert) Willis invented other drawing tools.

Plate 26, pentagraph (2×): as printed in the source document.

Plate 26, pantograph (2×): as printed in the source document.

Changes made:

Changes made:

Some missing punctuation has been added silently, some minor typographical errors have been corrected silently.

Some missing punctuation has been added quietly, and some minor typos have been fixed quietly.

Some tables, calculations, formulas, etc. have been re-arranged for better readability.

Some tables, calculations, formulas, etc. have been reorganized for better readability.

Some of the illustrations and their captions have been rotated.

Some of the illustrations and their captions have been turned.

Page 15: apply a straight-edge F changed to apply a straight-edge D

Page 15: change "apply a straight-edge F" to "apply a straight-edge D"

Page 75, Fig. 75: Lehman’s Scale changed to Lehmann’s Scale

Page 75, Fig. 75: Lehman's Scale changed to Lehmann's Scale

Page 83: the third reference line C D changed to the third reference line C A

Page 83: the third reference line C D changed to the third reference line C A

Page 132: the erect manner and the reverse manner changed to the erect manner and the reverse manner.

Page 132: the straight posture and the backward posture changed to the straight posture and the backward posture.

Heading PLATES added after Index.

Heading PLATES added after Index.




        
        
    
Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!